Carrier WeatherExpert N3, WeatherExpert N8, WeatherExpert N6, WeatherExpert N7, WeatherExpert N9 Controls, Start-up, Operation, Service And Troubleshooting Instructions

...

Download

WeatherExpert

48/50N2,N3,N4,N5,N6,N7,N8,N9

Packaged Rooftop Cooling Units with Gas Heat, Optional

Electric Heat, or Hydronic Heat and ComfortLink Controls

Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Service and Troubleshooting

™

Version 2.x

CONTENTS

Page

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,3

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,4

BASIC CONTROL USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4,5

ComfortLink Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Navigator™ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

System Pilot™ Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

CCN Tables and Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

• GENERIC STATUS DISPLAY TABLE

START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Unit Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Internal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Accessory Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Crankcase Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Evaporator Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Gas Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

CONTROLS QUICK START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-29

Variable Air Volume Units Using Return Air

Sensor or Space Temperature Sensor. . . . . . . . . 27

Multi-Stage Constant Volume and Staged Air

Volume Units with Mechanical Thermostat. . . . 27

Multi-Stage Constant Volume and Staged Air

Volume Units Units with Space Sensor . . . . . . . 27

Economizer Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Indoor Air Quality Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Exhaust Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Set Clock on VFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Programming Operating Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

SERVICE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-33

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Service Test Mode Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Independent Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Humidi-MiZer

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Heating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

SERVICE COMPONENT TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-39

THIRD PARTY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-41

Thermostat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Alarm Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Remote Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

VFD Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Supply Air Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Demand Limit Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Economizer/Outdoor Air Damper Control . . . . . . . 40

CONTROLS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-97

Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

• SYSTEM MODES

•HVAC MODES

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Page

Unit Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Cooling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

• MACHINE DEPENDENT CONFIGURATIONS

• COOLING CONFIGURATION

• COOL MODE SELECTION PROCESS

• COOL MODE DIAGNOSTIC HELP

• SUMZ COOLING ALGORITM

• DEMAND LIMIT CONTROL

• HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL

• ECONOMIZER INTEGRATION WITH MECHANICAL COOLING

Heating Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

• POST FILTER APPLICATION

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

• HEAT MODE SELECTION PROCESS

• TEMPERATURE DRIVEN HEAT MODE EVALUATION

• HEAT MODE DIAGNOSTIC HELP

• TWO-STAGE GAS AND ELECTRIC HEAT CONTROL

• HYDRONIC HEATING CONTROL

• MODULATING GAS HEATING CONTROL

• SCR ELECTRIC HEAT CONTROL

• CONTROL BOARD INFORMATION

• RELOCATE SAT FOR HEATING-LINKAGE APPLICATIONS

• TEMPERING MODE

Static Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

• RELATED POINTS

• STATIC PRESSURE RESET

Fan Status Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

• GENERAL

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

• SUPPLY FAN STATUS MONITORING LOGIC

Dirty Filter Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

• ECONOMIZER FAULT DETECTION AND DIAGNOSTICS (FDD) CONTROL

• DIFFERENTIAL DRY BULB CUTOFF CONTROL

• ECONOMIZER SELF TEST

• FDD CONFIGURATIONS

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

• ECONOMIZER OPERATION

• ECONOMIZER CHANGEOVER SELECTION

• UNOCCUPIED ECONOMIZER FREE COOLING

• OUTDOOR AIR CFM CONTROL

• ECONOMIZER OPERATION CONFIGURATIONS

• ECONOMIZER DIAGNOSTIC HELP

Building Pressure Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

Smoke Control Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

• FIRE SMOKE INPUTS

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53480114-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 48/50N-2T Pg 1 7-14 Replaces: 48/50N-1T

CONTENTS (cont)

Page

• AIRFLOW CONTROL DURING FIRE/SMOKE MODES

• SMOKE CONTROL CONFIGURATION

Indoor Air Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

•OPERATION

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

• PRE-OCCUPANCY PURGE

• OPTIONAL AIRFLOW STATION

Humidification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

•OPERATION

• CONFIGURING THE HUMIDIFIER ACTUATOR

Dehumidification and Reheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

•OPERATION

Humidi-MiZer

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

•OPERATION

• HUMIDI-MIZER MODES

Temperature Compensated Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

• SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

• TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED START LOGIC

Carrier Comfort Network

Alert Limit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Sensor Trim Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Discrete Switch Logic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

VFD Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Remote Control Switch Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Hot Gas Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Space Temperature Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

TIME CLOCK CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97-99

TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99-127

Complete Unit Stoppage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Single Circuit Stoppage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Service Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Restart Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Humidi-MiZer

Thermistor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Transducer Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Forcing Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Run Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

• AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS

• ECONOMIZER RUN STATUS

• COOLING INFORMATION

• EXV INFORMATION DISPLAY TABLE

• VFD INFORMATION DISPLAY TABLE

• OUTDOOR FAN VFD DISPLAY TABLE

• MODE TRIP HELPER

• CCN/LINKAGE DISPLAY TABLE

• COMPRESSOR RUN HOURS DISPLAY TABLE

• COMPRESSOR STARTS DISPLAY TABLE

• SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS DISPLAY TABLE

Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . 127-151

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Factory-Installed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Accessory Control Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152-173

Service Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Refrigerant Feed Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Refrigeration Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Gas System Adjustment (48N Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Moisture/Liquid Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Adaptive Dehumidification

(CCN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Filter Drier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Page

Liquid Line Service Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Temperature Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Control Circuit, 115 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Control Circuit, 24 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Gas Heat (48N Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Compressor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Compressor Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES. . 174-187

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188-207

APPENDIX C — UNIT STAGING TABLES. . . . 208-210

APPENDIX D — VFD INFORMATION . . . . . . . . 211-220

APPENDIX E — MODE SELECTION

PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION

OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223-233

APPENDIX G — OPTIONAL MOTORMASTER V

CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234-237

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

CONTROLS SET POINT AND

CONFIGURATION LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CL-1 - CL-7

UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CL-8

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components. Only trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or service air-conditioning equipment. Untrained personnel can perform the basic maintenance functions of replacing filters. Trained service personnel should perform all other operations.

When working on air-conditioning equipment, observe precautions in the literature, tags and labels attached to the unit, and other safety precautions that may apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing operations. Have fire extinguishers available for all brazing operations.

WARNING

Before performing service or maintenance operation on unit, turn off and lock off main power switch to unit. Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation and service. The unit may have an internal non-fused disconnect or a field-installed disconnect.

CAUTION

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out com- ponents or to bypass or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic modules or electrical components.

WARNING

1. Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, or maintenance can cause property damage, personal injury, or loss of life. Refer to the User’s Information Manual provided with this unit for more details.

2. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance.

WARNING

DO NOT USE TORCH to remove any component. System contains oil and refrigerant under pressure.

To remove a component, wear protective gloves and goggles and proceed as follows:

a. Shut off electrical power to unit. b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from sys-

tem using both high-pressure and low pressure ports.

c. Traces of vapor should be displaced with nitrogen

and the work area should be well ventilated. Refrigerant in contact with an open flame produces toxic gases.

d. Cut component connection tubing with tubing cutter

and remove component from unit. Use a pan to catch any oil that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil to add to the system.

e. Carefully unsweat remaining tubing stubs when nec-

essary. Oil can ignite when exposed to torch flame.

Failure to follow these procedures may result in personal injury or death.

CAUTION

DO NOT re-use compressor oil or any oil that has been exposed to the atmosphere. Dispose of oil per local codes and regulations. DO NOT leave refrigerant system open to air any longer than the actual time required to service the equipment. Seal circuits being serviced and charge with dry nitrogen to prevent oil contamination when timely repairs cannot be completed. Failure to follow these procedures may result in damage to equipment.

WARNING

What to do if you smell gas:

1. DO NOT try to light any appliance.

2. DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use any phone in your building.

3. IMMEDIATELY call your gas supplier from a neighbor’s phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions.

4. If you cannot reach your gas supplier call the fire department.

GENERAL

This book contains Start-Up, Controls, Operation, Troubleshooting and Service information for the 48/50N Series rooftop units. See Table 1. These units are equipped with ComfortLink controls version 2.0 or higher. Use this guide in conjunction with the separate installation instructions packaged with the unit.

The 48/50N Series units provide ventilation, cooling, and heating (when equipped) in variable air volume (VAV), staged air volume (SAV™) and constant volume (CV) applications.

Table 1 — N Series Product Line

UNIT SIZE APPLICATION

48N2 All

48N3 All

48N4 All

48N5 All

48N6 All

48N7 All

48N8 All

48N9 All

50N2 All

50N3 All

50N4 All

50N5 All

50N6 All

50N7 All

50N8 All

50N9 All

LEGEND

CV — Constant Volume SAV — Staged Air Volume VAV — Variable Air Volume

Vertical Suppy/Return, CV/SAV ComfortLink Controls

Vertical Supply/Return, VAV Comfor tLink Controls

Horizontal Suppy/Return, CV/SAV ComfortLink Controls

Horizontal Suppy/Return, VAV ComfortLink Controls

Vertical Suppy/Horizontal Return, CV/SAV ComfortLink Controls

Vertical Supply/Horizontal Return, VAV ComfortLink Controls

Horizontal Suppy/Ver tical Return, CV/SAV ComfortLink Controls

Horizontal Suppy/Ver tical Return, VAV ComfortLink Controls

Vertical Suppy/Return, CV/SAV ComfortLink Controls

Vertical Supply/Return, VAV Comfor tLink Controls

Horizontal Suppy/Return, CV/SAV ComfortLink Controls

Horizontal Suppy/Return, VAV ComfortLink Controls

Vertical Suppy/Horizontal Return, CV/SAV ComfortLink Controls

Vertical Supply/Horizontal Return, VAV ComfortLink Controls

Horizontal Suppy/Ver tical Return, CV/SAV ComfortLink Controls

Horizontal Suppy/Ver tical Return, VAV ComfortLink Controls

The 48/50N units contain the factory-installed ComfortLink control system which provides full system management. The main base board (MBB) stores hundreds of unit configuration settings and 8 time of day schedules. The MBB also performs self diagnostic tests at unit start-up, monitors the operation of the unit, and provides alarms and alert information. The system also contains other optional boards that are connected to the MBB through the Local Equipment Network (LEN). Information on system operation and status are sent to the MBB processor by various sensors and optional board(s) that are located at the unit and in the conditioned space. Access to the unit controls for configuration, set point selection, schedule creation, and service can be done via local display, using the supplied Navigator™ device, or through the Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) using ComfortVIEW™ software, Network Service Tool, or other CCN device.

The ComfortLink system controls all aspects of the rooftop. It controls the supply-fan motor, compressors, and economizer to maintain the proper temperature conditions. The controls also cycle condenser fans to maintain suitable head pressure. All units are equipped with a supply fan VFD (variable frequency drive). The VAV units utilize the VFD for supply duct pressure control. The ComfortLink controls can directly control the speed of the VFD based on a static pressure sensor input. In addition, the ComfortLink controls can adjust the building pressure using an optional VFD controlled power exhaust or return fan controlled from a building pressure sensor. The control safeties are continuously monitored to prevent the unit from operating under abnormal conditions. Sensors include pressure transducers and thermistors. For units on CV applications, the ComfortLink controls will direct the VFD to drive the supply fan at low speed for low cool or heat demand and high speed on high cool or heat demand.

A scheduling function, programmed by the user, controls

n Sta

ice

era

ture

res

ure

tpo

utp

uts

fig

tion

Clo

ating

Ala

Sta

tus

Fig. 1 — Accessory Navigator Display

the unit occupied/unoccupied schedule. Up to 8 different schedules can be programmed.

The controls also allow the service person to operate a service test so that all the controlled components can be checked for proper operation.

BASIC CONTROL USAGE

ComfortLink Controls —

are a comprehensive unit-management system. The control system is easy to access, configure, diagnose and troubleshoot.

The controls are flexible, providing constant volume and variable air volume cooling control sequences, and heating control sequences for two-stage electric and gas systems, modulating gas heating, SCR (silicon control rectifier) electric heat, and hydronic heat in both Occupied and Unoccupied schedule modes. This control also manages:

• VAV duct pressure (VAV units only), with configurable

static pressure reset

• Building pressure through four different power exhaust

schemes

• Return fan applications using fan tracking

• Condenser fan head pressure control

• Dehumidification (with optional reheat) and humidifier

sequences

• Space ventilation control, in Occupied and Unoccupied

periods, using CO

tilation defined by damper position or ventilation airflow

measurement

• Smoke control functions

• Occupancy schedules

• Occupancy or start/stop sequences based on third party

signals

• Alarm status and history and run time data

• Management of a complete unit service test sequence

• Economizer operation and Fault Diagnosis and Detection

(FDD) per California Energy Commission (CEC) Title

24-2013.

System diagnostics are enhanced by the use of sensors for air and refrigerant temperatures and pressures. Unit-mounted actuators provide digital feedback data to the unit control.

The ComfortLink controller is cable-ready for connection to the Carrier Comfort Network system. The control provides high-speed communications for remote monitoring. Multiple 48/50N Series units can be linked together (and to other ComfortLink controller equipped units) using a 3-wire communication bus. The unit may be equipped with optional BACnet communication capability.

The ComfortLink controller is also capable of communicating with a BACnet network by going through a UPC Open controller. This permits third-party building management systems to provide remote monitoring and control of 48/50N units. See Appendix F for additional information.

The ComfortLink control system is easy to access through the use of a Navigator™ display. A computer is not needed to perform unit start-up. The Navigator module provides detailed explanations of control information.

For service flexibility, a factory-supplied Navigator™ module has an extended communication cable that can be plugged into the unit's communication network either at the main control box or at the opposite end of the unit, at a remote modular plug. The Navigator display provides the menu structure, control access and display data for the unit.

Navigator™ Display — The hand-held Navigator dis-

play is used with the 48/50N Series units. See Fig. 1. The Navigator display is plugged into the RJ-14 jack in the main control box on the COMM board. The Navigator display can also be

sensors or external signals, with ven-

The ComfortLink controls

(CCN) building management

plugged into the RJ-14 jack located on the unit corner post located at the economizer end of the unit.

Operation — All units are shipped from the factory with

the Navigator display, which is located in the main control box. See Fig. 1. The Navigator display provides the user with an interface to the ComfortLink control system. The display has arrow keys, an ESC key and an ENTER key. These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display structure. The Navigator has four lines of display. See Table 2 for the menu structure.

The four keys are used to navigate through the display structure, which is organized in a tiered mode structure. See Table 2 for the first two levels of the mode structure. If the buttons have not been used for a period, the display will default to the AUTO VIEW display category as shown under the RUN STATUS category. To show the top-level display, press the ESC key until a blank display is shown. Then use the and

keys to scroll through the top level categories.These are listed in Appendix A and will be indicated on the Navigator by the LED next to each mode listed on the face of the display.

When a specific mode or sub-mode is located, push the ENTER key to enter the mode. Depending on the mode, there may be additional tiers. Continue to use and keys and the ENTER key until the desired display item is found. At any time, the user can move back a mode level by pressing the ESC key.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The display will prompt for a PASSWORD. Use the ENTER and arrow keys to enter the four digits of the password. The default password is 1111.

Pressing the ESC and ENTER keys simultaneously will display an expanded text description for each display point.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. If the display is in rotating auto-view, press the ENTER key to stop the display at the desired item. Press the ENTER key again so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state of an item and press the ENTER key to accept it. Press the ESC key and the item, value or units display will resume. Repeat the process as required for other items.

If the user needs to force a variable, follow the same process as when editing a configuration parameter. When using the Navigator display, a forced variable will be displayed with a blinking "f" following its value. For example, if supply fan requested (FA N. F ) is forced, the display shows "YESf", where the "f" is blinking to signify a force on the point. Remove the

SCROLL

NAVIGATE/ EXIT

MODIFY/ SELECT

PAGE

Fig. 2 — System Pilot User Interface

force by selecting the point that is forced with the ENTER key and then pressing both arrow keys simultaneously.

Depending on the unit model, factory-installed options and field-installed accessories, some of the items in the various mode categories may not apply.

Conventions Used in This Manual — This manual

will use the following conventions for discussing configuration points for the local display (Navigator™).

Parameter names will be written with the Mode name first, then any sub-modes, then the parameter name, each separated by an arrow symbol (). Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an example, the IAQ Economizer Override Position which is located in the Configuration mode, Indoor Air Quality Configuration sub-mode, and the Air Quality Set Points sub-sub-mode, would be written as Configuration



IAQIAQ.SPIQ.O.P.

This path name will show the user how to navigate through the local display structure to reach the desired configuration. The user would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing ENTER to move into the next level of the menu structure.

When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example, Configu-

ration



IAQAQ.CFIQ.AC = 1 (IAQ Analog Input).

Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously will display an expanded text description of the parameter name. The expanded description is shown in the local display tables but will not be shown with the path names in text.

The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network

) point names are also cross-referenced in the local display tables (Appendix A) for users interface with the unit via CCN instead of the local display. The CCN tables are located in Appendix B of this manual.

System Pilot™ Interface — The System Pilot inter-

face (33PILOT-01) is a component of the Carrier 3V™ system and can serve as a CCN user-interface and configuration tool.

Additionally, the System Pilot interface can serve as a wallmounted temperature sensor for space temperature measurement. The occupant can use the System Pilot interface to change set points. A security feature is provided to limit access of features for unauthorized users. See Fig. 2 for System Pilot interface details.

CCN Tables and Display — In addition to the Naviga-

tor display, the user can also access the same information through the CCN tables by using the System Pilot, Service Tool or other CCN programs. Details on the CCN tables are summarized in Appendix B. The point names displayed in the CCN tables and the corresponding local display acronyms available via the Navigator display may be different and more items are displayed in the CCN tables. As a reference, the CCN point names are included in the local display menus shown in Appendix A.

GENERIC STATUS DISPLAY TABLE — The GENERICS points table allows the service/installer the ability to create a custom table in which up to 20 points from the 5 CCN categories (Status, Config/Service-Config, Set Point, Maintenance, and Occupancy) may be collected and displayed.

In the Service-Config table section, there is a table named "generics." This table contains placeholders for up to 20 CCN point names and allows the user to decide which points are displayed in the GENERIC points table. Each one of these placeholders allows the input of an 8-character ASCII string.

Using a CCN method of interface, go into the Edit mode for the Service-Config table "generics" and enter the CCN name for

each point to be displayed in the custom points table in the order they will be displayed. When done entering point names, download the table to the rooftop unit control.

IMPORTANT: The computer system software (ComfortVIEW™, Service Tool, etc.) that is used to interact with CCN controls always saves a template of items it considers as static (e.g., limits, units, forcibility, 24character text strings, and point names) after the software uploads the tables from a control. Thereafter, the software is only concerned with run time data like value and hardware/force status. With this in mind, it is important that anytime a change is made to the Service-Config table "generics" (which in turn changes the points contained in the GENERIC point table), that a complete new upload be performed. This requires

that any previous table database be completely removed first. Failure to do this will not allow the

user to display the new points that have been created and the software will have a different table database than the unit control.

START-UP

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to start unit, even momentarily, until all items on the Start-Up Checklist (at the back of this book) and the following steps have been completed.

IMPORTANT: The unit is shipped with the unit control disabled. To enable the control, set Local Machine Disable (Service Test

Unit Preparation —



STOP) to No.

Check that unit has been installed in accordance with the installation instructions and applicable codes. Make sure that the economizer hoods have been installed and that the outdoor filters are properly installed.

Internal Wiring — Ensure that all electrical connections

in the control box are tightened as required. If the unit has modulating gas or SCR electric heat make sure that the LAT (leaving air temperature) sensors have been routed to the supply ducts as required.

Accessory Installation — Check to make sure that all

accessories including space thermostats and sensors have been installed and wired as required by the instructions and unit wiring diagrams.

Crankcase Heaters — Crankcase heaters are energized

as long as there is power to the unit, except when the compressors are running.

IMPORTANT: Unit power must be on for 24 hours prior to start-up of compressors. Otherwise damage to compressors may result.

Evaporator Fan — Fan belts and fixed pulleys are facto-

ry-installed. See Tables 3-18 for fan performance. Be sure that fans rotate in the proper direction. Component pressure drop data is shown in Tables 19 and 20. See Tables 21 and 22 for motor limitations.

FIELD-SUPPLIED FAN DRIVES — Supply fan and power exhaust fan drives are fixed-pitch, non-adjustable selections, for maximum reliability and long belt life. If the factory drive sets must be changed to obtain other fan speeds, consult the nearest Browning Manufacturing Co. sales office with the required new wheel speed and the data from Physical Data and Supply Fan Drive Data tables (center distances, motor and fan shaft diameters, motor horsepower) in Installation Instructions for a modified drive set selection. For minor speed changes, the VFD can be used to provide speed control. See page 157 for belt installation procedure.

Controls — Use the following steps for the controls:

IMPORTANT: The unit is shipped with the unit control disabled. To enable the control, set Local Machine Disable (Service Test



STOP) to No.

2. Enter unit set points. The unit is shipped with the set point default values. If a different set point is required, use the Navigator™ display, or CCN interface to change the configuration values.

3. If the internal time schedules are going to be used, configure the Occupancy schedule.

4. Verify that the control time periods programmed meet current requirements.

5. Use Auto Commisioning mode to verify operation of all major components.

6. If the unit is a VAV unit make sure to configure the static pressure set point. To check out the VFD, use the VFD instructions shipped with the unit.

Gas Heat — Verify gas pressure before turning on gas heat

as follows:

1. Turn off field-supplied manual gas stop, located external to the unit.

2. Connect pressure gages to supply gas tap, located at fieldsupplied manual shutoff valves.

3. Connect pressure gages to manifold pressure tap on unit gas valve.

4. Supply gas pressure must not exceed 13.5 in. wg. Check pressure at field-supplied shut-off valve.

5. Turn on manual gas stop and initiate a heating demand. Jumper R to W1 and R to W2 in the control box to initiate high fire heat.

6. After the unit has run with high fire energized for several minutes, verify that incoming pressure is 5.0 in. wg or greater and that the manifold pressure is 3.1 in wg. If manifold pressure must be adjusted refer to Gas Valve Adjustment section on page 171.

7. Use the Service Test procedure to verify all heat stages of operation.

1. Set any control configurations that are required (fieldinstalled accessories, etc.). The unit is factory configured for all appropriate factory-installed options.

RUN



















STATUS

Auto View of

Run Status

(VIEW)

Econ

Run Status

(ECON)

Cooling

Information

(COOL)

EXV

Information

(EXVS)

VFD

Information

(VFDS)

Mode

Trip Helper

(TRIP)

Ctl Temp R AT,S AT, or ZONE

(TEMP)

CCN

Linkage

(LINK)

Compressor

Run Hours

(HRS)

Compressor

Starts

(STRT)

Software

Ver sio n

Numbers

(VERS)

SERVICE

TEST

Service Test Mode

(TEST)

Local Machine

Disable (STOP)

Soft Stop

Request

(S.STP)

Supply Fan

Request

(FAN.F)

Test Independent

Outputs

(INDP)

Tes t Fa ns

(FANS)

Calibrate Test

Actuators

(ACT.C)

Search for

Serial Number

(SRCH)

Te st

Humidimizer

(HMZR)

Test Circuit

EXVS

(EXVS)

Test Cooling

(COOL)

Test Heating

(HEAT)

Auto Component

Diag. Test

(AC.DT)

Table 2 — Navigator Menu Display Structure

TEMPERATURES PRESSURES SETPOINTS INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION

Air

Temperatures

(AIR.T)

Refrigerant

Temperatures

(REF.T)

Air Pressures

(AIR.P)

Refrigerant

Pressures

(REF.P)

Occupied Heat

Setpoint (OHSP)

Occupied Cool

Setpoint (OCSP)

Unoccupied

Heat Setpoint

(UHSP)

Unoccupied

Cool Setpoint

(UCSP)

Heat - Cool

Setpoint

(GAP)

VAV O cc

Cool On

(V.C.ON)

VAV O cc

Cool Off

(V.C.OF)

Supply Air

Setpoint

(SASP)

Supply Air

Setpoint Hi

(SA.HI)

Supply Air

Setpoint Lo

(SA.LO)

Heating Supply

Air Setpoint

(SA.HT)

Te mp e r i ng

Purge SASP

(T.PRG)

Tempering in

Cool SASP

(T.CL)

General Inputs

(GEN.I)

Compressor

Feedback

(FD.BK)

Thermostat

Inputs

(STAT)

Fire-Smoke

Modes (FIRE)

Relative

Humidity

(REL.H)

Air Quality

Sensors

(AIR.Q)

CFM Sensors

(CFM)

Reset Inputs

(RSET)

4-20 Milliamp

Inputs

(4-20)

Fans

(FANS)

Cooling

(COOL)

Heating

(HEAT)

Actuators

(ACTU)

General Outputs

(GEN.O)

Unit

Configuration

(UNIT)

Cooling

Configuration

(COOL)

MotorMaster PID

Configuration

(M.PID)

EXV Circuit

Configuration

(EXV.C)

EXV PID

Configuration

(E.PID)

DP Override

Configuration

(DP.OC)

Evap/Discharge

Temp. Reset

(EDT.R)

Heating

Configuration

(HEAT)

Staged Heat

Configuration

(SG.CF)

Hydonic Heat Configuration

(HH.CF)

Hydronic Heat

Actuator Configuration

(ACT.C)

Supply Static

Press. Config.

(SP)

Static Pressure PID

Configuration

(S.PID)

TIME

CLOCK

Time of Day

(TIME)

Month, Date,

Day and Year

(DATE)

Local Time

Schedule

(SCH.L)

Local

Holiday

Schedules

(HOL.L)

Daylight Savings

Time

(DAY.S)

OPERATING

MODES

System

Mode

(SYS.M)

HVAC Mode

(HVAC)

Control Type

(CTRL)

Mode

Controlling

Unit

(MODE)

ALARMS

Currently

Active

Alarms

(CURR)

Reset All

Current

Alarms

(R.CUR)

Alarm History (HIST)

Tempering in

Vent Occ SASP

(T.V.OC)

Tempering in

Vent Unocc.

SASP

(T.V.UN)

Economizer

Configuration

(ECON)

Building Press.

Configs

(BP)

Indoor Air

Quality Cfg.

(IAQ)

Table 3 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 75-90 Nominal Ton Units Standard Supply Fan Data

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

0.20.40.60.81.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 15,000 734 3.74 764 4.22 794 4.71 823 5.22 851 5.73 18,000 846 5.75 873 6.30 898 6.87 924 7.45 948 8.04 20,000 923 7.45 947 8.06 971 8.68 994 9.31 1017 9.95 22,000 1001 9.48 1023 10.14 1045 10.82 1066 11.50 1088 12.20 24,000 1080 11.87 1100 12.59 1120 13.32 1140 14.05 1160 14.80 26,000 1159 14.65 1178 15.43 1197 16.21 1215 17.00 1234 17.80 28,000 1238 17.86 1256 18.69 1274 19.52 1291 20.37 1308 21.22 30,000 1318 21.52 1335 22.41 1352 23.30 1368 24.20 1384 25.10 32,000 1399 25.68 1414 26.61 1430 27.56 1446 28.51 1461 29.47 34,000 1479 30.35 1494 31.33 1509 32.34 1524 33.34 1538 34.36 36,000 1560 35.56 1574 36.61 1588 37.66 1602 38.72 1616 39.78 38,000 1641 41.36 1655 42.46 1668 43.57 1681 44.68 1694 45.80 40,000 1722 47.77 1735 48.92 1748 50.09 1760 51.25 1773 52.43 42,000 —————————— 45,000 ——————————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

1.21.41.61.82.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

15,000 878 6.25 905 6.79 931 7.33 957 7.88 982 8.44 18,000 973 8.64 996 9.25 1020 9.87 1043 10.50 1065 11.13 20,000 1039 10.61 1061 11.26 1083 11.94 1104 12.61 1125 13.29 22,000 1108 12.90 1129 13.61 1149 14.33 1169 15.06 1189 15.79 24,000 1179 15.56 1199 16.32 1218 17.09 1236 17.87 1255 18.66 26,000 1252 18.61 1270 19.42 1288 20.24 1305 21.08 1323 21.91 28,000 1326 22.09 1343 22.95 1359 23.83 1376 24.71 1392 25.60 30,000 1400 26.02 1416 26.94 1432 27.86 1448 28.79 1464 29.73 32,000 1476 30.44 1491 31.41 1506 32.39 1521 33.37 1536 34.37 34,000 1553 35.37 1567 36.39 1581 37.43 1595 38.47 1609 39.51 36,000 1630 40.86 1643 41.94 1657 43.03 1670 44.11 1684 45.21 38,000 1707 46.93 1720 48.06 1733 49.20 1746 50.35 1759 51.49 40,000 178553.61179854.80—————— 42,000 —————————— 45,000 ——————————

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

2.22.42.62.83.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

15,000 1006 9.01 1030 9.58 1054 10.16 1077 10.75 1100 11.34 18,000 1087 11.77 1109 12.42 1131 13.08 1152 13.74 1173 14.41 20,000 1146 13.99 1167 14.69 1187 15.39 1207 16.11 1227 16.83 22,000 1209 16.54 1228 17.29 1247 18.05 1266 18.81 1284 19.58 24,000 1273 19.45 1291 20.25 1309 21.06 1327 21.87 1345 22.69 26,000 1340 22.76 1357 23.61 1374 24.47 1391 25.33 1408 26.20 28,000 1409 26.49 1425 27.39 1441 28.30 1457 29.22 1473 30.14 30,000 1479 30.68 1494 31.64 1510 32.60 1525 33.56 1540 34.54 32,000 1551 35.37 1565 36.37 1580 37.39 1594 38.40 1608 39.43 34,000 1623 40.57 1637 41.63 1651 42.69 1665 43.76 1678 44.83 36,000 1697 46.32 1710 47.43 1723 48.55 1737 49.67 1750 50.79 38,000 177252.66178453.81179754.98———— 40,000 —————————— 42,000 —————————— 45,000 ——————————

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

3.23.43.63.84.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

15,000 1122 11.94 1145 12.55 1166 13.16 1188 13.78 1209 14.40 18,000 1193 15.09 1214 15.77 1234 16.46 1253 17.16 1273 17.86 20,000 1246 17.55 1265 18.29 1284 19.03 1303 19.77 1322 20.53 22,000 1303 20.36 1321 21.14 1339 21.93 1357 22.72 1374 23.52 24,000 1362 23.52 1379 24.35 1396 25.19 1413 26.04 1430 26.89 26,000 1424 27.08 1440 27.96 1457 28.86 1473 29.75 1489 30.65 28,000 1488 31.07 1504 32.01 1519 32.94 1535 33.89 1550 34.84 30,000 1555 35.52 1570 36.50 1584 37.50 1599 38.49 1613 39.49 32,000 1623 40.46 1637 41.49 1651 42.53 1665 43.58 1679 44.64 34,000 1692 45.92 1705 47.01 1719 48.09 1732 49.20 1745 50.30 36,000 176251.92177553.06178854.21———— 38,000 —————————— 40,000 —————————— 42,000 —————————— 45,000 ——————————

LEGEND Bhp — Brake Horsepower

Table 4 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 75-90 Nominal Ton Units High-Static Supply Fan Data

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 315 2.56 354 3.34 390 4.19 425 5.09 459 6.04 18,000 364 3.68 397 4.50 428 5.38 459 6.30 489 7.27 20,000 397 4.59 427 5.45 456 6.34 484 7.29 512 8.26 22,000 431 5.64 458 6.53 485 7.45 511 8.41 537 9.40 24,000 465 6.85 490 7.76 515 8.70 539 9.68 563 10.70 26,000 499 8.20 523 9.14 546 10.12 569 11.12 591 12.15 28,000 534 9.72 556 10.69 578 11.68 599 12.71 620 13.76 30,000 569 11.40 590 12.40 610 13.42 630 14.47 650 15.54 32,000 605 13.26 624 14.29 643 15.33 662 16.40 681 17.50 34,000 640 15.30 658 16.35 676 17.42 694 18.52 712 19.63 36,000 676 17.51 693 18.59 710 19.69 727 20.81 744 21.95 38,000 711 19.92 728 21.03 744 22.15 760 23.29 776 24.46 40,000 747 22.53 763 23.66 778 24.80 793 25.97 809 27.15 42,000 783 25.33 798 26.49 812 27.66 827 28.85 842 30.06 45,000 837 29.92 851 31.12 864 32.33 878 33.55 892 34.79

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 491 7.05 522 8.09 552 9.18 580 10.30 608 11.47 18,000 517 8.27 545 9.32 572 10.40 598 11.52 624 12.66 20,000 538 9.28 564 10.33 590 11.41 614 12.53 638 13.67 22,000 562 10.43 586 11.49 610 12.58 633 13.70 656 14.86 24,000 587 11.74 609 12.82 632 13.91 654 15.04 675 16.20 26,000 613 13.21 635 14.30 656 15.41 676 16.55 697 17.71 28,000 641 14.84 661 15.94 681 17.07 701 18.22 720 19.39 30,000 670 16.64 689 17.76 708 18.90 726 20.07 745 21.25 32,000 699 18.62 717 19.75 735 20.92 753 22.09 770 23.29 34,000 729 20.77 747 21.92 764 23.10 781 24.30 797 25.51 36,000 760 23.11 777 24.29 793 25.48 809 26.69 825 27.92 38,000 792 25.63 808 26.83 823 28.04 838 29.27 854 30.52 40,000 824 28.36 839 29.57 854 30.80 868 32.05 883 33.31 42,000 856 31.28 870 32.51 885 33.76 899 35.03 913 36.31 45,000 905 36.04 919 37.31 932 38.58 945 39.88 959 41.18

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 636 12.66 662 13.90 688 15.16 713 16.46 738 17.78 18,000 649 13.85 674 15.06 697 16.30 721 17.57 744 18.87 20,000 662 14.86 685 16.06 708 17.29 730 18.55 752 19.84 22,000 678 16.03 700 17.24 722 18.47 743 19.72 764 21.00 24,000 697 17.38 717 18.58 738 19.82 758 21.07 778 22.34 26,000 717 18.90 737 20.11 756 21.34 776 22.60 795 23.87 28,000 739 20.59 758 21.81 777 23.05 795 24.31 813 25.58 30,000 763 22.46 781 23.69 799 24.93 816 26.20 833 27.48 32,000 788 24.51 805 25.75 822 27.00 839 28.28 855 29.57 34,000 814 26.74 830 27.99 846 29.26 863 30.55 878 31.84 36,000 841 29.17 857 30.43 872 31.71 887 33.00 903 34.32 38,000 869 31.78 884 33.06 899 34.35 913 35.66 928 36.98 40,000 897 34.59 912 35.88 926 37.18 940 38.51 954 39.85 42,000 927 37.60 941 38.91 954 40.24 968 41.57 981 42.92 45,000 972 42.51 985 43.84 998 45.17 1011 46.54 1023 47.91

1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 762 19.13 785 20.51 808 21.91 831 23.34 853 24.80 18,000 766 20.19 788 21.54 810 22.91 831 24.31 852 25.73 20,000 774 21.15 795 22.49 816 23.84 836 25.22 856 26.62 22,000 784 22.30 805 23.62 825 24.97 844 26.34 864 27.73 24,000 798 23.64 817 24.96 836 26.30 855 27.67 874 29.04 26,000 813 25.17 832 26.49 850 27.82 868 29.18 886 30.56 28,000 831 26.89 849 28.21 866 29.54 884 30.90 901 32.27 30,000 851 28.79 868 30.11 884 31.45 901 32.81 917 34.18 32,000 872 30.88 888 32.21 904 33.55 920 34.91 936 36.29 34,000 894 33.17 910 34.50 925 35.85 941 37.22 956 38.59 36,000 918 35.65 933 36.98 948 38.34 962 39.71 977 41.10 38,000 943 38.32 957 39.67 971 41.04 985 42.42 1000 43.82 40,000 968 41.20 982 42.56 996 43.94 1010 45.33 1023 46.73 42,000 995 44.27 1008 45.66 1021 47.04 1035 48.44 1048 49.86 45,000 1036 49.29 1049 50.68 1061 52.09 1074 53.51 1086 54.94

LEGEND Bhp — Brake Horsepower

3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

Table 5 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 105 Nominal Ton Units Standard Supply Fan Data

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

21,000 974 8.74 996 9.38 1019 10.03 1041 10.70 1063 11.37 25,000 1132 13.69 1151 14.44 1171 15.20 1190 15.97 1209 16.75 27,000 1213 16.82 1231 17.62 1249 18.44 1267 19.26 1284 20.09 29,000 1294 20.43 1312 21.30 1328 22.17 1345 23.05 1362 23.93 31,000 1377 24.60 1393 25.51 1409 26.44 1425 27.37 1441 28.31 33,000 1461 29.35 1476 30.33 1491 31.31 1506 32.30 1521 33.29 35,000 1546 34.75 1560 35.78 1575 36.82 1589 37.87 1603 38.92 37,000 1632 40.86 1645 41.94 1659 43.04 1672 44.14 1686 45.25 39,000 1719 47.72 1732 48.87 1744 50.03 1757 51.19 1770 52.35 41,000 —————————— 42,000 —————————— 44,000 —————————— 46,000 —————————— 48,000 ——————————

0.20.40.60.81.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

52,500 ——————————

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

21,000 1084 12.05 1105 12.74 1126 13.44 1147 14.14 1167 14.86 25,000 1227 17.54 1246 18.33 1264 19.13 1282 19.94 1300 20.76 27,000 1302 20.93 1319 21.78 1336 22.63 1353 23.50 1370 24.37 29,000 1378 24.82 1395 25.73 1411 26.63 1427 27.55 1443 28.47 31,000 1456 29.26 1472 30.22 1487 31.18 1502 32.14 1517 33.12 33,000 1536 34.29 1550 35.30 1565 36.32 1579 37.34 1593 38.37 35,000 1617 39.98 1630 41.04 1644 42.12 1658 43.19 1671 44.27 37,000 1699 46.36 1712 47.49 1725 48.61 1738 49.74 1751 50.88 39,000 178253.52179554.70—————— 41,000 —————————— 42,000 —————————— 44,000 —————————— 46,000 —————————— 48,000 —————————— 52,500 ——————————

1.21.41.61.82.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

2.22.42.62.83.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

21,000 1187 15.58 1207 16.31 1226 17.04 1245 17.78 1264 18.53 25,000 1318 21.58 1335 22.41 1353 23.25 1370 24.09 1387 24.94 27,000 1387 25.24 1404 26.12 1420 27.01 1436 27.90 1452 28.81 29,000 1459 29.40 1474 30.33 1490 31.27 1505 32.22 1520 33.17 31,000 1532 34.10 1547 35.09 1562 36.08 1576 37.08 1591 38.09 33,000 1608 39.40 1622 40.44 1636 41.49 1650 42.54 1663 43.61 35,000 1685 45.36 1698 46.46 1712 47.55 1725 48.66 1738 49.78 37,000 176452.03177753.18178954.33———— 39,000 —————————— 41,000 —————————— 42,000 —————————— 44,000 —————————— 46,000 —————————— 48,000 —————————— 52,500 ——————————

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

21,000 25,000 27,000 29,000 31,000 33,000 35,000

37,000 —————————— 39,000 —————————— 41,000 —————————— 42,000 —————————— 44,000 —————————— 46,000 —————————— 48,000 —————————— 52,500 ——————————

3.23.43.63.84.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

1283 19.29 1302 20.05 1320 20.82 1338 21.59 1356 22.37

1404 25.80 1420 26.67 1437 27.53 1453 28.41 1470 29.29

1468 29.71 1484 30.63 1500 31.55 1515 32.47 1531 33.41

1536 34.13 1551 35.10 1566 36.07 1580 37.05 1595 38.03

1605 39.10 1620 40.11 1634 41.14 1648 42.16 1662 43.20

1677 44.67 1691 45.74 1704 46.81 1718 47.89 1731 48.98

1751 50.89 1764 52.01 1777 53.14 1790 54.28

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

——

LEGEND Bhp — Brake Horsepower

Table 6 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 105 Nominal Ton Units High-Static Supply Fan Data

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

21,000 441 4.97 466 5.77 491 6.61 516 7.49 540 8.41 25,000 497 6.95 519 7.83 541 8.75 563 9.69 584 10.67 27,000 534 8.54 555 9.47 576 10.43 596 11.42 616 12.44 29,000 572 10.35 592 11.33 611 12.34 630 13.38 649 14.44 31,000 610 12.41 629 13.44 647 14.50 664 15.58 682 16.69 33,000 649 14.72 666 15.80 683 16.91 699 18.03 716 19.18 35,000 687 17.30 703 18.43 719 19.58 735 20.75 751 21.95 37,000 726 20.16 741 21.34 756 22.53 771 23.75 786 25.00 39,000 764 23.31 779 24.54 793 25.79 807 27.06 822 28.34 41,000 803 26.78 817 28.05 831 29.35 844 30.65 858 31.99 42,000 842 30.56 855 31.89 868 33.22 881 34.59 894 35.96 44,000 881 34.68 893 36.06 906 37.44 918 38.84 930 40.26 46,000 920 39.14 932 40.56 944 41.99 956 43.45 967 44.91 48,000 959 43.97 970 45.43 982 46.91 993 48.41 1004 49.92 52,500 1047 56.20 1057 57.78 1068 59.35 1078 60.95 1088 62.57

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

21,000 563 9.35 587 10.33 609 11.34 632 12.38 654 13.44 25,000 606 11.67 627 12.71 647 13.77 667 14.86 688 15.97 27,000 636 13.49 655 14.56 675 15.66 694 16.78 713 17.93 29,000 667 15.53 685 16.64 704 17.78 722 18.94 739 20.12 31,000 699 17.81 717 18.97 734 20.15 751 21.34 768 22.57 33,000 732 20.35 749 21.55 765 22.77 781 24.01 797 25.27 35,000 766 23.16 782 24.41 797 25.66 812 26.94 827 28.24 37,000 801 26.25 815 27.54 830 28.84 844 30.16 859 31.49 39,000 836 29.65 850 30.97 863 32.31 877 33.67 891 35.05 41,000 871 33.34 884 34.71 897 36.09 911 37.49 924 38.91 42,000 907 37.35 919 38.76 932 40.19 945 41.64 957 43.09 44,000 943 41.70 955 43.15 967 44.62 979 46.11 991 47.61 46,000 979 46.40 991 47.89 1002 49.41 1014 50.92 1025 52.48 48,000 1016 51.44 1027 52.99 1038 54.54 1049 56.12 1060 57.69 52,500 1099 64.19 1109 65.82 1119 67.48 1129 69.14 1140 70.82

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

21,000 676 14.53 697 15.65 719 16.79 739 17.96 760 19.16 25,000 707 17.11 727 18.27 746 19.46 765 20.67 784 21.90 27,000 731 19.11 750 20.30 768 21.52 786 22.76 804 24.02 29,000 757 21.34 774 22.56 792 23.82 809 25.09 826 26.38 31,000 784 23.81 801 25.07 817 26.36 833 27.66 849 29.00 33,000 813 26.55 828 27.85 844 29.17 859 30.51 875 31.87 35,000 842 29.56 857 30.90 872 32.26 887 33.63 901 35.02 37,000 873 32.85 887 34.22 901 35.62 915 37.03 929 38.46 39,000 905 36.44 918 37.86 932 39.28 945 40.73 958 42.21 41,000 937 40.34 950 41.80 963 43.27 975 44.75 988 46.26 42,000 970 44.57 982 46.06 994 47.56 1007 49.09 1019 50.63 44,000 1003 49.13 1015 50.66 1027 52.20 1039 53.76 1050 55.34 46,000 1037 54.03 1048 55.60 1060 57.19 1071 58.78 1082 60.40 48,000 1071 59.29 1082 60.91 1093 62.54 1104 64.17 1115 65.83 52,500 1150 72.51 1160 74.21 1170 75.93 1180 77.66 1190 79.39

1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

21,000 780 20.37 801 21.61 820 22.87 840 24.14 859 25.45 25,000 803 23.16 822 24.44 840 25.73 858 27.05 876 28.38 27,000 822 25.30 839 26.61 857 27.94 874 29.28 891 30.64 29,000 843 27.69 859 29.02 876 30.38 892 31.75 908 33.14 31,000 865 30.33 881 31.70 897 33.08 913 34.48 928 35.90 33,000 890 33.25 905 34.64 920 36.06 935 37.49 950 38.93 35,000 916 36.43 930 37.86 945 39.31 959 40.77 973 42.25 37,000 943 39.90 957 41.37 971 42.85 984 44.34 998 45.85 39,000 972 43.68 985 45.18 998 46.69 1011 48.20 1024 49.76 41,000 1001 47.76 1014 49.30 1026 50.84 1039 52.41 1051 53.99 42,000 1031 52.18 1043 53.76 1055 55.33 1067 56.93 1079 58.54 44,000 1062 56.93 1074 58.53 1085 60.15 1097 61.79 1108 63.44 46,000 1094 62.03 1105 63.67 1116 65.33 1127 67.00 1138 68.68 48,000 1126 67.49 1137 69.17 1147 70.87 1158 72.57 1169 74.29 52,500 1200 81.15 1210 82.92 1220 84.69 1230 86.47 1240 88.28

LEGEND Bhp — Brake Horsepower

3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

Table 7 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 120 Nominal Ton Units Standard Supply Fan Data

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 56,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 56,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 56,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 56,000

LEGEND

Bhp — Brake Horsepower

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

775 8.13 797 8.86 819 9.61 841 10.37 862 11.14 883 12.01 903 12.85 922 13.70 941 14.56 960 15.43

991 16.95 1008 17.89 1026 18.85 1043 19.81 1059 20.79 1045 19.86 1062 20.85 1078 21.86 1094 22.88 1110 23.91 1099 23.07 1115 24.12 1130 25.18 1145 26.25 1161 27.33 1153 26.61 1168 27.71 1183 28.83 1197 29.95 1212 31.08 1207 30.50 1221 31.65 1235 32.82 1249 33.99 1263 35.17 1261 34.74 1274 35.94 1288 37.16 1301 38.39 1315 39.63 1315 39.36 1328 40.62 1341 41.89 1354 43.16 1366 44.45 1369 44.36 1381 45.67 1394 47.00 1406 48.33 1418 49.67 1423 49.78 1435 51.14 1447 52.51 1458 53.89 1470 55.28 1477 55.61 1488 57.03 1500 58.45 1511 59.88 1522 61.33

153061.87154263.35——————

——————————

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

883 11.92 903 12.72 924 13.53 943 14.35 963 15.18

978 16.32 997 17.22 1015 18.13 1032 19.05 1050 19.98 1076 21.78 1092 22.78 1109 23.79 1125 24.81 1141 25.84 1126 24.94 1141 26.00 1157 27.06 1172 28.13 1188 29.21 1176 28.42 1191 29.52 1206 30.64 1220 31.75 1235 32.88 1226 32.22 1240 33.38 1255 34.54 1269 35.70 1283 36.89 1277 36.37 1291 37.57 1304 38.79 1318 40.00 1331 41.23 1328 40.87 1341 42.12 1354 43.38 1367 44.66 1380 45.93 1379 45.75 1392 47.05 1404 48.36 1417 49.69 1429 51.01 1430 51.02 1443 52.37 1455 53.74 1467 55.11 1479 56.49 1482 56.69 1494 58.10 1505 59.51 1517 60.93 1528 62.36

153462.77154564.24——————

——————————

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

982 16.02 1001 16.87 1020 17.73 1038 18.60 1056 19.48 1067 20.92 1084 21.87 1101 22.83 1118 23.80 1135 24.77 1157 26.88 1172 27.93 1188 28.98 1203 30.05 1218 31.13 1203 30.30 1218 31.39 1232 32.50 1247 33.61 1262 34.73 1249 34.02 1263 35.16 1278 36.32 1292 37.49 1306 38.66 1296 38.07 1310 39.27 1324 40.48 1337 41.69 1351 42.91 1344 42.47 1357 43.72 1371 44.97 1384 46.23 1396 47.50 1393 47.22 1405 48.52 1418 49.83 1430 51.14 1443 52.46 1441 52.35 1453 53.70 1466 55.06 1478 56.42 1490 57.79 1490 57.87 1502 59.27 1514 60.67 1526 62.09 1537 63.51

154063.80————————

——————————

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

1074 20.37 1092 21.26 1109 22.17 1127 23.08 1144 24.00 1151 25.76 1167 26.75 1183 27.76 1199 28.76 1215 29.79 1233 32.21 1248 33.30 1263 34.40 1277 35.50 1292 36.62 1276 35.87 1290 37.01 1305 38.16 1319 39.32 1333 40.47 1320 39.84 1333 41.03 1347 42.23 1361 43.43 1374 44.65 1364 44.14 1377 45.38 1390 46.62 1404 47.88 1416 49.13 1409 48.79 1422 50.07 1435 51.36 1447 52.67 1460 53.98 1455 53.78 1467 55.12 1480 56.47 1492 57.81 1504 59.17 1502 59.16 1514 60.55 1525 61.94 1537 63.34 1549 64.75

154964.93————————

——————————

0.20.40.60.81.0

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.21.41.61.82.0

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

2.22.42.62.83.0

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

3.23.43.63.84.0

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 56,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 56,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 56,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 56,000 60,000

Table 8 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 120 Nominal Ton Units High-Static Supply Fan Data

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

427 4.78 458 5.82 486 6.86 513 7.92 539 8.98 489 6.84 515 7.99 541 9.14 565 10.30 589 11.48 520 8.07 545 9.26 569 10.47 592 11.69 614 12.91 583 10.94 605 12.24 627 13.55 648 14.88 668 16.21 614 12.60 636 13.95 656 15.32 676 16.69 696 18.07 646 14.42 666 15.83 686 17.24 705 18.67 724 20.09 678 16.41 697 17.86 716 19.32 735 20.80 753 22.28 710 18.56 729 20.07 747 21.58 764 23.10 782 24.63 742 20.90 760 22.45 777 24.01 794 25.58 811 27.16 774 23.41 791 25.01 808 26.62 824 28.23 840 29.86 807 26.12 823 27.77 839 29.42 854 31.08 870 32.75 839 29.01 854 30.71 870 32.41 885 34.12 900 35.84 871 32.11 886 33.86 901 35.61 916 37.36 930 39.12 936 38.94 950 40.77 964 42.60 977 44.45 991 46.30

1001 46.62 1014 48.55 1027 50.48 1040 52.41 1052 54.35

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

564 10.05 588 11.12 611 12.20 633 13.28 655 14.37

611 12.66 633 13.85 655 15.04 675 16.23 695 17.43 636 14.15 657 15.39 678 16.64 698 17.88 717 19.13 688 17.54 708 18.89 727 20.24 745 21.59 763 22.95 715 19.46 734 20.85 752 22.25 770 23.65 787 25.06 742 21.53 760 22.97 778 24.42 795 25.87 812 27.33 770 23.76 788 25.26 804 26.75 821 28.25 837 29.76 798 26.16 815 27.70 831 29.24 848 30.79 863 32.35 827 28.73 843 30.32 859 31.92 874 33.51 890 35.11 856 31.49 871 33.12 887 34.76 902 36.40 917 38.06 885 34.43 900 36.11 915 37.79 929 39.48 944 41.18 915 37.56 929 39.29 943 41.02 958 42.75 971 44.49

944 40.88 958 42.66 972 44.43 986 46.21 999 48.01 1004 48.15 1017 50.02 1031 51.89 1043 53.76 1056 55.63 1065 56.29 1077 58.23 1090 60.18 1102 62.14 1114 64.11

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

676 15.46 696 16.55 716 17.65 736 18.74 754 19.84

715 18.63 734 19.84 753 21.05 771 22.25 789 23.47

736 20.39 755 21.65 773 22.92 790 24.18 808 25.45

781 24.30 798 25.67 815 27.04 832 28.41 848 29.79

804 26.48 821 27.89 838 29.31 854 30.73 870 32.16

829 28.79 845 30.26 861 31.73 877 33.20 892 34.68

854 31.27 869 32.78 885 34.30 900 35.83 915 37.35

879 33.91 894 35.47 909 37.04 924 38.61 939 40.18

905 36.72 920 38.33 934 39.94 949 41.56 963 43.18

931 39.71 946 41.36 960 43.02 974 44.69 988 46.35

958 42.88 972 44.58 986 46.28 1000 48.00 1013 49.72

985 46.24 999 47.99 1012 49.74 1026 51.49 1039 53.25 1013 49.79 1026 51.58 1039 53.38 1052 55.18 1065 56.99 1069 57.50 1081 59.38 1094 61.28 1106 63.17 1118 65.06 1126 66.08 1138 68.04 1149 70.01 1161 72.00 1173 73.97

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

773 20.94 791 22.05 809 23.15 826 24.25 843 25.36 807 24.69 824 25.91 841 27.13 857 28.35 873 29.57 825 26.72 842 28.00 858 29.27 874 30.55 890 31.83 865 31.17 881 32.55 896 33.93 912 35.32 927 36.70 886 33.59 901 35.02 916 36.46 931 37.89 946 39.33 908 36.15 923 37.64 937 39.12 952 40.62 967 42.10 930 38.88 945 40.42 959 41.94 974 43.49 988 45.02 953 41.76 968 43.34 982 44.93 996 46.51 1009 48.10

977 44.81 991 46.44 1005 48.06 1018 49.70 1032 51.34 1001 48.02 1015 49.71 1028 51.38 1042 53.07 1055 54.74 1026 51.43 1040 53.15 1053 54.87 1065 56.60 1078 58.33 1052 55.02 1064 56.78 1077 58.56 1090 60.32 1102 62.10 1077 58.79 1090 60.61 1102 62.43 1115 64.24 1127 66.06 1130 66.96 1142 68.86 1154 70.76 1165 72.67 1177 74.58 1184 75.95 1195 77.95 1207 79.93 1218 81.93 1229 83.92

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

26,000 30,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 54,000 56,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

26,000 30,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 54,000 56,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

26,000 30,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 54,000 56,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

26,000 30,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 54,000 56,000 60,000

Table 9 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 130, 150 Nominal Ton Units Standard Supply Fan Data

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.20.40.60.81.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

841 10.40 862 11.19 882 12.00 902 12.82 922 13.65

951 15.00 969 15.90 987 16.81 1005 17.73 1022 18.67 1060 20.74 1076 21.75 1092 22.77 1108 23.80 1124 24.83 1114 24.09 1130 25.14 1145 26.22 1160 27.29 1175 28.39 1168 27.76 1183 28.87 1198 29.99 1212 31.13 1227 32.27 1223 31.78 1237 32.95 1251 34.12 1265 35.31 1278 36.50 1277 36.17 1290 37.39 1304 38.62 1317 39.85 1330 41.10 1331 40.94 1344 42.22 1357 43.49 1370 44.78 1382 46.08 1385 46.11 1398 47.43 1410 48.76 1422 50.11 1434 51.45 1439 51.68 1451 53.05 1463 54.45 1475 55.84 1487 57.24 1493 57.68 1505 59.12 1516 60.55 1528 61.99 1539 63.44

154864.13————————

——————————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.21.41.61.82.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

941 14.49 961 15.35 980 16.21 998 17.09 1016 17.97 1040 19.61 1057 20.57 1074 21.54 1091 22.52 1107 23.50 1140 25.88 1155 26.94 1171 28.01 1186 29.08 1201 30.17 1190 29.48 1205 30.59 1220 31.71 1234 32.84 1249 33.98 1241 33.42 1255 34.58 1269 35.76 1283 36.93 1297 38.12 1292 37.70 1306 38.92 1319 40.14 1332 41.37 1346 42.61 1343 42.36 1356 43.62 1369 44.90 1382 46.17 1395 47.46 1395 47.39 1407 48.70 1420 50.02 1432 51.36 1444 52.70 1446 52.81 1459 54.18 1470 55.55 1482 56.93 1494 58.33 1498 58.66 1510 60.06 1521 61.50 1533 62.92 1544 64.37

——————————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

2.22.42.62.83.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

1034 18.87 1052 19.78 1070 20.69 1087 21.62 1105 22.55 1123 24.49 1140 25.50 1156 26.52 1172 27.54 1187 28.57 1216 31.27 1231 32.38 1245 33.49 1260 34.62 1274 35.74 1263 35.12 1277 36.28 1291 37.44 1305 38.62 1319 39.80 1311 39.32 1324 40.52 1338 41.73 1351 42.95 1365 44.19 1359 43.86 1372 45.12 1385 46.38 1398 47.65 1411 48.93 1408 48.76 1420 50.07 1433 51.38 1445 52.71 1457 54.03 1457 54.05 1469 55.40 1481 56.76 1493 58.13 1505 59.51 1506 59.72 1518 61.13 1529 62.55 1541 63.97 — —

——————————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

3.23.43.63.84.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

1122 23.49 1138 24.44 1155 25.40 1172 26.36 1188 27.34 1203 29.61 1218 30.66 1234 31.72 1249 32.78 1264 33.85 1289 36.88 1303 38.03 1317 39.18 1331 40.35 1345 41.52 1333 40.98 1347 42.18 1360 43.38 1374 44.60 1387 45.82 1378 45.43 1391 46.67 1404 47.93 1417 49.19 1430 50.45 1423 50.21 1436 51.51 1449 52.81 1461 54.12 1474 55.44 1470 55.37 1482 56.71 1494 58.06 1506 59.42 1518 60.79

151760.90152862.30154063.70————

——————————

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

26,000 30,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 54,000 56,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

26,000 30,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 54,000 56,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

26,000 30,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 54,000 56,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

26,000 30,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 54,000 56,000 60,000

Table 10 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 130, 150 Nominal Ton Units High-Static Supply Fan Data

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

470 6.23 499 7.34 525 8.46 551 9.60 575 10.73 534 8.75 559 9.98 583 11.22 606 12.46 629 13.71 567 10.24 590 11.53 613 12.82 635 14.11 656 15.42 599 11.89 621 13.23 643 14.57 664 15.93 684 17.28 632 13.71 653 15.10 674 16.50 694 17.90 713 19.31 665 15.70 685 17.14 704 18.59 724 20.05 742 21.51 698 17.87 717 19.37 735 20.86 754 22.37 772 23.89 730 20.22 749 21.77 767 23.32 784 24.88 802 26.44 764 22.78 781 24.37 798 25.98 815 27.59 832 29.19 797 25.53 813 27.17 830 28.83 846 30.48 862 32.15 830 28.49 846 30.19 862 31.88 878 33.59 893 35.30 863 31.66 879 33.40 894 35.15 909 36.90 924 38.67 896 35.05 911 36.84 926 38.64 941 40.44 955 42.24 963 42.51 977 44.40 991 46.29 1004 48.18 1018 50.07

1030 50.92 1043 52.90 1056 54.88 1069 56.86 1081 58.86

1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

599 11.87 622 13.02 644 14.17 665 15.32 686 16.48 650 14.97 671 16.22 691 17.49 711 18.76 731 20.02 677 16.73 697 18.04 716 19.36 736 20.68 754 22.01 704 18.65 723 20.01 742 21.38 761 22.76 779 24.14 732 20.73 751 22.15 769 23.57 787 25.00 804 26.43 760 22.98 778 24.45 796 25.92 813 27.41 830 28.89 789 25.40 806 26.93 823 28.46 840 29.98 856 31.52 818 28.01 835 29.59 851 31.16 867 32.74 883 34.32 848 30.81 864 32.44 880 34.06 895 35.69 911 37.33 878 33.81 893 35.49 909 37.16 923 38.82 938 40.52 908 37.02 923 38.73 938 40.45 952 42.18 967 43.91 939 40.42 953 42.20 967 43.96 981 45.74 995 47.52

969 44.05 983 45.87 997 47.69 1011 49.50 1024 51.33 1031 51.98 1044 53.89 1057 55.80 1070 57.71 1083 59.63 1094 60.85 1106 62.86 1118 64.85 1131 66.86 1143 68.87

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

706 17.63 726 18.79 745 19.95 763 21.11 782 22.28

749 21.29 768 22.57 786 23.84 803 25.12 821 26.40

772 23.33 790 24.66 808 25.99 825 27.33 842 28.66

796 25.52 814 26.90 831 28.29 847 29.68 863 31.06

821 27.86 838 29.30 854 30.73 870 32.18 886 33.62

846 30.37 862 31.86 878 33.35 894 34.85 909 36.34

872 33.06 888 34.59 903 36.13 919 37.68 933 39.22

899 35.91 914 37.50 929 39.10 944 40.69 958 42.29

926 38.97 940 40.60 955 42.24 969 43.89 983 45.53

953 42.20 967 43.89 981 45.58 995 47.28 1009 48.97

981 45.65 995 47.38 1008 49.12 1022 50.86 1035 52.60 1009 49.30 1022 51.08 1036 52.87 1049 54.66 1062 56.45 1037 53.16 1051 54.98 1064 56.82 1076 58.66 1089 60.50 1095 61.55 1108 63.48 1120 65.41 1132 67.34 1144 69.26 1155 70.88 1166 72.89 1178 74.91 1190 76.93 1201 78.94

3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

799 23.44 817 24.60 834 25.77 851 26.93 867 28.10

838 27.68 854 28.96 871 30.25 887 31.53 902 32.81

858 29.99 874 31.33 890 32.67 906 34.02 921 35.36

879 32.45 895 33.85 911 35.24 926 36.64 941 38.04

902 35.06 917 36.51 932 37.96 947 39.41 962 40.87

925 37.84 940 39.33 954 40.84 969 42.34 983 43.85

948 40.77 963 42.33 977 43.88 991 45.44 1005 46.98

972 43.88 987 45.48 1001 47.09 1014 48.69 1028 50.31

997 47.18 1011 48.83 1025 50.50 1038 52.14 1052 53.80 1023 50.67 1036 52.38 1049 54.07 1063 55.78 1076 57.49 1049 54.36 1062 56.10 1075 57.85 1088 59.61 1100 61.36 1075 58.24 1088 60.04 1100 61.83 1113 63.63 1125 65.44 1102 62.34 1114 64.18 1127 66.03 1139 67.88 1151 69.72 1156 71.20 1168 73.13 1180 75.08 1192 77.01 1203 78.95 1212 80.97 1224 83.00 1235 85.03 1246 87.06

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

——

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

Table 11 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 75-150 Nominal Ton Units Standard Return Fan Data

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.20.40.60.81.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

449 2.09 476 2.54 502 3.02 528 3.52 554 4.04 528 3.38 551 3.91 574 4.46 596 5.03 618 5.62 609 5.15 629 5.76 648 6.38 668 7.03 687 7.69 691 7.49 708 8.17 725 8.87 742 9.59 759 10.32 773 10.45 789 11.22 804 12.00 819 12.79 834 13.60 856 14.14 870 14.99 884 15.85 897 16.72 911 17.60

939 18.64 952 19.56 964 20.49 977 21.44 989 22.40 1022 24.00 1034 25.01 1045 26.02 1057 27.04 1068 28.09 1106 30.33 1116 31.41 1127 32.50 1137 33.61 1148 34.73 1189 37.69 1199 38.86 1209 40.04 1219 41.21 1228 42.42 1272 46.18 1282 47.42 1291 48.68 1300 49.94 1309 51.22 1356 55.86 1365 57.19 1373 58.52 1382 59.88 1391 61.23 1440 66.82 1448 68.24 1456 69.65 1464 71.07 1472 72.51 1482 72.81 1490 74.26 1497 75.71 1505 77.17 1513 78.65

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.21.41.61.82.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

579 4.59 604 5.15 629 5.73 653 6.32 677 6.94

639 6.23 661 6.86 682 7.50 703 8.16 723 8.84

705 8.36 724 9.06 743 9.77 761 10.50 779 11.24

776 11.07 792 11.84 809 12.62 825 13.41 842 14.22

849 14.42 864 15.26 879 16.11 894 16.97 908 17.85

924 18.49 938 19.40 951 20.33 965 21.26 978 22.21 1001 23.38 1014 24.36 1026 25.36 1038 26.37 1050 27.39 1079 29.13 1091 30.20 1102 31.27 1113 32.35 1125 33.44 1158 35.85 1169 37.00 1179 38.14 1190 39.30 1200 40.47 1238 43.62 1248 44.84 1258 46.06 1268 47.30 1277 48.54 1318 52.50 1328 53.79 1337 55.10 1346 56.41 1355 57.73 1399 62.59 1408 63.96 1416 65.35 1425 66.72 1434 68.13 1480 73.95 1489 75.40 1497 76.86 1505 78.32 1513 79.80 1521 80.13 1529 81.63 1537 83.12 1545 84.63 1553 86.14

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

2.22.42.62.83.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

700 7.56 723 8.21 746 8.86 768 9.53 791 10.21

744 9.53 764 10.24 784 10.96 804 11.69 824 12.44

797 11.99 815 12.77 833 13.55 851 14.35 868 15.16

858 15.04 874 15.88 890 16.72 906 17.59 921 18.46

923 18.74 937 19.64 952 20.56 966 21.48 980 22.43

991 23.17 1005 24.15 1018 25.13 1031 26.13 1044 27.13 1063 28.41 1075 29.46 1087 30.52 1099 31.58 1111 32.66 1136 34.55 1147 35.67 1158 36.79 1169 37.93 1180 39.08 1211 41.65 1221 42.84 1231 44.04 1242 45.24 1252 46.46 1287 49.80 1297 51.05 1306 52.33 1316 53.61 1325 54.90 1364 59.05 1373 60.40 1382 61.74 1391 63.09 1400 64.46 1442 69.53 1451 70.94 1459 72.37 1468 73.80 1476 75.23 1521 81.28 1529 82.78 1537 84.28 1545 85.78 1553 87.30 1560 87.66 1568 89.18 1576 90.72 1584 92.27 1592 93.83

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

3.23.43.63.84.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

813 10.90 834 11.60 856 12.31 877 13.02 898 13.75

843 13.19 862 13.96 881 14.74 900 15.53 919 16.34

886 15.98 903 16.81 920 17.66 937 18.51 954 19.38

937 19.35 952 20.25 968 21.15 983 22.08 999 23.01

994 23.38 1009 24.34 1023 25.32 1037 26.30 1050 27.30 1057 28.15 1070 29.18 1083 30.22 1095 31.27 1108 32.33 1123 33.74 1135 34.84 1146 35.94 1158 37.06 1170 38.19 1191 40.23 1202 41.39 1213 42.57 1224 43.76 1235 44.95 1262 47.68 1273 48.93 1283 50.18 1293 51.42 1303 52.69 1335 56.21 1344 57.51 1354 58.82 1364 60.16 1373 61.48 1409 65.83 1418 67.22 1427 68.61 1436 70.02 1445 71.42 1484 76.69 1493 78.13 1501 79.59 1510 81.07 1518 82.55 1561 88.80 1569 90.34 1577 91.89 1585 93.43 1593 94.97 1599 95.40 1607 96.95 1615 98.52 1623 100.12 1630 101.70

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

Table 12 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 75 Nominal Ton Units High-Static Return Fan Data

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

332 1.50 363 1.98 392 2.50 420 3.04 447 3.61 387 2.36 413 2.91 438 3.50 462 4.11 486 4.75 443 3.52 466 4.15 488 4.81 509 5.50 530 6.21 500 5.03 520 5.74 540 6.48 559 7.24 578 8.03 558 6.96 576 7.75 593 8.56 611 9.40 628 10.26 616 9.34 633 10.22 648 11.11 664 12.02 679 12.95 675 12.23 690 13.19 704 14.16 718 15.15 733 16.16 734 15.69 747 16.72 761 17.77 774 18.85 787 19.94 793 19.75 805 20.87 818 22.00 830 23.16 842 24.32 852 24.48 864 25.68 875 26.89 886 28.13 898 29.37 911 29.92 922 31.21 933 32.50 943 33.81 954 35.14

971 36.12 981 37.48 991 38.87 1001 40.25 1011 41.66 1030 43.14 1040 44.59 1049 46.06 1058 47.52 1068 49.00 1060 46.98 1069 48.46 1078 49.97 1087 51.48 1097 53.00

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

473 4.20 499 4.82 524 5.45 548 6.11 571 6.78

509 5.41 532 6.10 554 6.80 576 7.53 597 8.27

551 6.94 571 7.69 591 8.47 610 9.26 630 10.07

596 8.83 615 9.66 632 10.50 650 11.36 668 12.24

644 11.13 661 12.03 677 12.95 694 13.88 710 14.83

695 13.91 710 14.87 725 15.86 740 16.86 754 17.88

747 17.19 761 18.23 774 19.29 788 20.37 802 21.46

800 21.04 813 22.16 826 23.30 838 24.45 851 25.61

854 25.50 866 26.70 878 27.91 890 29.14 902 30.37

909 30.63 920 31.91 931 33.19 942 34.49 953 35.81

965 36.47 975 37.83 986 39.19 996 40.57 1006 41.96 1021 43.09 1031 44.52 1040 45.95 1050 47.41 1060 48.88 1077 50.50 1087 52.02 1096 53.54 1105 55.07 1114 56.62 1106 54.55 1115 56.09 1124 57.66 1133 59.23 1142 60.81

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

594 7.46 616 8.16 638 8.86 660 9.59 680 10.32

618 9.02 638 9.79 658 10.58 678 11.38 697 12.20

649 10.90 667 11.74 685 12.60 703 13.47 721 14.35

685 13.13 702 14.05 719 14.97 735 15.92 751 16.87

725 15.79 741 16.77 756 17.77 772 18.78 787 19.81

769 18.92 783 19.97 798 21.03 812 22.12 826 23.21

815 22.57 829 23.69 842 24.83 855 25.98 868 27.14

863 26.79 876 27.98 888 29.19 900 30.41 913 31.65

913 31.62 925 32.89 936 34.18 948 35.46 959 36.78

964 37.14 975 38.47 986 39.83 997 41.20 1008 42.58 1017 43.37 1027 44.78 1037 46.20 1047 47.65 1057 49.10 1070 50.36 1079 51.86 1089 53.35 1099 54.87 1108 56.41 1124 58.18 1133 59.74 1142 61.33 1151 62.91 1160 64.52 1151 62.42 1160 64.02 1169 65.64 1177 67.26 1186 68.90

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

701 11.06 721 11.82 741 12.58 760 13.35 779 14.13

716 13.02 734 13.86 753 14.70 771 15.56 789 16.43

739 15.25 756 16.16 773 17.09 790 18.02 806 18.97

768 17.84 784 18.82 799 19.82 815 20.83 830 21.84

802 20.84 816 21.89 831 22.96 846 24.04 860 25.12

840 24.32 853 25.44 867 26.58 881 27.72 894 28.88

881 28.32 894 29.51 906 30.70 919 31.93 932 33.15

925 32.90 937 34.15 949 35.42 961 36.71 972 38.00

971 38.09 982 39.43 993 40.77 1004 42.12 1015 43.49 1018 43.96 1029 45.36 1039 46.78 1050 48.21 1060 49.64 1067 50.56 1077 52.05 1087 53.52 1097 55.02 1107 56.53 1118 57.94 1127 59.48 1137 61.05 1146 62.62 1155 64.19 1169 66.13 1178 67.75 1187 69.40 1196 71.04 1205 72.70 1195 70.55 1204 72.22 1213 73.88 1221 75.56 1230 77.26

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

Table 13 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 90 Nominal Ton Units High-Static Return Fan Data

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.20.40.60.81.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

266 1.19 298 1.69 328 2.23 358 2.80 386 3.41 307 1.82 334 2.38 360 2.99 386 3.63 411 4.31 349 2.65 373 3.30 396 3.97 418 4.69 440 5.43 392 3.75 413 4.47 434 5.21 454 6.00 474 6.81 436 5.13 455 5.92 474 6.74 492 7.60 510 8.48 481 6.83 498 7.70 515 8.60 531 9.53 547 10.48 526 8.90 541 9.85 556 10.82 572 11.82 587 12.85 571 11.34 585 12.39 599 13.44 613 14.51 627 15.62 616 14.24 629 15.35 642 16.48 655 17.64 668 18.81 661 17.60 674 18.79 686 20.00 698 21.23 710 22.49 707 21.46 718 22.73 730 24.01 741 25.34 752 26.66 753 25.86 763 27.21 774 28.58 785 29.97 795 31.38 798 30.83 808 32.26 818 33.72 828 35.18 838 36.67 821 33.55 831 35.02 841 36.51 850 38.01 860 39.53

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.21.41.61.82.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

413 4.05 439 4.71 465 5.39 489 6.09 513 6.81 435 5.01 458 5.75 481 6.50 503 7.28 525 8.07 462 6.20 483 7.00 504 7.82 524 8.67 544 9.54 493 7.65 512 8.51 531 9.40 549 10.31 568 11.25 527 9.39 545 10.32 562 11.28 579 12.26 595 13.26 563 11.46 579 12.47 595 13.49 611 14.54 626 15.61 601 13.90 616 14.97 631 16.07 645 17.19 659 18.32 641 16.74 654 17.89 668 19.05 681 20.23 694 21.44 681 20.02 693 21.23 706 22.47 718 23.72 731 25.00 722 23.76 734 25.05 745 26.36 757 27.68 769 29.03 763 28.01 775 29.38 786 30.76 797 32.16 807 33.58 806 32.80 816 34.25 827 35.71 837 37.16 847 38.67 848 38.17 858 39.69 868 41.22 878 42.77 888 44.35 870 41.08 879 42.63 889 44.21 899 45.79 908 47.40

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

2.22.42.62.83.0

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

537 7.54 560 8.29 582 9.05 604 9.82 625 10.60 547 8.89 568 9.72 588 10.56 608 11.43 628 12.30 563 10.42 583 11.32 601 12.25 620 13.18 638 14.14 586 12.20 603 13.18 621 14.17 638 15.18 655 16.21 612 14.28 628 15.32 644 16.38 660 17.46 676 18.56 641 16.69 656 17.80 671 18.93 686 20.08 701 21.24 673 19.47 687 20.65 701 21.85 715 23.06 728 24.29 707 22.67 720 23.91 733 25.17 746 26.45 759 27.74 743 26.29 755 27.61 767 28.93 779 30.29 791 31.65 780 30.40 792 31.78 803 33.18 814 34.59 826 36.03 818 35.02 829 36.46 840 37.94 851 39.43 861 40.93 857 40.18 868 41.71 878 43.24 888 44.80 898 46.38 897 45.93 907 47.52 917 49.13 926 50.76 936 52.40 918 49.03 927 50.66 936 52.30 946 53.98 955 55.66

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 30,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 30,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 30,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 60,000

Table 14 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 105-150 Nominal Ton Units High-Static Return Fan Data

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

260 2.40 284 3.15 308 3.96 330 4.82 352 5.73

296 3.51 317 4.36 337 5.25 357 6.21 377 7.20

315 4.19 334 5.08 353 6.03 372 7.02 390 8.06

333 4.95 351 5.90 369 6.89 387 7.93 404 9.01

351 5.81 369 6.81 386 7.85 403 8.94 419 10.06

370 6.78 387 7.82 403 8.92 419 10.04 434 11.21

389 7.84 405 8.94 420 10.08 435 11.25 450 12.47

408 9.03 423 10.18 437 11.37 452 12.59 466 13.86

427 10.33 441 11.53 455 12.76 469 14.04 482 15.35

446 11.76 459 13.01 473 14.30 486 15.62 499 16.99

465 13.31 478 14.61 491 15.95 503 17.33 516 18.74

484 15.01 496 16.36 509 17.75 521 19.17 533 20.64

503 16.84 515 18.25 527 19.69 539 21.16 550 22.67

522 18.83 534 20.28 545 21.78 556 23.31 568 24.85

599 28.36 609 30.04 619 31.75 629 33.47 639 35.21

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

472 11.98 490 13.12 508 14.30 526 15.49 543 16.71

485 13.96 502 15.19 518 16.46 535 17.75 551 19.05

493 15.07 510 16.35 525 17.65 541 18.98 557 20.34

503 16.28 518 17.60 534 18.95 549 20.32 564 21.72

513 17.58 528 18.94 543 20.33 557 21.75 572 23.20

524 18.99 539 20.39 553 21.82 567 23.29 581 24.77

536 20.51 550 21.96 564 23.43 577 24.94 590 26.46

549 22.15 562 23.64 575 25.16 588 26.70 601 28.27

562 23.91 575 25.45 587 27.00 600 28.59 612 30.20

575 25.81 588 27.38 600 28.98 612 30.61 624 32.26

589 27.83 601 29.45 613 31.10 625 32.76 636 34.46

604 30.00 615 31.66 627 33.35 638 35.07 649 36.81

619 32.31 630 34.02 641 35.75 652 37.50 662 39.29

634 34.78 644 36.54 655 38.31 666 40.11 676 41.93

697 46.29 706 48.22 716 50.17 725 52.15 734 54.14

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

561 17.94 577 19.20 594 20.47 610 21.77 626 23.07

567 20.39 582 21.75 598 23.13 613 24.52 628 25.94

572 21.73 587 23.13 602 24.56 616 26.00 631 27.47

578 23.15 593 24.60 607 26.06 621 27.55 635 29.06

586 24.66 600 26.15 614 27.66 627 29.20 641 30.76

594 26.29 608 27.82 621 29.37 634 30.95 647 32.55

604 28.02 617 29.59 629 31.19 642 32.82 655 34.45

614 29.86 626 31.48 639 33.12 651 34.78 663 36.47

624 31.84 637 33.50 649 35.17 661 36.88 672 38.60

636 33.94 648 35.64 659 37.36 671 39.11 682 40.88

648 36.18 659 37.93 670 39.69 682 41.48 693 43.28

660 38.56 671 40.34 682 42.16 693 43.98 704 45.83

673 41.08 684 42.91 695 44.78 705 46.64 716 48.54

687 43.77 697 45.64 707 47.54 718 49.46 728 51.38

744 56.17 753 58.20 762 60.27 771 62.37 780 64.48

Table 15 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 75 Nominal Ton Units Standard Power Exhaust Fan Data

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

0.20.40.60.81.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 5,000 294 0.39 375 0.58 438 0.77 491 0.96 538 1.14 8,000 361 1.03 436 1.39 496 1.72 548 2.04 594 2.35

10,000 409 1.72 480 2.21 538 2.66 589 3.08 634 3.49 12,000 459 2.70 526 3.32 582 3.89 631 4.42 676 4.94 14,000 511 4.00 575 4.76 628 5.46 676 6.12 719 6.75 16,000 565 5.68 624 6.59 676 7.42 722 8.21 763 8.97 18,000 620 7.80 676 8.85 725 9.83 769 10.76 809 11.64 20,000 676 10.41 728 11.61 775 12.73 817 13.79 857 14.82

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

5,000 8,000

10,000 12,000 14,000 16,000 18,000 20,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

1.21.41.61.82.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

581 636 675 716 758 802 847 893

1.33

2.66

3.89

5.44

7.37

9.70

12.50

15.80

2.22.42.62.83.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 5,000 756 2.28 786 2.48 814 2.67 842 2.87 868 3.07 8,000 809 4.15 838 4.45 867 4.75 894 5.04 920 5.34

10,000 846 5.80 875 6.18 903 6.55 930 6.92 957 7.30 12,000 884 7.82 913 8.28 941 8.74 968 9.19 994 9.65 14,000 924 10.25 952 10.80 980 11.35 1006 11.89 1032 12.43 16,000 964 13.12 993 13.77 1020 14.42 1046 15.06 1072 15.69 18,000 1006 16.49 1034 17.24 1061 18.00 1087 18.74 1112 19.47 20,000 1049 20.39 1077 21.26 1103 22.12 1129 22.97 1153 23.81

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

621 675 714 754 795 838 882 927

1.52

2.96

4.28

5.93

7.96

10.41

13.33

16.76

657 711 749 789 830 872 915 960

1.71

3.26

4.66

6.41

8.55

11.11

14.14

17.69

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

692 746 783 822 863 904 947 991

1.90 725 2.09

3.56 778 3.85

5.05 815 5.43

6.89 854 7.36

9.12 894 9.69

11.79 935 12.46

14.93 977 15.72

18.61 1021 19.50

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

3.23.43.63.84.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

5,000 894 3.28 919 3.48 943 3.69 967 3.90 990 4.11 8,000 946 5.64 971 5.94 995 6.24 1018 6.54 1041 6.84

10,000 982 7.67 1007 8.04 1030 8.41 1054 8.78 1076 9.15 12,000 1019 10.10 1043 10.55 1067 11.00 1090 11.45 1113 11.89 14,000 1057 12.97 1081 13.51 1105 14.04 1128 14.57 1150 15.10 16,000 1096 16.32 1120 16.95 1144 17.57 1166 18.19 1189 18.81 18,000 1136 20.20 1160 20.93 1183 21.64 1206 22.36 1228 23.07 20,000 1178 24.64 1201 25.47 1224 26.29 1246 27.10 1268 27.91

Table 16 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 90-150 Nominal Ton Units Standard Power Exhaust Fan Data

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 5,000 238 0.34 307 0.55 363 0.76 410 0.98 453 1.21 7,000 272 0.66 335 0.95 388 1.24 433 1.53 474 1.83 9,000 311 1.17 368 1.54 417 1.91 461 2.28 500 2.65

11,000 354 1.90 406 2.36 451 2.82 492 3.27 529 3.72 13,000 399 2.91 446 3.47 488 4.01 526 4.55 561 5.08 15,000 446 4.26 488 4.90 527 5.54 563 6.16 596 6.78 16,000 469 5.07 510 5.76 547 6.44 582 7.11 615 7.78 18,000 518 7.01 555 7.80 590 8.57 622 9.33 653 10.08 20,000 567 9.41 602 10.29 634 11.15 664 12.01 693 12.85 22,000 617 12.32 649 13.29 679 14.25 708 15.19 735 16.13 24,000 667 15.79 697 16.85 725 17.90 752 18.93 778 19.97 25,000 693 17.75 721 18.86 749 19.96 775 21.04 800 22.11 26,000 718 19.87 746 21.03 772 22.17 798 23.30 822 24.42 27,000 744 22.16 770 23.36 796 24.55 821 25.72 845 26.89 28,000 769 24.62 795 25.87 820 27.10 844 28.32 867 29.54

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 5,000 492 1.45 528 1.70 561 1.95 593 2.21 623 2.48 7,000 512 2.13 547 2.44 580 2.75 611 3.07 640 3.40 9,000 536 3.02 570 3.40 602 3.78 632 4.16 661 4.55

11,000 564 4.17 596 4.62 627 5.07 656 5.53 684 5.99 13,000 594 5.61 626 6.14 655 6.67 684 7.21 711 7.74 15,000 628 7.40 658 8.01 686 8.63 713 9.24 740 9.85 16,000 645 8.44 675 9.09 703 9.75 729 10.40 755 11.06 18,000 682 10.83 710 11.57 737 12.32 762 13.05 787 13.79 20,000 721 13.69 747 14.52 773 15.35 798 16.17 822 16.99 22,000 761 17.06 787 17.98 811 18.90 835 19.81 858 20.72 24,000 803 20.99 827 21.99 850 23.01 873 24.01 895 25.01 25,000 824 23.18 848 24.24 871 25.29 893 26.34 915 27.38 26,000 846 25.53 869 26.64 891 27.73 913 28.83 934 29.92 27,000 868 28.05 890 29.20 912 30.35 933 31.48 954 32.62 28,000 890 30.74 912 31.94 933 33.13 954 34.31 974 35.49

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

5,000 651 2.76 678 3.04 704 3.32 730 3.62 754 3.92 7,000 668 3.73 695 4.06 721 4.41 746 4.76 770 5.11 9,000 688 4.95 714 5.35 740 5.75 764 6.16 788 6.57

11,000 711 6.45 737 6.92 762 7.39 786 7.86 809 8.34 13,000 737 8.28 762 8.82 786 9.36 809 9.90 832 10.45 15,000 765 10.47 789 11.08 813 11.70 836 12.32 858 12.94 16,000 780 11.71 804 12.36 827 13.02 850 13.68 871 14.33 18,000 811 14.52 834 15.26 857 16.00 879 16.73 900 17.47 20,000 845 17.81 867 18.63 889 19.45 910 20.27 931 21.08 22,000 880 21.62 902 22.53 923 23.43 943 24.33 963 25.23 24,000 917 26.00 938 27.00 958 27.98 978 28.97 998 29.96 25,000 936 28.42 956 29.45 976 30.49 996 31.52 1015 32.55 26,000 955 31.00 975 32.08 995 33.16 1014 34.23 1033 35.30 27,000 974 33.74 994 34.87 1014 35.99 1033 37.11 1051 38.22 28,000 994 36.66 1014 37.83 1033 39.00 1052 40.16 1070 41.32

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

5,000 778 4.22 800 4.54 823 4.85 844 5.18 865 5.50 7,000 793 5.47 816 5.83 838 6.20 859 6.58 880 6.96 9,000 811 6.99 833 7.42 855 7.84 876 8.28 897 8.71

11,000 831 8.82 853 9.31 875 9.80 896 10.29 916 10.79 13,000 854 11.00 876 11.55 897 12.11 917 12.67 937 13.23 15,000 879 13.56 901 14.18 921 14.81 941 15.44 961 16.07 16,000 893 14.99 914 15.66 934 16.32 954 16.98 973 17.65 18,000 921 18.20 941 18.94 961 19.68 981 20.42 1000 21.16 20,000 951 21.90 971 22.72 990 23.54 1009 24.35 1028 25.17 22,000 983 26.13 1002 27.03 1021 27.93 1040 28.82 1058 29.73 24,000 1017 30.94 1035 31.92 1054 32.90 1072 33.88 1089 34.86 25,000 1034 33.57 1052 34.60 1071 35.62 1088 36.65 1106 37.66 26,000 1052 36.37 1070 37.44 1088 38.50 1105 39.57 1122 40.63 27,000 1070 39.34 1088 40.45 1105 41.56 1122 42.67 1139 43.77 28,000 1088 42.48 1106 43.64 1123 44.78 1140 45.94 1157 47.09

Table 17 — Fan Performance — 4/508N 75-105 Nominal Ton Units High-Static Power Exhaust Fan Data

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 52,500

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000

0.20.40.60.81.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

185 1.91 240 3.01 285 4.17 324 5.43 358 6.75 198 2.74 250 4.03 293 5.36 331 6.75 365 8.22 212 3.82 261 5.30 303 6.82 339 8.38 372 9.99 227 5.19 274 6.88 313 8.58 349 10.32 381 12.10 243 6.87 287 8.78 325 10.69 359 12.61 391 14.57 260 8.93 301 11.06 338 13.17 371 15.29 401 17.43 277 11.38 316 13.73 351 16.06 383 18.39 412 20.73 295 14.28 332 16.86 366 19.41 396 21.94 425 24.48 313 17.67 348 20.47 380 23.24 410 25.99 437 28.74 332 21.58 365 24.61 396 27.60 424 30.57 451 33.53 351 26.04 382 29.31 412 32.53 439 35.71 465 38.89 370 31.12 400 34.62 428 38.07 454 41.48 479 44.87 389 36.84 418 40.57 445 44.25 470 47.88 399 39.97 427 43.81 453 47.60

1.21.41.61.82.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

390 8.15 419 9.63 446 11.17 472 12.77 496 14.45 396 9.75 424 11.34 451 13.00 477 14.71 501 16.49 403 11.66 431 13.39 457 15.18 482 17.02 506 18.91 411 13.93 438 15.80 464 17.73 489 19.70 512 21.73 419 16.56 447 18.60 472 20.68 496 22.80 519 24.97 429 19.61 456 21.81 481 24.06 504 26.34 527 28.65 440 23.08 466 25.47 490 27.88 513 30.33 536 32.81 451 27.03 476 29.60 500 32.20 523 34.82 545 37.47 463 31.49 488 34.25 511 37.04 534 39.84 555 42.67 476 36.48 500 39.46 523 42.43 545 45.42 566 48.43 489 42.06 512 45.23 535 48.41 503 48.25

51,000 —————————— 52,500

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000 39,000 42,000

——————————

2.22.42.62.83.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

519 16.17 542 17.97 563 19.81 584 21.71 603 23.66 524 18.32 546 20.21 567 22.16 587 24.15 607 26.20 529 20.86 551 22.86 572 24.91 592 27.01 611 29.15 535 23.81 556 25.92 577 28.09 597 30.30 617 32.57 542 27.18 563 29.44 583 31.73 603 34.07 622 36.46 549 31.01 570 33.41 590 35.84 610 38.33 629 40.85 557 35.32 578 37.88 598 40.47 617 43.09 636 45.75 566 40.15 587 42.87 606 45.61 625 48.39 576 45.53 596 48.41 ——————————

45,000 —————————— 48,000 —————————— 51,000

——————————

52,500 ——————————

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

15,000 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000

3.23.43.63.84.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

623 25.67 641 27.73 660 29.83 677 31.98 694 34.18 626 28.29 645 30.44 663 32.62 680 34.85 698 37.14 630 31.35 649 33.60 667 35.89 684 38.21 701 40.60 635 34.87 654 37.23 671 39.62 689 42.06 706 44.53 641 38.90 659 41.36 677 43.87 694 46.42 711 49.00 647 43.40 665 45.99 683 48.64 654 48.44

36,000 —————————— 39,000

——————————

42,000 —————————— 45,000 —————————— 48,000

——————————

51,000 —————————— 52,500

——————————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

——

————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

————

————————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

——

——————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

————

————————

Table 18 — Fan Performance — 48/50N 120-150 Nominal Ton Units High-Static Power Exhaust Fan Data

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 30,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 30,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 30,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 46,000 48,000 50,000 52,000 60,000

AIRFLOW

(cfm)

24,000 28,000 30,000 32,000 34,000 36,000 38,000 40,000 42,000 44,000 —————————— 46,000 48,000 —————————— 50,000 52,000 —————————— 60,000 ——————————

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

195 3.13 239 5.10 274 6.96 303 8.78 329 10.57 209 4.07 254 6.47 288 8.71 317 10.87 343 13.00 216 4.60 261 7.22 295 9.65 324 12.01 350 14.31 224 5.17 268 8.02 302 10.66 331 13.19 357 15.68 231 5.79 275 8.87 310 11.72 339 14.45 364 17.12 238 6.44 283 9.77 317 12.84 346 15.77 371 18.62 246 7.15 290 10.72 324 14.01 353 17.14 379 20.19 253 7.89 297 11.73 331 15.24 360 18.58 386 21.82 261 8.69 305 12.79 339 16.53 368 20.10 393 23.53 268 9.54 312 13.90 346 17.89 375 21.66 400 25.32 276 10.43 319 15.09 353 19.29 382 23.30 408 27.17 283 11.38 327 16.32 361 20.79 389 25.02 415 29.09 291 12.39 334 17.62 368 22.34 397 26.79 422 31.08 298 13.45 341 18.98 375 23.95 404 28.65 429 33.17 328 18.30 371 25.08 405 31.15 433 36.84 458 42.27

1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

352 12.35 373 14.11 393 15.87 412 17.63 429 19.39 366 15.10 387 17.19 407 19.25 426 21.32 444 23.37 373 16.58 394 18.83 414 21.05 433 23.28 451 25.48 380 18.12 402 20.54 421 22.93 440 25.31 458 27.69 388 19.74 409 22.32 429 24.89 447 27.42 465 29.96 395 21.42 416 24.18 436 26.91 454 29.63 472 32.32 402 23.18 423 26.12 443 29.02 461 31.90 479 34.76 409 25.01 430 28.12 450 31.20 469 34.27 486 37.29 416 26.89 437 30.21 457 33.47 476 36.70 493 39.90 423 28.87 445 32.38 464 35.83 483 39.24 501 42.62 431 30.92 452 34.62 472 38.25 490 41.84 508 45.40 438 33.05 459 36.93 479 40.77 497 44.55 515 48.30 445 35.26 466 39.34 486 43.37 505 47.35 522 51.28 452 37.56 473 41.86 493 46.07 512 50.24 529 54.34 481 47.54 502 52.71 522 57.76

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

446 21.15 462 22.91 478 24.67 492 26.43 507 28.20 460 25.43 476 27.49 492 29.54 507 31.59 521 33.64 467 27.69 484 29.90 499 32.10 514 34.30 528 36.50 475 30.04 491 32.40 506 34.76 521 37.10 535 39.45 482 32.49 498 34.99 513 37.50 528 40.00 542 42.50 489 35.00 505 37.67 520 40.33 535 42.99 549 45.64 496 37.60 512 40.43 527 43.26 542 46.07 556 48.88 503 40.30 519 43.31 534 46.28 549 49.25 563 52.22 510 43.09 526 46.25 542 49.41 556 52.53 571 55.66 517 45.96 533 49.29 549 52.62 564 55.92 578 59.19 525 48.94 541 52.45 556 55.92 571 59.40 532 52.00 548 55.68 563 59.35 539 55.17 555 59.03 546 58.43

——————————

3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

521 29.98 534 31.75 547 33.52 560 35.31 572 37.09 535 35.67 548 37.74 561 39.79 574 41.86 586 43.91 542 38.69 555 40.89 568 43.08 581 45.29 593 47.49 549 41.79 562 44.13 575 46.48 588 48.83 600 51.17 556 44.99 569 47.48 582 49.97 595 52.47 607 54.95 563 48.28 576 50.93 589 53.57 602 56.19 614 58.85 570 51.68 584 54.48 597 57.27 577 55.17 591 58.13 584 58.77

——————————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

——

————

——————

————————

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

————

——————

————————

COMPONENT

High-Capacity Evaporator Coil (75-90)

High-Capacity Evaporator Coil (105)

Humidi-MiZer

Hydronic Coil (75-105)

Steam Coil (75-105)

Low Gas Heat (75-105)

Medium Gas Heat (75-105)

High Gas Heat (75-105)

Electric Heat (108 kW)

Electric Heat (108 kW, High-Static Supply Fan)

Electric Heat (144 kW)

Electric Heat (144 kW, High-Static Supply Fan)

Electric Heat (190 kW)

Electric Heat (190 kW, High-Static Supply Fan)

Electric Heat (265 kW)

Electric Heat (265 kW, High-Static Supply Fan)

System (75-105)

FILTERS

Mixed Air Filters

4 in. MERV 8

4 in. MERV 14

Cartridge Filter with 2 in. Pre-Filter

Cartridge Filter with 4 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 14 Bag with 2 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 14 Bag with 4 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 15 Bag with 2 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 15 Bag with 4 in. Pre-Filter

Final Filters

Cartridge Filter with 2 in. Pre-Filter

Cartridge Filter with 4 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 15 Bag with 2 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 15 Bag with 4 in. Pre-Filter

HEPA with 2 in. Pre-Filter

HEPA with 4 in. Pre-Filter

Economizer Pressure Drop

High-Static PE Fan (off)

Standard PE Fan (90-105) (off)

Standard PE Fan (75) (off)

Outdoor Airflow Station

LEGEND

PE — Power Exhaust

Table 19 — Component Pressure Drops (in. wg)

Sizes N, P, Q (75-105 Ton Nominal Capacity)

AIRFLOW (cfm)

15,000 19,000 23,000 27,000 31,000 35,000 39,000 43,000 47,000 52,000

0.05 0.10 0.14 0.18 0.22 0.26 0.29 0.32 0.34 0.37

0.04 0.09 0.14 0.19 0.24 0.28 0.32 0.36 0.40 0.44

0.02 0.03 0.05 0.09 0.17 0.25 0.39 0.54 0.70 0.91

0.13 0.20 0.28 0.37 0.46 0.57 0.68 0.80 0.93 1.10

0.14 0.22 0.31 0.41 0.51 0.63 0.75 0.88 1.02 1.21

0.15 0.20 0.26 0.33 0.41 0.49 0.58 0.68 0.78 0.92

0.18 0.25 0.33 0.42 0.51 0.62 0.73 0.85 0.98 1.15

0.26 0.35 0.45 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.94 1.09 1.24 1.45

0.05 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.21 0.27 0.34 0.42 0.50 0.62

0.08 0.12 0.17 0.24 0.32 0.41 0.51 0.63 0.75 0.93

0.06 0.09 0.13 0.18 0.23 0.30 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.68

0.08 0.13 0.19 0.27 0.35 0.45 0.56 0.69 0.83 1.02

0.06 0.10 0.14 0.19 0.26 0.33 0.41 0.51 0.61 0.75

0.09 0.14 0.21 0.29 0.39 0.50 0.62 0.76 0.91 1.12

0.07 0.11 0.15 0.21 0.28 0.36 0.46 0.56 0.67 0.82

0.10 0.16 0.23 0.32 0.43 0.55 0.68 0.84 1.00 1.24

0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

0.21 0.27 0.33 0.39 0.44 0.50 0.56 0.61 0.67 0.74

0.38 0.48 0.58 0.68 0.78 0.88 0.98 1.08 1.18 1.30

0.30 0.38 0.46 0.54 0.62 0.70 0.78 0.86 0.94 1.04

0.23 0.29 0.35 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.59 0.65 0.71 0.78

0.30 0.38 0.46 0.54 0.62 0.70 0.78 0.86 0.94 1.04

0.23 0.29 0.35 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.59 0.65 0.71 0.78

0.39 0.50 0.61 0.71 0.82 0.92 1.03 1.13 1.24 1.37

0.32 0.40 0.48 0.57 0.65 0.74 0.82 0.91 0.99 1.09

0.24 0.30 0.36 0.43 0.49 0.55 0.62 0.68 0.74 0.82

0.47 0.60 0.73 0.85 0.98 1.11 1.23 1.36 1.48 1.64

0.39 0.50 0.61 0.71 0.82 0.92 1.03 1.13 1.24 1.37

0.07 0.09 0.11 0.15 0.19 0.24 0.29 0.35 0.41 0.50

0.02 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.15 0.19 0.24 0.30 0.35 0.44

0.00 0.05 0.10 0.13 0.17 0.21 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.44

0.06 0.08 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.29 0.36 0.43

0.00 0.03 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.28

COMPONENT

High-Capacity Evaporator Coil (120)

High-Capacity Evaporator Coil (130-150)

Humidi-MiZer

Hydronic Coil (120-150)

Steam Coil (120-150)

Low Gas Heat (120-150)

Medium Gas Heat (120-150)

High Gas Heat (120-150)

Electric Heat (144 kW) Electric Heat (144 kW,

High-Static Supply Fan) Electric Heat (265 kW)

Electric Heat (300 kW)

FILTERS

System (120-150)

Mixed Air Filters

4 in. MERV 8

4 in. MERV 14

Cartridge Filter with 2 in. Pre-Filter

Cartridge Filter with 4 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 14 Bag with 2 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 14 Bag with 4 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 15 Bag with 2 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 15 Bag with 4 in. Pre-Filter

Final Filters

Cartridge Filter with 2 in. Pre-Filter

Cartridge Filter with 4 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 15 Bag with 2 in. Pre-Filter

MERV 15 Bag with 4 in. Pre-Filter

HEPA with 2 in. Pre-Filter

HEPA with 4 in. Pre-Filter

Economizer Pressure Drop

High-Static PE Fan (off)

Standard PE Fan (off)

Outdoor Airflow Station

LEGEND

PE — Power Exhaust

Table 20 — Component Pressure Drops (in. wg)

Sizes R, S, T (120-150 Ton Nominal Capacity)

AIRFLOW (cfm)

24,000 28,000 32,000 36,000 40,000 44,000 48,000 52,000 56,000 60,000

0.10 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.22 0.25 0.28 0.31 0.33 0.36

0.11 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.26 0.29 0.33 0.36 0.39

0.06 0.11 0.19 0.29 0.42 0.56 0.73 0.92 1.14 1.38

0.18 0.23 0.28 0.34 0.41 0.48 0.55 0.63 0.71 0.80

0.21 0.27 0.34 0.41 0.49 0.57 0.66 0.76 0.86 0.96

0.28 0.35 0.43 0.51 0.61 0.71 0.81 0.93 1.04 1.17

0.35 0.44 0.54 0.64 0.76 0.88 1.02 1.16 1.31 1.46

0.47 0.58 0.70 0.83 0.97 1.11 1.26 1.42 1.59 1.76

0.13 0.18 0.24 0.30 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.65 0.76 0.87

0.20 0.27 0.36 0.46 0.57 0.69 0.83 0.98 1.14 1.31

0.15 0.20 0.26 0.34 0.42 0.51 0.61 0.72 0.83 0.96

0.22 0.30 0.39 0.50 0.62 0.76 0.91 1.07 1.25 1.44

0.29 0.39 0.51 0.65 0.81 0.99 1.18 1.39 1.63 1.87

0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

0.34 0.40 0.46 0.51 0.57 0.63 0.69 0.74 0.80 0.86

0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50

0.48 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.88 0.96 1.04 1.12 1.20

0.36 0.42 0.48 0.54 0.60 0.66 0.72 0.78 0.84 0.90

0.48 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.88 0.96 1.04 1.12 1.20

0.36 0.42 0.48 0.54 0.60 0.66 0.72 0.78 0.84 0.90

0.63 0.74 0.84 0.95 1.05 1.16 1.26 1.37 1.47 1.58

0.51 0.59 0.67 0.76 0.84 0.93 1.01 1.09 1.18 1.26

0.38 0.44 0.51 0.57 0.63 0.69 0.76 0.82 0.88 0.95

0.76 0.88 1.01 1.14 1.26 1.39 1.52 1.64 1.77 1.89

0.63 0.74 0.84 0.95 1.05 1.16 1.26 1.37 1.47 1.58

0.11 0.16 0.18 0.24 0.30 0.40 0.44 0.51 0.68 0.67

0.08 0.11 0.14 0.19 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.33 0.40 0.42

0.10 0.15 0.17 0.23 0.28 0.33 0.37 0.44 0.48 0.58

0.08 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.20 0.24 0.28 0.33 0.38 0.43

Table 21 — Supply Fan Motor Limitations

ENCLOSURE

TYPE ODP 15 11.2 17.3 12.9 21.7 17.4 93.0 TEFC 15 11.2 17.2 12.9 20.5 16.6 92.4 ODP 20 14.9 22.9 17.1 28.2 22.5 93.6 TEFC 20 14.9 23.0 17.1 27.3 21.9 93.0 ODP 25 18.7 28.7 21.4 35.1 28.2 93.6 TEFC 25 18.7 28.7 21.4 34.3 27.4 93.6 ODP 30 22.4 34.5 25.7 42.1 32.8 94.1 TEFC 30 22.4 34.5 25.7 41.3 33.0 93.6 ODP 40 29.8 43.7 32.6 55.8 44.6 94.1 TEFC 40 29.8 46.0 34.3 53.5 42.8 94.1 ODP 50 37.3 53.9 40.2 69.6 55.2 94.5 TEFC 50 37.3 57.5 42.9 66.6 53.2 94.5 ODP 60 44.8 68.1 50.8 81.7 65.6 95.0 TEFC 60 44.8 69.0 51.5 81.9 67.5 95.0 ODP 75 56.0 84.2 62.8 101.2 80.5 95.0 TEFC 75 56.0 86.0 64.2 100.7 82.6 95.4 ODP 100 74.6 112.2 83.7 132.3 105.8 95.4 TEFC 100 74.6 114.8 85.6 140.3 110.7 95.4

LEGEND NOTES:

Bhp — Brake Horsepower BkW — Brake Kilowatts ODP — Open Drip Proof TEFC — Total Enclosed Fan Cooled

NOMINAL MAXIMUM MAXIMUM AMPS

1. Extensive motor and electrical testing on the Carrier units has ensured that the full horsepower range of the motor can be utilized with confidence. Using fan motors up to the horsepower ratings shown in the Motor Limitations table will not result in nuisance tripping or premature motor failure. Unit warranty will not be affected.

2. All motors comply with Energy Policy Act (EPACT) Standards

effective October 24, 1997.

RATED

EFFICIENCYBHP BKW BHP BKW 460 V 575 V

Table 22 — Power Exhaust and Return Fan Motor Limitations

ENCLOSURE

TYPE ODP 7.5 5.60 8.58 6.40 11.2 8.6 91.7 TEFC 7.5 5.60 8.62 6.43 10.5 8.4 91.7 ODP 10 7.46 11.48 8.56 14.5 11.6 91.7 TEFC 10 7.46 11.49 8.57 14.0 11.3 91.7 ODP 15 11.2 17.3 12.9 21.7 17.4 93.0 TEFC 15 11.2 17.2 12.9 20.5 16.6 92.4 ODP 20 14.9 22.9 17.1 28.2 22.5 93.6 TEFC 20 14.9 23.0 17.1 27.3 21.9 93.0 ODP 25 18.7 28.7 21.4 35.1 28.2 93.6 TEFC 25 18.7 28.7 21.4 34.3 27.4 93.6 ODP 30 22.4 34.5 25.7 42.1 32.8 94.1 TEFC 30 22.4 34.5 25.7 41.3 33.0 93.6 ODP 40 29.8 43.7 32.6 55.8 44.6 94.1 TEFC 40 29.8 46.0 34.3 53.5 42.8 94.1 ODP 50 37.3 53.9 40.2 69.6 55.2 94.5 TEFC 50 37.3 57.5 42.9 66.6 53.2 94.5 ODP 60 44.8 68.1 50.8 81.7 65.6 95.0 TEFC 60 44.8 69.0 51.5 81.9 67.5 95.0

LEGEND NOTES:

Bhp — Brake Horsepower BkW — Brake Kilowatts ODP — Open Drip Proof TEFC — Total Enclosed Fan Cooled

NOMINAL MAXIMUM MAXIMUM AMPS

2. All motors comply with Energy Policy Act (EPACT) Standards

effective October 24, 1997.

EFFICIENCYBHP BKW BHP BKW 460 V 575 V

RATED

CONTROLS QUICK START

The following section will provide a quick user guide to setting up and configuring the N Series units with ComfortLink controls. See Basic Control Usage section on pages 4 and 5 for information on operating the control.

Variable Air Volume Units Using Return Air Sensor or Space Temperature Sensor —

configure the unit, perform the following:

1. The type of control is configured under Configuration



UNITC.TYP. Set C.TYP to 1 (VAV-RAT) for return

air sensor. Set C.TYP to 2 (VAV-SPT) for space temperature sensor.

NOTE: For VAV with a space sensor (VAV-SPT), under

Configuration

space sensor by setting SPT.S to ENBL.

NOTE: Refer to the section on static pressure control for information on how to set up the unit for the type of supply fan control desired.

2. The space temperature set points and the supply air set points are configured under the Setpoints menu. The heating and cooling set points must be configured. See the Heating Control and Cooling Control sections for further description on these configurations. Configure the following set points:

OHSP Occupied Heat Set Point OCSP Occupied Cool Set Point UHSP Unoccupied Heat Set Point UCSP Unoccupied Cool Set Point GAP Heat-cool Set Point Gap V. C . O N VAV Occupied Cool On Delta V. C . O F VAV Occupied Cool Off Delta

Also configure the following points in the Configuration



BP D.LV.T menu:

L.H.ON Demand Level Low Heat On L.H.OF Demand Level Low Heat Off

3. To program time schedules, make sure SCH.N=1 under Configuration

the control to use local schedules.

4. Under the Time Clock sired schedule. See Time Clock section for further descriptions of these configurations.

5. Under Configuration Static Pressure set point should be configured.

6. If supply air temperature reset is desired, under the

Configuration

points should be configured:

RS.CF EDT Reset Configuration RTIO Reset Ratio LIMT Reset Limit RES.S EDT 4-20 mA Reset Input

This applies to both TSTAT MULTI and SENSOR MULTI modes.

NOTE: Configure either RTIO and LIMT or RES.S. All three are not used.

7. See the Economizer Configurations section for additional economizer option configurations.

8. See the Exhaust Configurations section for addition exhaust option configurations.



UNITSENSSPT.S, enable the



IAQSC.OVSCH.N to configure



SCH.L submenu, enter the de-

SP



EDT.R submenu, the following set

SP.SP, the Supply Duct

Multi-Stage Constant Volume and Staged Air Volume Units with Mechanical Thermostat —

To configure the unit, perform the following:

1. Under Configuration (TSTAT MULTI). See the Economizer Configurations section for additional economizer option configurations.

2. Under the Setpoints menu, set the following configurations:

SA.HI Supply Air Set Point Hi SA.LO Supply Air Set Point Lo

See the Exhaust Configurations section for additional exhaust option configurations.



UNITC.TYP, set C.TYP to 3

Multi-Stage Constant Volume and Staged Air Volume Units with Space Sensor —

the unit, perform the following:

1. Under Configuration (SPT MULTI).

2. Under the Setpoints menu, the following configurations should be set:

SA.HI Supply Air Set Point Hi SA.LO Supply Air Set Point Lo

3. Under the Setpoints submenu, the heating and cooling set points must be configured:

OHSP Occupied Heat Setpoint OCSP Occupied Cool Setpoint UHSP Unoccupied Heat Setpoint UCSP Unoccupied Cool Setpoint GAP Heat-Cool Setpoint Gap D.LV.T

4. Under Configuration the space sensor by setting SPT.S to ENBL.

5. Under Configuration 1 for continuous fan or 0 for automatic fan.

6. To program time schedules, set SCH.N=1 under Config-

uration

trol to use local schedules.

7. Under the Timeclock sired schedule. See Time Clock section for further descriptions of these configurations.

8. See the Economizer Configurations section for additional economizer option configurations.

9. See the Exhaust Configurations section for additional exhaust option configurations.

Cool/Heat Set Point Offsets (located in the Configuration menu)



IAQSC.OVSCH.N to configure the con-



UNITC.TYP, set C.TYP to 4



UNITSENSSPT.S, enable



UNITFN.MD, set FN.MD to



SCH.L submenu, enter the de-

To configure

Economizer Configurations — Under the Configu-

ration



configured:

ECON submenu, the following set points should be

EC.EN Economizer Enabled? EC.MN Economizer Min.Position EC.MX Economizer Maximum Position E.TRM Economizer Trim for SumZ? E.SEL Econ Changeover Select OA.E.C OA Enthalpy Change Over Select OA.EN Outdoor Enthalpy Compare Value OAT.L High OAT Lockout Temp O.DEW OA Dew Point Temp Limit ORH.S Outside Air RH Sensor CFM.C Outdoor Air CFM Control E.CFG Economizer Operation Config

UEFC Unoccupied Economizer Free Cooling ACT.C Economizer Actuator Config



Configuration

the minimum damper position.

If the unit is equipped with an outdoor air flow station, the following points in Configuration be set.

If equipped with an outdoor flow station, make sure

Configuration

outdoor air cfm station is used, then the economizer will control to cfm, not a position, as long as the sensor is valid. Therefore, Configuration sedes ConfigurationECONEC.MN. Without CFM or enthalpy control, the outdoor-air dampers will open to minimum position when the supply fan is running. Outdoor-air dampers will spring-return closed upon loss of power or shutdown of the supply fan.

ECONEC.MN should always be set for



ECONCFM.C need to



ECONCFM.COCF.S is enabled. If an



ECONCFM.CO.C.MX super-

Indoor Air Quality Configurations

DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION — Under Configuration



ters should be set to establish the minimum and maximum points for outdoor air damper position during demand controlled ventilation (DCV):

absolute minimum vent position (or maximum reset) under DCV.

minimum damper position (or with no DCV reset). This is also referenced in the economizer section.

with the outdoor airflow station and will supersede

Configuration

door air cfm sensor is valid.

with the outdoor airflow station and will supersede

Configuration

door air cfm sensor is valid.

IAQDCV.C, the following configuration parame-

EC.MN Economizer Min.Position IAQ.M IAQ Demand Vent Min.Pos. O.C.MX Economizer Min. Flow O.C.MN IAQ Demand Vent Min. Flow

Configuration



IAQDCV.CIAQ.M is used to set the



IAQDCV.CEC.MN is used to set the



IAQDCV.CO.C.MX is used only



IAQDCV.CEC.MN as long as the out-



IAQDCV.CO.C.MN is used only



IAQDCV.CIAQ.M as long as the out-

Exhaust Configurations — The following exhaust

options should be configured.

Configuration BP the following configurations may be adjusted:

BP.SP Building Pressure Set Point BP.SO BP Set Point Offset

Under Configuration rations may be adjusted:

BP.FS VFD/Act. Fire Speed BP.MN VFD/Act. Min. Speed BP.MX VFD Maximum Speed

Configuration

trol) — Under ConfigurationBP the following configurations may be adjusted:

BP.SP Building Pressure Setpoint (see note below)

Under Configuration rations may be adjusted:

BP.FS VFD/Act. Fire Speed BP.MN VFD/Act. Min. Speed BP.MX VFD Maximum Speed

BP

BF.CF=1 — Under Configuration

BP

BP.CF=2 (Return Fan Tracking Con-

BP

B.V.A the following configu-



Under Configuration

urations may be adjusted:

FT.CF Fan Track Learn Enable (see note below) FT.TM Fan Track Learn Rate (see note below, not

used when Fan Track Learning is disabled)

FT.ST Fan Track Initial DCFM FT.MX Fan Track Max Clamp (see note below, not

used when Fan Track Learning is disabled)

FT.AD Fan Track Max Correction (see note below,

not used when Fan Track Learning is disabled)

FT.OF Fan Track Internl EEPROM (see note below,

FT.RM Fan Track Internal Ram (see note below, not

FT.RS Fan Track Reset Internal (see note below, not

NOTE: These configurations are used only if Fan Track Learning is enabled. When Fan Track Learning is enabled, the control will add an offset to the Fan Track Initial DCFM (Configuration sure deviates from the Building Pressure Set Point (BP.SP). Periodically, at the rate set by the Fan Track Learn Rate (FT.TM) the delta cfm is adjusted upward or downward with a maximum adjustment at a given instance to be no greater than Fan Track Max correction (FT.AD). The delta cfm can not ever be adjusted greater than or less than the Fan Track Max Clamp (FT.MX).

not used when Fan Track Learning is disabled)

used when Fan Track Learning is disabled)

BP

FA N. TFT.ST) if the building pres-

FA N. T the following config-

Set Clock on VFD — The clock set mode is used for

setting the date and time for the internal clock of the VFD. In order to use the timer functions of the VFD control, the internal clock must be set. The date is used to determine weekdays and is visible in the fault logs. Refer to the VFD section in Appendix D on page 211 for information on operating the VFD and using the keypad.

To set the clock, perform the following procedure from the

VFD keypad:

1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed.

2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight TIME AND DATE SET on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). The clock set parameter list will be displayed.

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CLOCK VISIBILITY and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). This parameter is used to display or hide the clock on the screen. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.

4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET TIME and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the hours and minutes. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.

5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight TIME FORMAT and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.

6. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET DATE and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the day, month, and year. Press OK (SOFT KEY

2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.

7. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DATE FORMAT and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press OK

(SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.

8. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) twice to return to the main menu.

Programming Operating Schedules — The

ComfortLink controls will accommodate up to eight different schedules (Periods 1 through 8), and each schedule is assigned to the desired days of the week. Each schedule includes an occupied on and off time. As an example, to set an occupied schedule for 8 AM to 5 PM for Monday through Friday, the user would set days Monday through Friday to ON for Period

1. Then the user would configure the Period 1 Occupied From point to 08:00 and the Period 1 Occupied To point to 17:00. To create a different weekend schedule, the user would use Period 2 and set days Saturday and Sunday to ON with the desired Occupied On and Off times.

NOTE: By default, the time schedule periods are programmed for 24 hours of occupied operation.

To create a schedule, perform the following procedure:

1. Scroll to the Configuration mode, and select CCN CONFIGURATION (CCN). Scroll down to the Schedule Number (Configuration password protection has been enabled, the user will be prompted to enter the password before any new data is accepted. The default password is 1111. SCH.N has a range of 0 to 99. The default value is 1. A value of 0 is always occupied, and the unit will control to its occupied set points. A value of 1 means the unit will follow a local schedule, and a value of 65 to 99 means it will follow a CCN schedule. Schedules 2-64 are not used as the control only supports one internal/local schedule. If one of the 264 schedules is configured, then the control will force the number back to 1. Make sure the value is set to 1 to use a local schedule.

2. Enter the Time Clock mode. Scroll down to the LOCAL TIME SCHEDULE (SCH.L) sub-mode, and press ENTER. Period 1 (PER.1) will be displayed.

3. Scroll down to the MON point. This point indicates if schedule 1 applies to Monday. Use the ENTER command to go into Edit mode, and use the UP or DOWN key to change the display to YES or NO. Scroll down through the rest of the days and apply schedule 1 where desired. The schedule can also be applied to a holiday.

4. Configure the beginning of the occupied time period for Period 1 (OCC). Press ENTER to go into Edit mode, and the first two digits of the 00.00 will start flashing. Use the UP or DOWN key to display the correct value for hours, in 24-hour (military) time. Press ENTER and hour value is saved and the minutes digits will start flashing. Use the same procedure to display and save the desired minutes value.

5. Configure the unoccupied time for period 1 (UNC). Press ENTER to go into Edit mode, and the first two digits of the 00.00 will start flashing. Use the UP or DOWN key to display the correct value for hours, in 24-hour (military) time. Press ENTER and hour value is saved and the minutes digits will start flashing. Use the same procedure to display and save the desired minutes value.

6. The first schedule is now complete. If a second schedule is needed, such as for weekends or holidays, scroll down and repeat the entire procedure for period 2 (PER.2). If additional schedules are needed, repeat the process for as many as are needed. Eight schedules are provided.



IAQSC.OV=SCH.N). If

SERVICE TEST

General —

ture, which is intended to allow a service person to force the unit into different modes of operation. To use this feature, enter the Service Test category on the Navigator display and place the unit into the test mode by changing Service Te st from OFF to ON. The display will prompt for the password before allowing any change. The default password is 1111. Once the unit enters the Service Test mode, the unit will shut down all current modes.

TEST — The TEST command turns the unit off (hard stop)

and allows the unit to be put in a manual control mode.

STOP — The STOP command completely disables the unit (all outputs turn off immediately). Once in this mode, nothing can override the unit to turn it on. The controller will ignore all inputs and commands.

S.STP — Setting Soft Stop to YES turns the unit off in an orderly way, honoring any timeguards currently in effect.

FA N. F — By turning the FAN FORCE on, the supply fan is turned on and will operate as it normally would, controlling duct static pressure on VAV. SAV modulates from high to low based on the software's algorithms. To remove the force, press ENTER and then press the UP and DOWN arrows simultaneously.

The remaining categories: INDP, FA N S, AC.T.C, HMZR, EXVS, COOL, and HEAT are sub-menus with separate items and functions. See Table 23.

The units are equipped with a Service Test fea-



TEST

Service Test Mode Logic — Operation in the Service

Test mode is sub-menu specific except for the INDP submenu. Leaving the sub-menu while a test is being performed and attempting to start a different test in the new sub-menu will cause the previous test to terminate. When this happens, the new request will be delayed for 5 seconds. For example, if compressors were turned on under the COOL sub-menu, any attempt to turn on heating stages within the HEAT sub-menu would immediately turn off the compressors and 5 seconds later the controller would honor the requested heat stages.

However, it is important to note that the user can leave a

Service Test mode to view any of the local display menus (Run Status, Te m p era t u res, Pressures, Setpoints, Inputs, Outputs, Configuration, Time Clock, Operating Modes, and Alarms)

and the control will remain in the Service Test mode.

Independent Outputs — The INDP sub-menu items

can be turned on and off regardless of the other category states. For example, the humidifier relay or remote alarm/auxiliary relay can be forced on in the INDP sub-menu and will remain on if compressor stages were requested in the COOL sub-menu.

Fans — Upon entering the FA NS sub-menu, the user will be

able to enact either a manual or automatic style of test operation. The first item in the sub-menu, Fan Test Mode Automatic (Service Test figured static pressure or building pressure control to begin as in the application run mode. During this automatic mode, it is possible to manually control condenser fans 1 to 4.

If Fan Test Mode Automatic (Service Test F. M O D ), is set to NO, then the user will have individual control over duct static pressure (VFD speed), building pressure and condenser fan control. Additionally, the controller will protect the system from developing too much static pressure. If the static pressure during manual control rises above 3 in. wg or if the Static Pressure Set Point (Setpoints

2.5 in. wg and static pressure is 0.5 in. wg higher than SPSP, then all options in the FANS menu will be cleared back to their default OFF states.



FA NSF. M O D ), allows the fan and the con-



FA NS



SPSP) is greater than



Table 23 — Service Test

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT WRITE STATUS

TEST Service Test Mode ON/OFF MAN_CTRL STOP Local Machine Disable YES/NO UNITSTOP S.STP Soft Stop Request YES/NO SOFTSTOP FAN.F Supply Fan Request YES/NO SFANFORC

INDP TEST INDEPENDENT OUTPUTS HUM.R Humidifier Relay ON/OFF HUMR_TST UVC.R UV-C Lamp Relay ON/OFF UVCR_TST ALRM Remote Alarm/Aux Relay ON/OFF ALRM_TST

FANS TEST FANS

F. MO D Fan Test Automatic? YES/NO FANAUTO E.POS Econ 1 Out Act. Cmd. Pos. 0-100 ECONFANS

SF.BY Supply Fan Bypass Relay ON/OFF SFAN_TST

S.VFD Supply Fan Commanded % 0-100 % SFVFDTST PE.BY Power Exhaust Bypass Relay ON/OFF PEBY_TST E.VFD Exhaust Fan Commanded % 0-100 % EFVFDTST A.VFD MtrMaster A Commanded % 0-100 % OAVFDTST B.VFD MtrMaster B Commanded % 0-100 % OBVFDTST CDF.1 Condenser Fan Output 1 ON/OFF CDF1_TST CDF.2 Condenser Fan Output 2 ON/OFF CDF2_TST CDF.3 Condenser Fan Output 3 ON/OFF CDF3_TST

CDF.4 Condenser Fan Output 4 ON/OFF CDF4_TST CDF.5 Condenser Fan Output 5 ON/OFF CDF5_TST

AC.T.C CALIBRATE TEST-ACTUATORS

EC1.C Econ 1 Out Act.Cmd.Pos. 0-100 ECON1TST E1.CL Economizer Calibrate Cmd YES/NO ECONOCAL E1C.A Econ 1 Out Act Ctl Angle CONCANG EC2.C Econ 2 Ret Act.Cmd.Pos. 0-100 ECON2TST E2.CL Economzr 2 Calibrate Cmd YES/NO ECON2CAL E2C.A Econ 2 Ret Act Ctl Angle ECN2CANG

EC3.C Econ 3 Out Act. Cmd.Pos. 0-100 ECON2TST

E3.CL Economzr 3 Calibrate Cmd YES/NO ECON3 CAL E3C.A Humidifier Act. Ctrl. Ang. HUMDCANG HTC.C Ht.Coil Command Position 0-100 HTCLACTC HT.CL Heating Coil Act. Cal.Cmd YES/NO HCOILCAL HTC.A Heat Coil Act.Ctl.Angle HTCLCANG HMD.C Humidifier Command Pos. 0-100 HUMD_TST HM.CL Humidifier Act. Cal.Cmd YES/NO HUMIDCAL HMD.A Humidifier Act.Ctrl.Ang. HUMDCANG

SRCH SEARCH FOR SERIAL NUMBER

ACTV Belimo Serial Num Search YES/NO BELSERCH ECN.1 Economizer 1 Search EC1SERCH ECN.2 Economizer 2 Search EC2SERCH ECN.3 Economizer 3 Search EC3SERCH

HUMD Humidifier Valve Search UMSERCH HT.CL Heat Coil Valve Search HTCSERCH

HMZR TEST HUMIDIMIZER

RHV Humidimizer 3-Way Valve ON/OFF RHVH_TST C.EXV Condenser EXV Position 0-100 % CEXVHTST B.EXV Bypass EXV Position 0-100 % BEXVHTST C.CAL Condenser EXV Calibrate ON/OFF CEXV_CAL B.CAL Bypass EXV Calibrate ON/OFF BEXV_CAL

EXVS A1.EX Circuit A EXV 1 Position 0-100 A_X1_TST A2.EX Circuit A EXV 2 Position 0-100 A_X2_TST B1.EX Circuit B EXV 1 Position 0-100 B_X1_TST B2.EX Circuit B EXV 2 Position 0-100 B_X2_TST A1.CL Cir A EXV 1 Calibrate ON/OFF A_X1_CAL A2.CL Cir A EXV 2 Calibrate ON/OFF A_X2_CAL B1.CL Cir B EXV 1 Calibrate ON/OFF B_X1_CAL B2.CL Cir B EXV 2 Calibrate ON/OFF B_X2_CAL

COOL TEST COOLING

E.POS Econ 1 Out Act.Cmd.Pos. 0-100 % ECONCOOL SP.SP Static Pressure Setpoint 0-5 "H2O SPSPCTST CL.ST Requested Cool Stage 0-8 CLST_TST MLV Minimum Load Valve Relay ON/OFF MLV_TST A1 Compressor A1 Relay ON/OFF CMPA1TST A1.CP Compressor A1 Capacity 20-100 A1CAPTST A1.B1 Two Circuit Start A1,B1 ON/OFF CMPABTST A2 Compressor A2 Relay ON/OFF CMPA2TST A3 Compressor A3 Relay ON/OFF CMPA3TST

A4 Compressor A4 Relay ON/OFF CMPA4TST

B1 Compressor B1 Relay ON/OFF CMPB1TST B2 Compressor B2 Relay ON/OFF CMPB2TST B3 Compressor B3 Relay ON/OFF CMPB3TST

B4 Compressor B4 Relay ON/OFF CMPB4TST

RHV C.EXV Condenser EXV Position 0-100 % CEXVHTST B.EXV Bypass EXV Position 0-100 % BEXVHTST

TEST CIRCUIT EXVS

Humidimizer 3-Way Valve ON/OFF RHVH_TST

Table 23 — Service Test (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT WRITE STATUS

HEAT TEST HEATING

HT.ST Requested Heat Stage 0-15 HTST_TST HT.1 Heat Relay 1 ON/OFF HS1_TST

H1.CP Modulating Heat Capacity 0-100 % MGAS_TST

HT.2 Heat Relay 2 ON/OFF HS2_TST HT.3 Relay 3 W1 Gas Valve 2 ON/OFF HS3_TST HT.4 Relay 4 W2 Gas Valve 2 ON/OFF HS4_TST HT.5 Relay 5 W1 Gas Valve 3 ON/OFF HS5_TST HT.6 Relay 6 W2 Gas Valve 3 ON/OFF HS6_TST HT.7 Relay 7 W1 Gas Valve 4 ON/OFF HS7_TST HT.8 Relay 8 W2 Gas Valve 4 ON/OFF HS8_TST HT.9 Relay 9 W1 Gas Valve 5 ON/OFF HS9_TST HT.10 Relay 10 W2 Gas Valve 5 ON/OFF HS10_TST H.I.R Heat Interlock Relay ON/OFF HIR_TST RCL.R Heat Interlock Relay ON/OFF HIR_TST HTC.C Ht.Coil Command Position 0-100 % HTCLHEAT

AC.D T AUTO-COMPONENT DIAG TEST

CP.TS COMPRESSOR AUTO-TEST  CP.TR Run Compressor Auto-Test ON/OFF AC_CT

CT.ST Test Status & Timer DD_TEXT

 SP.A Cir A Suction Pressure SP_A  SP.B Cir B Suction Pressure SP_B RSLT COMPS. AUTO-TEST RESULTS  A1 Comp A1 Auto-Test Result AC_CP_A1  A2 Comp A2 Auto-Test Result AC_CP_A2  A3 Comp A3 Auto-Test Result AC_CP_A3  A4 Comp A4 Auto-Test Result AC_CP_A4  B1 Comp B1 Auto-Test Result AC_CP_B1  B2 Comp B2 Auto-Test Result AC_CP_B2  B3 Comp B3 Auto-Test Result AC_CP_B3  B4 Comp B4 Auto-Test Result AC_CP_B4

DS.TS DIG SCROLL AUTO-TEST

 DS.TR Run Dig Scroll Auto-Test ON/OFF AC_DS  DS.DT Test Status & Timer DD_TEXT  A1.CP Compressor A1 Capacity CMPA1CAP  SP.A Cir A Suction Pressure SP_A

SP.AV Avg Suction Pressure A SP_A_AVG DS.RS Dig Scroll AutoTest Stat AC_DSST EX.TS EXVS AUTO-COMPONENT TEST EX.TR Run EXVs Auto-Test ON/OFF AC_EX XT.ST Test Status & Timer DD_TEXT SH.SP EXV Superheat Ctrl SP SH_SP_CT SH.A1 Cir A EXV1 Superheat Tmp SH_A1 SH.A2 Cir A EXV2 Superheat Tmp SH_A2 SH.B1 Cir B EXV1 Superheat Tmp SH_B1 SH.B2 Cir B EXV2 Superheat Tmp SH_B2 XA1S EXV A1 Auto-Test Status AC_XA1ST XA2S EXV A2 Auto-Test Status AC_XA2ST XB1S EXV B1 Auto-Test Status AC_XB1ST XB2S EXV B2 Auto-Test Status AC_XB2ST CD.TS CHARGE TST W/O LQD SENS. CD.TR Run Chrg Tst w/o Lqd Sen ON/OFF AC_CDTR CD.ET Test Status & Timer DD_TEXT SCT.A Cir A Sat.Condensing Tmp SCTA SST.A Cir A Sat.Suction Temp. SSTA OAT Outside Air Temperature OAT SCT.B Cir A Sat.Condensing Tmp SCTA SST.B Cir A Sat.Suction Temp. SSTA CL.TS CHARGE TST W LQD SENSORS CL.TR Run Chrg Tst w/ Lqd Sen AC_CLTS CD.ET Test Status & Timer DD_TEXT SC.A Cir A Subcooling Temp. SC_A CS.CA Calc. Cir A Subcool Temp CSC_A CHG.A Cir A Over/Under Charge AC_CHG_A OAT Outside Air Temperature OAT SC.B Cir B Subcooling Temp. SC_B CS.CB Calc. Cir B Subcool Temp CSC_B CHG.B Cir B Over/Under Charge AC_CHG_B ML.TS MLV/HGBP AUTO-TEST ML.TR Run MLV/HGBP Auto-Test AC_MLV ML.TD Test Status & Timer DD_TEXT MLV Minimum Load Valve Relay ON/OFF MLV_TST DP.A Cir A Discharge Pressure DP_A ML.ST MLV/HGBP AutoTest Result AC_MLVST SF.TS SUPPLY FAN AUTO-TEST SF.TR Run Supply Fan Auto-Test ON/OFF AC_SF SF.DT Test Status & Timer DD_TEXT S.VFD VFD1 Actual Speed % VFD1_SPD S.PWR VFD1 Actual Motor Power VFD1PWR SP Static Pressure SP SF.ST SF Auto-Test Result AC_SF_ST

Actuators — In the AC.T.C sub-menu, it will be possible

to control and calibrate actuators. Calibration is a mode in which the actuator moves from 0% to the point at which the actuator stalls, and it will then use this angular travel range as its "control angle." It will also be possible to view the "control angle" adopted by the actuator after a calibration.

Within this sub-menu, the user may calibrate and control the three economizer actuators (2 outdoor air and 1 return air), hydronic/steam or humidifier actuators.

NOTE: Once a calibration has been started, the user cannot exit test mode or select any other test mode operation until complete.

Humidi-Mizer® System — In the Humidi-MiZer

(HMZR) sub-menu, it will be possible to control and calibrate the Humidi-MiZer modulating valves (gas bypass and condenser) while the unit's compressors are OFF. Calibration is a mode in which the unit software will first over-drive each valve completely shut and to establish the "zero" open position. The controller then keeps track of the valve's position for normal operation. During this calibration phase, a light ratcheting sound may be heard and will serve as proof of valve operation and closure. Note that the calibration feature in Service Test is only provided as an additional troubleshooting tool. This is to ensure that the valve will automatically go through the calibration process anytime the unit is powered down, unit power is cycled, or anytime there is a loss of communication between the EXV board and the valve. There should be no need to manually calibrate the valves under normal circumstances.

This sub-menu also allows manual manipulation of RHV (reheat 3-way valve), the bypass valve, and condenser valve. With the compressors and outdoor fans off, the user should hear a light ratcheting sound during movement of the two modulating valves. The sound can serve as proof of valve operation.

Service Test

— On Humidi-MiZer equipped units, this item allows the user to switch the reheat valve from ON to OFF or OFF to ON when compressors are in the OFF position. When RHV is switched to the ON position, the three-way valve will be energized. When RHV is switched to the OFF position, the threeway valve will be deenergized. To exercise this valve with a Circuit B compressor commanded ON, go to (Service Test COOLRHV). To view the actual valve position at any time, the user can use the Outputs menu (Outputs

Service Test

Position) — On Humidi-MiZer equipped units, this item allows the user to exercise the valve that controls flow to the Circuit B condenser. The valve default position is 100% (completely open). The user will be able to adjust the valve from 0 to 100% through this function. As confirmation that the valve is operational, the user should hear a light ratcheting sound as the valve opens and closes. Note that this function is only operational when Circuit B compressors are OFF. To exercise this valve with a Circuit B compressor commanded ON, go to (Service Test position at any time, the user can use the Outputs menu (Out-

puts



Service Test

Position) — On Humidi-MiZer equipped units, this item allows the user to exercise the valve that controls discharge gas bypass around the Circuit B condenser. The valve default position is 0% (completely closed). The user will be able to adjust the valve from 0 to 100% through this function. As confirmation that the valve is operational, the user should hear a light ratcheting sound as the valve opens and closes. Note that this function is only operational when Circuit B compressors are OFF. To exercise this valve when a Circuit B compressor is ON, go to (Service Test



HMZRRHV (Humidi-MiZer 3-Way Valve)



HMZRC.EXV (HMV-1: Condenser EXV



COOLC.EXV). To view the actual valve

COOLC.EXV).



HMZRB.EXV (HMV-2: Bypass EXV



COOLRHV).



COOLB.EXV). To view the



actual valve position at any time, the user can use the Outputs menu (Outputs

Service Test

— On Humidi-Mizer configured units, this item allows the user to calibrate the valve that controls flow to the Circuit B condenser. Switching C.CAL to ON will instruct the unit software to over-drive the valve in the closing direction. This is to ensure that the valve is completely shut and to establish the "zero" open position. The controller then keeps track of the valve's position for normal operation. During this calibration phase, a light ratcheting sound may be heard and will serve as proof of valve operation and closure. Note that the calibration feature in Service Test is only provided as an additional troubleshooting tool. The valves will automatically go through the calibration process anytime the unit is powered down, unit power is cycled, or anytime there is a loss of communication between the EXV board and the valve. There should be no need to manually calibrate the valves under normal circumstances.

Service Test

On Humidi-Mizer configured units, this item allows the user to calibrate the valve that controls discharge gas bypass around the Circuit B condenser. Switching B.CAL to ON will instruct the unit software to over-drive the valve in the closing direction. This is to assure that the valve is completely shut and to establish the "zero" open position. The controller then keeps track of the valve's position for normal operation. During this calibration phase, a light ratcheting sound may be heard and will serve as proof of valve operation and closure. Note that the calibration feature in Service Test is only provided as an additional troubleshooting tool. The valves will automatically go through the calibration process anytime the unit is powered down, unit power is cycled, or anytime there is a loss of communication between the EXV board and the valve. There should be no need to manually calibrate the valves under normal circumstances.



COOLB.EXV).



HMZRC.CAL (Condenser EXV Calibrate)



HMZRB.CAL (Bypass EXV Calibrate) —

Cooling — The cooling sub-menu offers many different

service tests.

• Service Test Pos). It is possible to manually move the actuator during the cooling test mode at all times, regardless if economizer cooling is suitable or not.

• Service Test Point). Upon entering the cooling sub-menu, the static pressure control item will default to the unit's static pressure set point. Thereafter, as mechanical cooling commences and the fan starts, the static pressure can be manually adjusted during the cool mode without affecting the configured set point for normal runtime operation. By adjusting the static pressure set point, the user can increase or decrease the supply airflow. Do not use a static pressure that will exceed the system limits.

• Service Test If this item is set to a non-zero value, the current assigned compression stage for this unit will be selected and enacted. Thereafter, the individual compressor will be “read-only” and reflect the current staging state. In addition, this item will automatically clamp the cooling stages to its pre-configured maximum.

• Manual relay control of individual compressors. If the cooling stage pattern request is set to zero, the user will have the ability to manually control compressors. If the user energizes mechanical cooling, the supply fan and the outdoor fans will be started automatically. During mechanical cooling, the unit will protect itself. Compressor diagnostics are active, monitoring for high discharge pressure, low suction pressure, etc. The user can also turn the minimum load valve on and off and set the digital scroll capacity (on units equipped with this device).



CoolE.POS (Econo Damper Command



COOLSP.SP (Static Pressure Set



COOLCL.ST (Requested Cool Stage).

• Service Test Valve). On Humidi-MiZer equipped units, this item allows the user to switch the reheat valve from ON to OFF and vice versa. When RHV is switched to the ON position, a three-way valve will be energized allowing refrigerant flow to enter the reheat coil as if in a dehumidification mode or reheat mode. When RHV is switched to the OFF position, the three-way valve will be deenergized and the unit will revert back to normal cooling. Note that this function only allows manipulation of RHV if a compressor on Circuit B has already been turned ON. To manually exercise this valve without an active Circuit B compressor, see the section titled Ser-

vice Test

tion at any time, the user can use the Outputs menu (Outputs

• Service Test EXV Position). On Humidi-MiZer equipped units, this item allows the user to exercise the valve that controls refrigerant flow to the Circuit B condenser. To exercise the valve, RHV must first be switched to ON (Service

Te st



be commanded ON. The valve default position is 100% (completely open). The user will be able to adjust the valve from 0 to 100% through this function. The only constraint on the valve position is that the percentage sum of the bypass valve (Service Test B.EXV) and condenser valve must equal 100%. For example, if the condenser modulating valve is only 80% open, then the gas bypass modulating valve must remain at least 20% open. The effect of closing the condenser valve will be to increase the supply-air temperature (additional reheat capacity). To view the actual valve position at any time, the user can use the Outputs menu (Outputs

• Service TestCOOLB.EXV (HMV-2: Bypass EXV Position). On Humidi-MiZer equipped units, this item allows the user to exercise the valve that controls discharge gas bypass around the Circuit B condenser. To exercise the valve, RHV must first be switched to ON

(Service Test

sor must be commanded ON. The valve default position is 0% (completely closed). The user will be able to adjust the valve from 0 to 100% through this function. The only constraint on the valve position is that the percentage sum of the bypass valve and condenser valve (Service

Te st



if the condenser modulating valve is only 80% open, then the gas bypass modulating valve must remain at least 20% open. The effect of opening the bypass valve will be to increase the supply air temperature (additional reheat capacity). To view the actual valve position at any time, the user can use the Outputs menu (Outputs COOLB.EXV).



COOLRHV (Humidi-MiZer 3-Way



HMZRRHV. To view the actual valve posi-



COOLRHV).



COOLC.EXV (HMV-1: Condenser

COOLRHV) and a Circuit B compressor must



COOL



COOLC.EXV).



COOLRHV) and a Circuit B compres-

COOLC.EXV) must equal 100%. For example,



Heating — The Heat Test Mode sub-menu will offer auto-

matic fan start-up if not a gas-fired heat unit. On gas heat units, the IGC (integrated gas controller) feedback from the gas control units will bring the fan on as required.

Within this sub-menu, control of the following is possible:

• Service Test When this item is non-zero, the currently configured heat type will energize the corresponding heat relay pattern that reflects the requested stage. In addition the upper limit will be clamped to reflect the maximum configured number of stages. When non-zero, the heat relays will be “read-only” and reflect the currently selected pattern.

• Service Test HEATHIR (Manual Heat Relay Control). If the “Heat Stage Request” item is set to zero, it will be possible to



HEATHT.ST (Requested Heat Stage).



HEATHT.1-10, Service Test



individually control the heat relays, including the heat interlock relay.

• Service Test ity). If configured for modulating gas or SCR electric heat, the user will be able to manually control the capacity of the modulating heat section (0 to 100%). The requested heat stage must be greater than or equal to 1 or heat relay 1 must be on before the control will accept a modulating heat capacity request. If neither case is true, the control will overwrite the modulating heat request back to 0%.

• Service Test tion). If configured for hydronic heat type, the user will be able to manually control the positioning of the actuator which controls hot water (0 to 100%).



HEATH1.CP (Modulating Heat Capac-



HEATHTC.C (Ht Coil Command Posi-

SERVICE COMPONENT TESTS

Auto-component testing is the automated testing procedures

of a component or a group of components. Auto-component testing can be used during commissioning of a unit to verify that components are functioning properly. It can also be used as a diagnostics routine for troubleshooting.

Control Description (Overview) — The 40/50N Se-

ries large rooftop unit is capable of performing auto-component tests. The auto-component tests appear in Navigator under the Service Test menu (Service Test

CP.TS Compressor Auto-Test DS.TS Dig Scroll Auto-Test EX.TS EXVS Auto-Component Test CD.TS Charge Tst without Lqd Sens. CL.TS Charge Tst with Lqd Sensors ML.TS MLV/HGBP Auto-Test SF.TS Supply Fan Auto-Test RSLT Comps Auto-Test Results

The unit must be in Service Test mode to perform the auto-

component tests (Service Test

Starting another test before a currently running test has

completed will cancel the running test and reset all outputs before starting the newly requested test.

Setting Service Test mode to "OFF" while running an auto-

component test will cancel the running test and reset all outputs.

For a complete description of notices, alerts and alarms ref-

erenced, see the Alarms and Alerts section.

Auto-component tests will have a status indicated by the

following:

1. Not Run

2. Running

3. Pass

4. Fail The results of all auto-component tests will default to "NOT

RUN."

After power cycling the MBB, the results of all auto-com-

ponent tests will default to "NOT RUN."

If the required conditions for the test are not met, the test

will not be allowed to run. Note that there may be no indication for the possible reasons why a test might not run.

For each auto-component test, if the verification criteria is

met, test status will display 'PASS,' if the verification criteria is not met, test status will display 'FAIL.'



AC.DT):



TESTON).

For each auto-component test, the following information is grouped in one screen: test status, component status, and values of response parameters.

Auto-Component Test Control Descriptions —

following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. No compressors are on or requested on.

3. All compressors are available for staging. The testing screen will display the following:

The compressor auto-component test functions by staging

all compressors ON and verifying a corresponding change in the compressor CSB (compressor status board) and that circuit suction pressure (SP.A/SP.B) decreases at least AC_SP_DR. AC_SP_DR (Auto-Component Suction Pressure Drop) is the expected suction pressure drop when starting a compressor. It is used during the compressor auto component test. When a compressor is staged, the control verifies the suction pressure drops by AC_SP_DR. The default value is 3, with a range of 0 to 10 psig.

Setting CP.TS=ON will perform the following automati-

cally:

1. Turn supply fan and required condenser fans ON.

2. After 25 seconds, stage up one compressor.

3. Verify CSB changes state properly.

4. Verify circuit SP decreases by AC_SP_DR within 30 sec-

5. Wait 30 seconds.

6. Repeat Steps 1-5 for next compressor until all compres-

7. Stage all compressors down and verify CSB changes

8. End test. If a compressor is commanded ON and the corresponding

CSB indicates OFF, a "Compressor Failure" alert will be logged:

If a compressor is commanded ON and the corresponding

CSB indicates ON while a decrease in suction pressure is not detected, the "Suction Pressure Alert" will be logged:

The compressor auto-component test requires the

CP.TS ON Run Compressor Auto-Test CT.ST Staging 1/8 Test Status and Timer SP.A 188.5 psig Cir A Suction Pressure SP.B 207.3 psig Cir B Suction Pressure RSLT Comps Auto-Test Results

onds.

sors are staged ON.

state properly.

T051 Circuit A, Compressor 1 Failure T052 Circuit A, Compressor 2 Failure T053 Circuit A, Compressor 3 Failure T059 Circuit A, Compressor 4 Failure T054 Circuit B, Compressor 1 Failure T055 Circuit B, Compressor 2 Failure T056 Circuit B, Compressor 3 Failure T060 Circuit B, Compressor 4 Failure

T062 Circuit A, Suction Pressure Alert T063 Circuit B, Suction Pressure Alert

If a compressor is commanded OFF and the corresponding CSB indicates ON, a "Compressor Stuck" alarm will be logged:

A051 Circuit A, Compressor 1 Stuck On Failure A052 Circuit A, Compressor 2 Stuck On Failure A053 Circuit A, Compressor 3 Stuck On Failure A059 Circuit A, Compressor 4 Stuck On Failure A054 Circuit B, Compressor 1 Stuck On Failure A055 Circuit B, Compressor 2 Stuck On Failure A056 Circuit B, Compressor 3 Stuck On Failure A061 Circuit B, Compressor 4 Stuck On Failure

Selecting "RSLT" from the compressor auto-test screen will display the compressor auto-test result screen. The following display is an example where the A2 compressor failed the test:

A1 Passed Comp A1 Auto-Test Result A2 Failed Comp A2 Auto-Test Result A3 Passed Comp A3 Auto-Test Result A4 Passed Comp A4 Auto-Test Result B1 Passed Comp B1 Auto-Test Result B2 Passed Comp B2 Auto-Test Result B3 Passed Comp B3 Auto-Test Result B4 Passed Comp B4 Auto-Test Result

Digital Scroll Compressor (A1) Auto-Component Test — The digital scroll auto-component test re-

quires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. DG.A1=YES (digital scroll compressor installed on A1 and enabled).

3. OAT<DSMAXOAT (digital scroll maximum OAT).

4. No compressors are on or requested on.

5. Compressor A1 is available to start.

The testing screen will display the following:

DS.TR ON Run Dig Scroll Auto-Test DS.DT Running 1/1 Test Status and Timer A1.CP 50% Compressor A1 Capacity SP.A 188.5 psig Cir A Suction Pressure SP.AV 185.5 psig Avg Suction Pressure A DS.ST Running Dig Scroll AutoTest Stat

The digital scroll auto-component test functions by running the scroll compressor (A1.CP) at 50% and 100% while verifying a change in average circuit suction pressure (SP.AV) of AC_DS_SP.

The digital scroll auto-component suction pressure drop (AC_DS_SP) will default to 2.5 psig with a range of 0 to 10 psig.

Setting DS.TS=ON will perform the following:

1. Turn supply fan and condenser fans ON.

2. Wait for 25 seconds.

3. Set digital scroll capacity to 50%.

4. Verify circuit SP.AV decreases by AC_DS_SP within 30 seconds.

5. Wait 2 minutes.

6. Set digital scroll capacity to 100%.

7. Verify circuit SP.AV decreases AC_DS_SP within 30 sec- onds.

8. End test.

If SP.AV is verified to change properly at 50% and 100%

capacity, then DS.ST= PASS, otherwise DS.ST=FAIL.

EXV Auto-Component Test — The EXV auto-com-

ponent test requires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. OAT>70 F.

3. No compressors are on or requested on.

4. A1, B1, and B2 are available on a 75-ton unit, A1, A2, B1, B2 are available on 90, 105, 120, 130, and 150-ton units.

The testing screen will display the following:

EX.TR ON Run EXVs Auto-Test XT.ST Running

CMPS

SH.SP 12.0 dF EXV Superheat Ctrl SP SH.A1 11.7 dF Cir A EXV1 Superheat Temp SH.A2 12.4 dF Cir A EXV2 Superheat Temp SH.B1 12.4 dF Cir B EXV1 Superheat Temp SH.B2 12.1 dF Cir B EXV2 Superheat Temp XA1S Running EXV A1 Auto-Test Status XA2S Running EXV A2 Auto-Test Status XB1S Running EXV B1 Auto-Test Status XB2S Running EXV B2 Auto-Test Status

The EXV auto-component test functions by staging compressor A1, B1, and B2 for a 75-ton unit and A1, A2, B1, B2 for other units, and verifying the superheat is within ± AC_SH_DB (auto-component test superheat deadband) of the superheat setpoint (SH.SP).

The auto-component test superheat deadband (AC_SH_DB) will default to 2 F with a range of 0° to 10 F.

Setting XA.TS=ON will perform the following:

1. Stage compressors A1/B1/B2 for 75-ton unit, A1/A2/B1/ B2 for other units.

2. Allow compressors to run for 5 minutes

3. Verify that SH.A1, SH.A2, SH.B1, and SH.B2 have stabilized to SH.SP ± AC_SH_DB. If all four superheats are SH.SP ± AC_SH_DB then set PASS status and end test.

4. If any superheat is outside SH.SP ± AC_SH_DB, allow compressors to run for 5 more minutes

5. Set PASS/FAIL status according to whether each superheat has stabilized to SH.SP ± AC_SH_DB and end test

If SH.SP ± AC_SH_DB then XA.ST= PASS, otherwise

XA.ST=FAIL.

If the EXV superheat is not within SH.SP ± SH.DB, the su-

perheat alert will be logged:

T064 EXV A1 Superheat Outside Range T065 EXV A2 Superheat Outside Range T066 EXV B1 Superheat Outside Range T067 EXV B2 Superheat Outside Range

Test Status and Timer

Refrigerant Charge Auto-Test (without Liquid Sensors) —

sensors requires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. OAT>70 F.

3. No compressors are on or requested on.

4. All compressors are available for staging.

The refrigerant charge auto test without liquid

The test screen will display the following:

CD.TS ON Run Chrg Test without Lqd Sen CD.ET Running Test Status and Timer SCT.A 105.3 F Cir A Sat. Condensing Temp SST.A 50.4 F Cir A Sat. Suction Temp OAT 66.3 F Outside Air Temp SCT.B 106.5 F Cir A Sat. Condensing Temp SST.B 49.8 F Cir A Sat. Suction Temp

When no liquid sensors are installed, all compressors and outdoor fans of both circuit A and B are commanded to be ON. The operator will read OAT, SCT.A, and SST.A, in order to then compare the values to the A charging chart to determine if refrigerant in circuit A is properly charged. The operator reads OAT, SCT.B, and SST.B, in order to then compare the values to the B charging chart to determine if refrigerant in Circuit B is properly charged. Thus this is a semi-auto test because the operator intervention is required to determine the test results. No test results are displayed.

Setting CT.ST=ON will perform the following:

1. Command supply fan ON.

2. Command all A and B Circuit outdoor fans ON.

3. Stage all A and B Circuit compressors ON.

4. Let compressors run 5 minutes.

5. Prompt user to read charging charts

6. Let compressors run 5 minutes.

7. End test.

Refrigerant Charge Auto Test (with Liquid Sensors) — The refrigerant charge auto test with liquid

sensors requires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. Liquid sensors installed and enabled.

3. OAT>75 F.

4. No compressors are on or requested on.

5. All compressors are available for staging.

6. Calculated subcooling both circuit A and B is < -1.5.

7. SST.A and SST.B > AC_SST_M. The test screen will display the following:

CL.TS ON Run Chrg Tst with Lqd Sen CD.ET Running Test Status and Timer SC.A –10.3 dF Cir A Subcooling Temp CS.CA –6.2 dF Calc Cir A Subcooling Temp CHG.A 0.5 lb Cir A Over/Under Charge OAT 80.3 F Outside Air Temp SC.B –10.6 dF Cir B Subcooling Temp CS.CB –6.6 dF Calc Cir B Subcool Temp CHG.B –1.3 lb Cir B Over/Under Charge

All compressors and outdoor fans of circuits A and B are

commanded to ON. OAT and subcooling (SC.A) will then be used by the algorithm as described in the steps below to determine the refrigerant charge level.

AC_SST_M (Auto-Component Minimum SST) is the mini-

mum SST read during a charge determination test. If at any time during the test, SST.A or SST.B is less than AC_SST_M, then the test shall be cancelled. AC_SST_M shall default to 40 and have a range of 20 to 100.

Setting CT.ST=ON will perform the following:

1. Command supply fan ON.

2. Command all A and B circuit outdoor fans ON.

3. Stage all A and B circuit compressors ON.

Fig. 3 — Plot A: OAT vs Subcooling

a48-8785

-1

-6

-4

-2

02 4

Charge (lb)

Delta Subcooling (F)

Poly. (A)

Poly. (B)

y = 0.0137x2 + 0.4519x + 0.0036

= 0.9996

y = 0.0221x2 + 0.5284x - 0.0072

= 0.9995

-2

-3

Fig. 4 — Plot B: Delta Subcooling vs Charge

a48-

4. Wait 5 minutes.

5. Calculate CHG.A (0 lb indicates proper charge, 0.5 lb in- dicates 0.5 lb of over charge, and -0.5 lb indicates 0.5 lb of under charge) as follows:

a. Calculate subcooling (CS.CA) as function of OAT

according to curve fit in plot A, Fig. 3. b. SC_Delta =CS.CA - SC.A. c. CHG.A = function (SC_Delta) according to plot B,

Fig. 4.

6. Calculate CHG.B as follows: a. Calculate subcooling (CS.CA) as function of OAT

according to curve fit in plot A. b. SC_Delta = CS.CB - SC.B. c. CHG.B = function (SC_Delta) according to plot B.

7. End test.

NOTE: Charge level will be used as a guideline only.

A charge of -99.9 indicates the charge has not been deter-

mined.

The charge auto-component test uses the following configu-

rable parameters:

LOW

NAME DESCRIPTION DEFAULT

AC_SST_M Min Charge SST 40 20 100 AC_CH_LO Lo Charge Alert Cutoff –3 –10 0 AC_CH_HI Hi Charge Alert Cutoff 1 0 10

LIMIT

HIGH

LIMIT

If CHG.A / CHG.B<AC_CH_LO, or CHG.A / CHG.B >

AC_CH_HI, one of the following alerts will be logged:

T112 Low Circuit A Charge Detected T113 Low Circuit B Charge Detected T114 High Circuit A Charge Detected T115 High Circuit B Charge Detected

-5

-10

-15

-20

Subcooling (F)

-25

-30

-35 70

y = -0.0013x2 - 0.27x + 16.159

Outdoor Air Temperature (F)

= 0.9875

90 100

110 120

Avg

Poly. (Avg)

Filter Drier Auto-Component Test — The filter

drier auto-component test requires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. Liquid sensors installed and enabled.

3. OAT>70 F.

4. No compressors are on or requested on.

5. All compressors are available for staging. Test screen will display the following:

FD.TS ON FD.ET Running DP.A 331.3 psig LP.A 325.6 psig DP.AP 5.9 psig DP.B 331.3 psig LP.B 325.6 psig DP.BP 5.9 psig FDA.S Running FDB.S Running

This test assumes the charge determination test has been run

successfully. If the charge is low or high, the results of this test will not be valid.

The filter drier auto-component test functions by staging all

compressors and verifying the discharge pressure minus liquid pressure does not exceed the calculated condenser pressure drop by ± AC_FD_DP psig. AC_FD_DP (Auto-component Filter Drier Differential Pressure) is the filter drier auto-component test by staging all compressors and verifying the discharge pressure minus liquid pressure does not exceed the calculated condenser pressure drop by + AC_FD_DP psig. The calculated condenser pressure drop shall be calculated as a function of OAT according to curve fit in plot C, Fig. 5. AC_FD_DP shall have a default value of 20 psig with a range of 10 to 50 psig.

Setting FD.TS=ON will perform the following:

1. Command supply fan ON.

2. Command all outdoor fans ON.

3. Stage all compressors ON.

4. Let compressors run 5 minutes.

5. Verify DP.A - LP.A is within calculated condenser pres-

sure drop ± AC_FD_DP; set FDA.S = PASS, otherwise set FDA.S = FAIL

6. Verify DP.B - LP.B is within calculated condenser pres-

sure drop ± AC_FD_DP; set FDB.S=PASS, otherwise set FDB.S=FAIL

7. End Test. If FDA/B.S is 'FAIL,' the filter drier alert will be logged:

A130 Circuit A Filter Drier Alert A131 Circuit B Filter Drier Alert

Minimum Load Valve (MLV) Auto-Component

110

130

Delta Pressure (psi)

Outdoor Air Temperature (F)

∆P cond A

Poly. (∆P cond A)

∆P cond B

Poly. (∆P cond B)

y = 0.0003x3 + 0.0985x2 - 10.336x + 389.27

= 0.997

y = 0.0003x3 + 0.098x2 - 10.176x + 378.29

= 0.9958

Fig. 5 — Plot C: OAT vs Delta Condenser Pressure

a48-8787

Test —

pass valve (HGBV).

ing conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. MLV=ENBL.

3. No compressors are on or requested on.

4. Compressor A1 is available to start.

discharge pressure when MLV is closed to that when MLV is open, and verifying DP.A decreases by at least AC_MLVDR.

default to 5 psig with a range of 0 to 10 psig.

1. Command A1 ON and MLV OFF.

2. Let circuit stabilize for 5 minutes and save DP.A

3. Command MLV ON.

4. Let circuit stabilize for 5 minutes and record DP.A

5. Verify DP.A (recorded) - DP.A (current) > AC_MLVDR.

6. End test.

ML.ST=PASS, otherwise ML.ST=FAIL.

Minimum load valve is also referred to as hot gas by-

The hot gas bypass auto-component test requires the follow-

The test screen will display the following:

ML.TS No Run MLV/HGBO Auto-Test ML.DT Running 1/1 Test Status and Timer MLV Off Minimum Load Valve Relay DP.A 331.3 psig Cir A Discharge Pressure ML.ST Running MLV/HGBP AutoTest Result

The MLV auto-component test functions by comparing the

The auto-component MLV deadband (AC_MLVDR) will

Setting T. ML V=ON will perform the following:

(recorded).

(current)

If DP.A (recorded) - DP.A (current) > AC_MLVDR then

Supply Fan Auto-Component Test — The supply

fan auto-component test requires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. Supply fan VFD not in bypass mode.

3. Power exhaust or return fan (if enabled) not in bypass mode.

4. Supply fan not on.

The test screen will display this:

SF.TS No Run Supply Fan Auto-Test SF.DT Running Test Status and Timer S.VFD 0% VFD1 Actual Speed % S.PWR 0.00 kW VFD1 Actual Motor Power SP 0.00˝ H20 Static Pressure SF.ST Pass SF Auto-Test Result

The supply fan auto-component test functions by commanding the supply fan to minimum speed (STATPMIN), and verifying that VFD power (S.PWR) and duct static pressure (SP) is increasing.

Setting SF.TS=ON will perform the following:

1. Record S.PWR and SP.

2. Command S.VFD to STATPMIN and let run 5 minutes.

3. Verify S.PWR increases.

4. If SP.CF=ENBL and SP.S=ENBL, verify SP increases.

5. End test. After letting the supply fan run and stabilize for 5 minutes,

the control will verify S.PWR has increased and SP (if enabled) has increased.

If both S.PWR and SP (if enabled) have increased,

SF.ST=PASS, otherwise SF.ST=FAIL.

Power Exhaust Fan Auto-Component Test —

The power exhaust fan auto-component test requires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. Supply fan VFD not in bypass mode.

3. Power exhaust fan VFD not in bypass mode.

4. BP.CF=VFD PWR EXH (Building pressure is controlled

by exhaust fan).

5. Supply fan not on.

6. Power exhaust not on. Test screen will display the following:

PE.TS Off PE.DT Running Fans S.VFD 0% E.VFD 0% E.PWR 0.00 kW BP 0.00 H20 BPSP 0.05 H20 PE.ST Not Run

The power exhaust fan auto-component test functions by

commanding the supply fan to minimum speed (STATPMIN) and verifying that exhaust VFD speed (E.VFD) and power (E.PWR) increase while building pressure (BP) is modulated to within ± AC_PE_DB of BPSP. AC_PE_DB will have a de- fault value of 0.02 in. wg and a range of 0 to 0.25 in. wg.

Setting (PE.TS) =ON will perform the following:

1. Record E.PWR and E.VFD.

2. Command S.VFD to STATPMIN.

3. Open economizer to ECONOMIN.

4. Allow building pressure task to modulate E.VFD and let

run 5 minutes.

5. Verify E.VFD increases.

6. Verify E.PWR increases.

7. Verify BP within BPSP ± AC_PE_DB.

8. End test.

After letting the power exhaust run and stabilize for 5 min-

Fig. 6 — Plot D: SCT MAX vs OAT

a48-8788

utes, the control will verify E.PWR has increased and BP is within BPSP ± AC_PE_DB.

If E.PWR has increased and BP is within BPSP ±

AC_PE_DB, PF.ST=PASS, otherwise SF.ST=FAIL.

Return Fan Auto-Component Test — The return

fan auto-component test requires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. Supply fan VFD not in bypass mode.

3. Return fan VFD not in bypass mode.

4. BP.CF=FAN TRACKING (Building pressure controlled by keeping a constant difference between supply airflow and return airflow).

5. Supply fan not on.

6. Power exhaust not on.

Test screen will display the following:

RF.TS OFF RF.DT Running S.VFD 0% R.VFD 0% R.PWR 0.00 kW D.CFM 0 cfm BP 0.00 H20 RF.TS Fail

The return fan auto-component test will function by commanding the supply fan to minimum speed (STATPMIN), and verifying that return VFD power (R.PWR) is increasing and building pressure (BP) is decreasing.

Setting RF.TS=ON will perform the following:

1. Record R.PWR, D.CFM, and BP.

2. Command S.VFD to STATPMIN.

3. Open economizer to ECONOMIN.

4. Allow building pressure task to modulate R.VFD and let run 5 minutes.

5. Verify R.PWR increases.

6. Verify D.CFM increases

7. Verify BP increases.

8. End test.

After letting the return fan run and stabilize for 5 minutes, the control will verify R.PWR has increased and BP has changed.

If R.PWR has increased and BP has changed, RF.ST=PASS, otherwise RF.ST=FAIL.

Condenser Fans (Outdoor Fans) Auto-Component Test —

quires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. OAT>70 F.

3. No compressors are on or requested on.

4. All compressors are available for staging. Test screen will display the following:

CF.TS ON SCT.A 105.3 F SCA.H 115.0 F SCT.B 108.3 F SCB.H 117.0 F OAT 76.3 F CF.ST Running

The condenser fans auto-component test re-

The condenser fans auto-component test functions by commanding to ON all compressors and outdoor fans and verify that Saturated Condensate Temperature (SCT) is less than the calculated SCA.H and SCB.H for the corresponding circuit. SCA.H and SCB.H depend on OAT and are different for each unit size and circuit, see Plot D, Fig. 6.

Setting CF.TS=ON will perform the following:

1. Command supply fan ON.

2. Command all condenser fans ON.

3. Stage all compressors ON.

4. Let compressors run for 5 minutes.

5. Verify SCT.A < SCA.H and SCT.B <SCB.H.

6. End test. After letting the condenser fans run and stabilize for 5 min-

utes, the control will verify SCT.A<SCA.H and SCT.B < SCB.H.

If SCT.A<SCA.H and SCT.B<SCB.H, CF.ST=PASS, oth-

erwise CF.ST=FAIL.

150

140

y = 0.0057x

130

120

110

SCT MAX (F)

100

+ 2.0025x2 - 13.752

= 0.9918

Outdoor Air Temperature (F)

100

SCTA

SCTB

Avg

Poly. (Avg)

120

Economizer Auto-Component Test — The econo-

mizer auto-component test requires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. EC.EN=YES (Economizer is enabled).

3. ABS (OAT-RAT)>10 F. (There is at least 10F difference

between OAT and RAT).

4. Supply fan VFD not in bypass mode.

5. Power exhaust or return fan (if enabled) not in bypass

mode.

6. Supply fan not on. Test screen will display the following:

EC.TS ON S.VFD 20.0 % E.POS 100.0 % O.CFM 4000 cfm OAT 65 F RAT 75 F SAT 65 F MAT 65 F EC.ST Running

The economizer auto-component test will verify economiz-

er operation at the 0% and 100% position. It will perform this test by commanding the supply fan to minimum speed (STATPMIN), modulating the economizer position, and veri- fying SAT changes to within the auto-component test economizer deadband (AC_EC_DB) of OAT and RAT. AC_EC_DB will default to 4 F with a range of 0 to 10 F.

Setting EC.TS=ON will perform the following:

1. Command S.VFD to STATPMIN.

2. Open E.POS to 100% and let run 5 minutes.

3. Verify SAT=OAT ± AC_EC_DB.

4. Close E.POS to 0% and let run 5 minutes.

5. Verify SAT=RAT ± AC_EC_DB.

6. End test. If SAT=OAT ± AC_EC_DB when E.POS=100% and

SAT=RAT ± AC_EC_DB when E.POS=0%, EC.ST=PASS, otherwise EC.ST=FAIL.

Humidi-MiZer Auto-Component Test — The Hu-

midi-MiZer auto-component test requires the following conditions:

1. Unit is not shut down due to failure (A152).

2. D.SEL=DH - HUMDZR (Humidi-MiZer system is con-

figured to perform dehumidification).

3. No compressors are on or requested on.

4. Compressor A1 is available to start. Test screen will display the following:

HZ.TS ON RHV OFF C.EXV 100% B.EXV 0% EDT 55 F SAT 55 F HZ.ST Running

The Humidi-MiZer auto-component test will verify Hu-

midi-MiZer operation in cooling, subcooling and reheat modes. It will perform this test by commanding compressor B1 ON, adjusting RHV (3-way reheat valve), C.EXV (condenser modulating valve) and B.EXV ( bypass modulating valve), and comparing SAT to EDT (evaporator discharge temperature).

Setting HZ.TS=ON will perform the following:

1. Command compressor B1, supply fan, and condenser

fans ON.

2. Run cooling mode by setting RHV=OFF, C.EXV=100%,

B.EXV=0%.

3. Allow to run for 5 minutes and verify SAT=>EDT. Re-

cord SAT and EDT.

4. Run subcooling mode by setting RHV=ON,

C.EXV=100%, B.EXV=0%.

5. Allow to run for 5 minutes and verify EDT is less than the

value recorded in Step 3 and SAT - EDT > 2 F.

6. Run reheat mode by setting RHV=ON, C.EXV=0%,

B.EXV=100%.

7. Allow to run for 5 minutes and verify SAT-EDT>5 F.

8. End test. If all SAT/EDT comparisons are verified, HZ.ST=PASS,

otherwise HZ.ST=FAIL.

THIRD PARTY CONTROL

Thermostat —

the thermostat inputs:

Y1 = first stage cooling Y1 and Y2 = first and second stage cooling W1 = first stage heating W1 and W2 = first and second stage heating G = supply fan

The method of control would be through

Alarm Output — The alarm output is 24-v at TB201-X

and TB201-C. The contact will provide relay closure whenever the unit is under an alert or alarm condition (5 va maximum).

Remote Switch — The remote switch may be configured

for three different functions. Under Configuration RM.CF to one of the following:

0 = no remote switch 1 = occupied/unoccupied switch 2 = start/stop switch 3 = occupancy override switch

Under Configuration occupancy switch can be set to either a normally open or normally closed switch input. Normal is defined as either unoccupied, start or “not currently overridden,” respective to the RM.CF configuration.

With RM.CF set to 1, no time schedules are followed and the unit follows the remote switch only in determining the state of occupancy.

With RM.CF set to 2, the remote switch can be used to shut down and disable the unit, while still honoring timeguards on compressors. Time schedules, internal or external, may be run simultaneously with this configuration.

With RM.CF set to 3, the remote input may override an unoccupied state and force the control to go occupied mode. As with the start/stop configuration, an internal or external time schedule may continue to control occupancy when the switch is not in effect.



IAQSW.LG, RMI.L, the remote



UNIT, set

VFD Control — Supply duct static pressure control of the

VFD driving the supply fan may be left under unit control or be externally controlled. To control the VFD externally with a 4 to 20 mA signal, set SP.RS to 4 (VFD CONTROL), under the

Configuration

trol. When SP.RS = VFD CONTROL, the static pressure reset function acts to provide direct VFD speed control where 4 mA = 0% speed and 20 mA = 100% (SP.MN and SP.MX will over- ride). Note that SP.CF must be set to 1 (ENABLE) prior to configuring SP.RS = VFD CONTROL. Failure to do so could result in damage to ductwork due to overpressurization.

In effect, this represents a speed control signal "pass through" under normal operating circumstances. The Com- fortLink controller overrides the third party signal for critical operation situations, most notably smoke and fire control.

Wire the input to the controls expansion module (CEM) using TB202-6 and TB202-7. An optional CEM board is required.

See Appendix D and the VFD literature supplied with the unit for further information on the VFD.



SP menu. This will set the reset to VFD con-

Supply Air Reset — With the installation of the control

expansion module (CEM), the ComfortLink controls are capable of accepting a 4 to 20 mA signal, to reset the supply-air temperature up to a maximum of 20 F.

Under Configuration RSET - external 4 to 20 mA supply air reset control). The 4 to 20 mA input to the control system (TB202-9 and TB202-8), will be linearized and range from 0° to 20 F. For example, 4 mA = 0° F reset, 12 mA = 10° F reset and 20 mA = 20° F reset.



EDT.R set RS.CF to 3 (4-20 SA

Demand Limit Control — The term demand limit con-

trol refers to the restriction of the machine's mechanical cooling capacity to control the amount of power that a machine may use.

Demand limiting is possible via two means: Two discrete inputs tied to demand limit set point percentages. OR A 4 to 20 mA input that can reduce or limit capacity linearly to

a set point percentage.

In either case, it will be necessary to install a controls expansion module (CEM). The control interfaces to a switch input at TB202-10 and TB202-11.

DEMAND LIMIT DISCRETE INPUTS — First, set DM.L.S in Configuration

When Inputs OFF, the control will not set any limit to the capacity, and when ON, the control sets a capacity limit to the Configura-

tion

BP

Likewise, when Inputs no. 2) is OFF, the control will not set any limit to the capacity, and when ON, the control sets a capacity limit to the Configu-

ration

BP

If both switches are ON, Inputs as the limiter of capacity.

Under Configuration appropriately for the action desired. Set the DL1.L and DL2.L configurations. They can be set normally open or normally closed. For example, if DL1.L is set to OPEN, the user will need to close the switch to cause the control to limit capacity to the demand limit 1 set point. Likewise, if DL1.L is set to CLSE (closed), the user will need to open the switch to cause the control to limit capacity to the demand limit 1 set point.

DEMAND LIMIT 4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Under Configu-

ration

BP

20 mA control). Under the same menu, set D.L.20 to a value from 0 to 100 to set the demand limit range. For example, with D.L.20 set to 50, a 4 mA signal will result in no limit to the capacity and 20 mA signal will result in a 50% reduction in capacity.

BP



DMD.LD.L.S1 set point.

DMD.LD.L.S2 set point.

DMD.L, set configuration DM.L.S to 2 (2 = 4 to

DMD.L to 1 (2 switches).

GEN.IDL.S1 (Demand Switch no. 1) is



GEN.IDL.S2 (Demand Switch



GEN.IDL.S2 is used



IAQSW.LG, set the logic state

Economizer/Outdoor Air Damper Control —

There are multiple methods for externally controlling the economizer damper.

IAQ DISCRETE INPUT CONFIGURATION — The IAQ (indoor air quality) discrete input configuration requires a CEM module (optional) to be installed and an interface to a switch input at TB202-12 and TB202-13. The state of the input on the display can be found at Inputs

Before configuring the switch functionality, first determine how the switch will be read. A closed switch can indicate either a low IAQ condition or a high IAQ condition. This is set at

Configuration

what a low reading would mean based on the type of switch being used. Setting IAQ.L to OPEN means that when the switch is open the input will read LOW. When the switch is closed, the input will read HIGH. Setting IAQ.L to CLSE (closed) means that when the switch is closed the input will read LOW, and therefore, when the switch is open the switch will read HIGH.

There are two possible configurations for the IAQ discrete input. Select item Configuration and configure for either 1 (IAQ Discrete) or 2 (IAQ Discrete Override).

IQ.I.C Discrete), and the switch logic (Configuration SW.LGIAQ.L) is set to OPEN, then an open switch reads

low and a closed switch reads high.

If the switch is open, the economizer will be commanded to the IAQ Demand Vent Minimum Position. If the outdoor flow station is installed and outdoor air cfm can be read, the economizer will move to the IAQ Demand Vent Minimum Flow CFM control setting.

These settings may be adjusted and are located here:

Configuration

If the switch is closed, the IAQ reading will be high and the economizer will be commanded to the Economizer Minimum Position. If the outdoor airflow station is installed and outdoor



IAQSW.LGIAQ.L. The user can set

= 1 (IAQ Discrete) — If the user sets IQ.I.C to 1 (IAQ



IAQDCV.CIAQ.M



IAQDCV.CO.C.MN



AIR.QIAQ.I.



IAQAQ.CFIQ.I.C



IAQ



air cfm can be read, the economizer will move to the Economizer Minimum Flow CFM control setting.

These settings may be adjusted and are located here:

Configuration Configuration

IQ.I.C

= 2 (IAQ Discrete Override) — If the user sets IQ.I.C

to 2 (IAQ Discrete Override), and Configuration SW.LGIAQ.L is set to OPEN, then an open switch reads low and a closed switch reads high.

If the switch reads low, no action will be taken. If the switch reads high, the economizer will immediately be commanded to the IAQ Economizer Override Position. This can be set from 0 to 100% and can be found at Configuration IQ.O.P.

FAN CONTROL FOR THE IAQ DISCRETE INPUT — Under Configuration crete Input Fan Configuration) must also be set. There are three configurations for IQ.I.F. Select the configuration which will be used for fan operation. This configuration allows the user to decide whether the IAQ discrete switch will start the fan (if the supply fan is not already running), and in which state of occupancy the fan will start.

IQ.I.F = 0 Minimum Position Override Switch input

IQ.I.F = 1 Minimum Position Override Switch input

IQ.I.F = 2 Minimum Position Override Switch input

IAQ ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION — This input is an analog input located on the main base board (MBB). There are 4 different functions for this input. The location of this configuration is at Configuration

The functions possible for IQ.A.C are:

• 0 = no IAQ analog input

• 1 = IAQ analog input

• 2 = IAQ analog input used to override to a set position

• 3 = 4 to 20 mA 0 to 100% economizer minimum position

control

• 4 = 0 to 10,000 ohms 0 to 100% economizer minimum

position control

Options 2, 3, and 4 are dedicated for third party control.

IQ.A.C

= 2 (IAQ Analog Input Used to Override) — Under

Configuration

Override Position). The IQ.O.P configuration is adjustable from 0 to 100%. These configurations are also used in conjunction with Configuration 20 mA Fan Configuration). There are three configurations for IQ.A.F and they follow the same logic as for the discrete input. This configuration allows the user to decide (if the supply fan is not already running), if the IAQ Analog Minimum Position Override input will start the fan, and in which state of occupancy the fan will start.

IQ.A.F = 0 IAQ analog sensor input cannot start the

IQ.A.F = 1 IAQ analog sensor input can start the supply

IQ.A.F = 2 IAQ analog sensor input can start the supply

If IQ.A.F is configured to request the supply fan, then configurations D.F.ON and D.F.OF need to be set. These configuration settings are located under Configuration IAQAQ.SP and configure the fan override operation based on the differential air quality (DAQ). If DAQ rises above D.F.ON, the control will request the fan on until DAQ falls be- low D.F.OF.



IAQDCV.CEC.MN



IAQDCV.CO.C.MX



IAQAQ.SP



IAQAQ.CF, the IQ.I.F (IAQ Dis-

will not start fan

will start fan in occupied mode only

will start fan in both occupied and unoccupied modes



IAQAQ.CFIQ.A.C.



IAQAQ.SP, set IQ.O.P (IAQ Economizer



IAQAQ.CFIQ.A.F (IAQ 4 to

supply fan

fan in occupied mode only

fan in both occupied and unoccupied modes

IAQ



NOTE: If D.F.ON is configured below DAQ.H, the unit is in occupied mode, and the fan was off, then DAQ rose above D.F.ON and the fan came on, the economizer will go to the economizer minimum position (EC.MN).

The 4 to 20 mA signal from the sensor wired to TB201-8 and TB201-7 is scaled to an equivalent indoor CO the parameters IQ.R.L and IQ.R.H located under the Configu-

ration



IAQAQ.SR menu. The parameters are defined such

(IAQ) by

that 4 mA = IQ.R.L and 20 mA = IQ.R.H. When the differential air quality DAQ (IAQ – OAQ.U) exceeds the DAQ.H set point (Configuration



IAQAQ.SP menu) and the supply

fan is on, the economizer minimum vent position (Configura-

tion



IAQDCV.CEC.MN) is overridden and the damper

is moved to the IQ.P.O configuration. When the DAQ falls be- low the DAQ.L set point (Configuration



IAQAQ.SP

menu), the economizer damper is moved back to the minimum vent position (EC.MN).

NOTE: Configuration OAQ.U is used in the calculation of the trip point for override and can be found under Configura-

tion



IAQAQ.SP.

IQ.A.C

= 3 (4 to 20 mA Damper Control) — This configuration will provide full 4 to 20 mA remotely controlled analog input for economizer minimum damper position. The 4 to 20 mA signal is connected to terminals TB201-8 and TB201-7. The input is processed as 4 mA = 0% and 20 mA = 100%, thereby giving complete range control of the effective minimum position.

The economizer sequences can be disabled by unpluging the enthalpy switch input and not enabling any other economizer changeover sequence at Configura-

tion



ECONE.SEL. Complete control of the economizer

damper position is then possible by using a 4 to 20 mA economizer minimum position control or a 0 to 10,000-ohm 0 to 100% economizer minimum position control via configuration decisions at Configuration



IAQAQ.CFIQ.A.C.

To disable the standard enthalpy control input function, unplug the enthalpy switch and provide a jumper from TB2016 to TB201-5 (see wiring diagrams in Major System Components section on page 127).

IQ.A.C

= 4 (10,000 ohm Potentiometer Damper Control) — This configuration will provide input for a 10,000 ohm linear potentiometer that acts as a remotely controlled analog input for economizer minimum damper position. The input is processed as 0 ohms = 0% and 10,000 ohms = 100%, thereby giving complete range control of the effective minimum position.

NOTE: For complete economizer control, the user can make the economizer inactive by unplugging the enthalpy switch connection.

CONTROLS OPERATION

Modes —

chy of command structure as defined by three essential elements: the System mode, the HVAC mode and the Control mode. The System mode is the top level mode that defines three essential states for the control system: OFF, RUN and TEST.

The HVAC mode is the functional level underneath the System mode which further defines the operation of the control.

The Control mode is essentially the control type of the unit (Configuration the control looks to establish a cooling or heating mode.

Furthermore, there are a number of modes which operate concurrently when the unit is running. The operating modes of the control are located at the local displays under Operating Modes. See Table 24.

The ComfortLink controls operate under a hierar-



UNITC.TYP). This defines from where

Currently Occupied (

OCC) — This variable displays the cur-

rent occupancy state of the unit. Timed Override in Effect (

T. OV R) — This variable displays if the state of occupancy is currently occupied due to an override.

DCV Resetting Minimum Position (

DCV) — This variable displays if the economizer position has been lowered from its maximum vent position due to demand control ventilation.

Supply Air Reset (

SA.R) — This variable displays if the supply air set point that the rooftop is attempting to maintain is currently being reset upwards. This applies to cooling only.

Table 24 — Operating Modes Display Table

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE CCN POINT

SYS.M ascii string n/a HVAC ascii string n/a CTRL ascii string n/a

MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT OCC Currently Occupied ON/OFF MODEOCCP T.OVR Timed Override in Effect ON/OFF MODETOVR DCV DCV Resetting Min Pos ON/OFF MODEADCV SA.R Supply Air Reset ON/OFF MODESARS DMD.L Demand Limit in Effect ON/OFF MODEDMLT T.C.ST Temp.Compensated Start ON/OFF MODETCST IAQ.P IAQ Pre-Occ Purge Active ON/OFF MODEIQPG LINK Linkage Active — CCN ON/OFF MODELINK LOCK Mech.Cooling Locked Out ON/OFF MODELOCK H.NUM HVAC Mode Numerical Form number MODEHVAC

Demand Limit in Effect (

DMD.L) — This variable displays if the mechanical cooling capacity is currently being limited or reduced by a third party.

Temperature Compensated Start (

T.C .S T) — This variable displays if Heating or Cooling has been initiated before occupancy to pre-condition the space.

IAQ Pre-Occupancy Purge Active (

IAQ.P) — This variable displays if the economizer is open and the fan is on to preventilate the building before occupancy.

Linkage Active CCN (

LINK) — This variable displays if a linkage master in a zoning system has established “linkage” with this air source (rooftop).

Mechanical Cooling Locked Out (

LOCK) — This variable displays if mechanical cooling is currently being locked out due to low outside air temperature.

HVAC Mode Numerical Form (

H.NUM) — This is a numerical representation of the HVAC modes which may be read via a point read.

SYSTEM MODES (Operating Modes System Mode Off

— When the system mode is OFF, all out-



SYS.M)

puts are to be shut down and no machine control is possible. The following list displays the text assigned to the System Mode when in the OFF mode and the conditions that may cause this mode are checked in the following hierarchal order:

1. Wake up timer on a power reset. (“Initializing System ...”)

2. System in the process of shutting down compressors and waiting for timeguards to expire.

(“Shutting Down ...”)

3. Factory shut down (internal factory control level — SHUTDOWN).

(“Factory Shut Down”)

4. Unit Stop (software application level variable that acts as a hard shut down — Service Test



STOP).

(“Local Machine Stop”)

5. Fire Shut Down (fire shutdown condition based on the Fire Shutdown Input (Inputs



FIREFSD).

(“Fire-Shutdown Mode”)

6. Emergency Stop, which is forced over the CCN through the Emergency Stop Variable (EMSTOP).

(“CCN Emergency Stop”)

7. Start-up Delay. (“Startup Delay = 0-900 secs”)

8. Service test ending transition timer. (“Service Test Ending”)

9. Unexplained internal software failure. (“Internal Failure”)

System Mode Test

— When the system mode is Test, the control is limited to the Test mode and is controllable via the local displays (Navigator™ display). The System Test modes are Factory Test Enabled and Service Test Enabled. See the Service Test section on page 29 for details on test control in this mode.

1. Factory Test mode (“Factory test enabled”)

2. Service Test mode (“Service test enabled”)

System Mode Run

— When the system mode is Run, the software application in the control is free to run the HVAC control routines by which cooling, heating, IAQ, etc., is possible. There are two possible text displays for this mode, one is normal run mode and the other occurs if one of the following fire-smoke modes is present: smoke purge, pressurization or evacuation.

1. Normal run time state (“Unit Operation Enabled”)

2. Fire-Smoke control mode (“Fire-Smoke Control”)

HVAC MODES (Operating Mode



HVAC) — The HVAC mode is dependant on the system mode to allow it to further determine the operational state of the rooftop unit. The actual determination of an HVAC mode is based on a hierarchal decision making process whereby certain overrides may interfere with normal temperature/humidity control. The decision making process that determines the HVAC mode is shown in Fig. 7 and Appendix E.

Each HVAC mode is described below. The HVAC mode

number is shown in the parenthesis after the mode. HVAC Mode — STARTING UP (0)

— The unit is transi-

tioning from the OFF mode to a different mode. HVAC Mode — DISABLED (1)

— The unit is shut down due to a command software disable through the scrolling marquee, a CCN emergency stop command, a service test end, or a control-type change delay.

HVAC Mode — SHUTTING DOWN (2)

— The unit is tran-

sitioning from a mode to the OFF mode. HVAC Mode — SOFTSTOP REQUEST (3)

— The unit is

off due to a soft stop request from the control. HVAC Mode — REM SW.DISABLE (4)

— The unit is off

due to the remote switch. HVAC Mode — FAN STATUS FAIL (5)

— The unit is off

due to a supply fan status failure. HVAC Mode — STATIC PRESSURE FAIL (6)

— The unit

is off due to failure of the static pressure sensor. HVAC Mode — COMP.STUCK ON (7)

— The unit is shutdown because there is an indication that a compressor is running even though it has been commanded off.

HVAC Mode — OFF (8)

— The unit is off and no operating

modes are active. HVAC Mode — TEST (9)

— The unit is in the self test mode

which is entered through the Service Test menu.

HVAC Mode — TEMPERING VENT (10)

— The economizer is at minimum vent position but the supply-air temperature has dropped below the tempering vent set point. Staged gas heat, modulating gas heat, SCR electric heat, or hydronic heat is used to temper the ventilation air.

HVAC Mode — TEMPERING LOCOOL (11)

— The economizer is at minimum vent position but the combination of the outside-air temperature and the economizer position has dropped the supply-air temperature below the tempering cool set point. Staged gas heat, modulating gas heat, SCR electric heat, or hydronic heat is used to temper the ventilation air.

HVAC Mode — TEMPERING HICOOL (12)

HVAC Mode — VENT (13)

— This is a normal operation mode where no heating or cooling is required and outside air is being delivered to the space to control IAQ levels.

HVAC Mode — LOW COOL (14)

— This is a normal cool-

ing mode where a low cooling demand is present. HVAC Mode — HIGH COOL (15)

— This is a normal cool-

ing mode where a high cooling demand is present. HVAC Mode — LOW HEAT (16)

— The unit will be in low heating demand mode using either gas, electric, or hydronic heat.

HVAC Mode — HIGH HEAT (17)

— The unit will be in high heating demand mode using gas, electric, or hydronic heat.

HVAC Mode — UNOCC. FREE COOL (18)

— In this mode the unit will operate in cooling but will be using the economizer for free cooling. Entering this mode will depend on the status of the outside air. The unit can be configured for outside air dry bulb changeover, differential dry bulb changeover, outside air enthalpy changeover, differential enthalpy changeover, or a custom arrangement of enthalpy/dew point and dry bulb. See the Economizer section for further details.

HVAC Mode — FIRE SHUT DOWN (19)

— The unit has been stopped due to a fire shutdown input (FSD) from two or more of the fire control modes, purge, evacuation, or pressurization.

HVAC Mode — PRESSURIZATION (20)

— The unit is in the special fire pressurization mode where the supply fan is on, the economizer damper is open and the power exhaust fans are off. This mode is invoked by the Fire Pressurization (PRES) input which can be found in the INPUTFIRE submenu.

HVAC Mode — EVACUATION (21)

— The unit is in the special Fire Evacuation mode where the supply fan is off, the economizer damper is closed and the power exhaust fans are on. This mode is invoked by the Fire Evacuation (EVAC) input which can be found in the INPUTFIRE submenu.

HVAC Mode — SMOKE PURGE (22)

— The unit is in the special Fire Purge mode where the supply fan is on, the economizer damper is open and the power exhaust fans are on. This mode is invoked by the Fire Evacuation (PURG) input which can be found in the INPUTFIRE submenu.

HVAC Mode — DEHUMIDIFICATION (23) operating in the Dehumidification mode. On units configured for Humidi-MiZer

operation, this is the Humidi-MiZer dehu-

— The unit is

midification mode (subcooling). HVAC Mode — RE-HEAT (24)

— The unit is operating in Reheat mode. On units configured for Humidi-MiZer operation, this is the Humidi-MiZer reheat mode.

System Mode =

Fig. 7 — Mode Selection

OFF?

Yes

Inputs -> FIRE ->

FSD in alar m?

System

Mode

HVAC Mode = OFF

(Disabled)

Fire-

Smoke

Control

Unit not in facto ry

test AND fire-smoke

control mode is

alarming?

Yes

Inputs -> FIRE ->

PRES in alarm?

No No

Inputs -> FIRE ->

EVAC in alarm?

Yes

HVAC Mode = OF F

(Fire Shutdown)

Exceptions

Config->UNIT-> C.TYP changed

while unit running?

15-second delay

HVAC Mode = OF F

(Disabled)

Config->SP-> SP.CF

HVAC Mode = OFF

Yes

HVAC Mode = OF F

(Pressurization)

= 1

and static pressure sensor has failed

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

(Static Pres. Fail)

System Mode =

TEST?

HVAC Mode = TEST

Config->UNI T->

SFS.M=1 OR 2 AND

Config->UNI T->

SFS.S=YES?

and supply fan

has failed

HVAC Mode = OFF

(Fan Status Fail)

HVAC Mode = OFF

(Plenum Pressure Trip)

Service Test -> S.STP = YES?

HVAC Mode = SoftSt op

Request

Config->BP- >

AND

BP.CF=5

There is a plenum

pressure switch

error

No No No No

Config->UNIT->

No No No

RM.CF =2 AN D

Inputs->GEN.I->

REMT = ON

HVAC Mode = OFF (Rem. Sw. Disable)

Unit just wa king up from power reset?

HVAC Mode = OF F

(Starting Up)

Yes

HVAC Mode = OF F

(Evacuation)

HVAC Mode = Shutting

HVAC Mode = OF F

(Config ->HEAT->

HT.TY= 4 OR Config ->

DEHU->D.SEL=1) AND

(Inputs ->GEN.I->

FRZ.S=ALRM?)

HVAC Mode = Fr eeze

Stat Trip

Unit shutting down?

Down

YesYesYesYesYes

(Purge)

Compress or

contactor welded

on?

HVAC Mode = Comp .

Stuck On

Unit control free to select

normal heating/cooling

HVAC mode

Unit

control free

to choose

HVAC

Mode

HVAC Mode = OFF

HVAC Mode =

Tempering Vent

HVAC Mode =

Tempering LoCool

HVAC Mode =

Tempering HiCool

HVAC Mode = Re- Heat

HVAC Mode =

Dehumidification

HVAC Mode = Vent

HVAC Mode = Low Cool

HVAC Mode = High Cool

HVAC Mode = Low He at

HVAC Mode = High Heat

HVAC Mode = Un occ.

Free Cool

HVAC Mode — FREEZESTAT TRIP (25)

— If the freezestat trips, the unit enters the Freezestat Trip HVAC mode. The supply fan will run, the hydronic heat valve will be wide open, and the economizer damper will be closed.

HVAC Mode — PLEN.PRESS.FAIL (26)

— The unit is off

due to a failure of the plenum pressure switch. HVAC Mode — RCB COMM FAILURE (27)

— The unit is off due to a Rooftop Control Board (RCB) communication failure.

HVAC Mode — SUPPLY VFD FAULT (28)

— The unit is off due to a supply fan VFD fault or supply fan VFD communications loss.

Unit Configuration — There is a sub-menu under the

Configuration mode of the local display entitled UNIT. This sub-menu contains an assortment of items that most of which are relative to other particular sub-sections of this control manual. This section will define all of these configurations here for easy reference. The sub-menu which contains these configurations is located at the local display under Configura-

tion



UNIT. See Table 25.

Machine Control Type ( fines the technique and control source responsible for selecting a cooling mode and in determining the method by which compressors are staged.

The types possible will now be defined:

• C.TYP = 1 (VAV-RAT) and C.TYP = 2 ( VAV- S P T )

Both of these configurations refer to standard VAV operation. If the control is occupied, the supply fan is run continuously and return-air temperature will be used for both in the determination of the selection of a cooling mode. VAV-SPT differs only in that during the unoccupied period, space temperature will be used to "kick start" the fan for 10 minutes before the return-air temperature is allowed to call out any mode.

• C.TYP = 3 (TSTAT - MULTI )

This configuration will force the control to monitor the thermostat inputs to make a determination of mode. But unlike traditional 2-stage thermostat control the unit is allowed to use multiple stages of cooling control and perform VAV style operation. Essentially the control will be able to call out a LOW COOL or a HIGH COOL mode and maintain a low or high cool supply air set point.

C.TYP) — This configuration de-

Table 25 — Unit Configuration

• C.TYP = 4 (SPT - MULTI ) This configuration will force the control to monitor a space temperature sensor to make a determination of mode. But unlike traditional 2-stage space temperature control, the unit is allowed to use multiple stages of cooling control and perform VAV style operation. Essentially the control will be able to call out a LOW COOL or a HIGH COOL mode and maintain a low or high cool supply air set point.

Unit Size (75-150) (

SIZE) — There are several available tonnages for the N Series control. Make sure this configuration matches the size called out by the model number of the unit. This is important as the cooling stage tables are directly determined based on the SIZE configuration.

Fan Mode (

CV.FN) (0= Auto, 1= Cont) — This Fan Mode

configuration can be used for machine control types (Configu-

ration



UNITC.TYP) 3, 4, 5 and 6.

The Fan Mode variable establishes the operating sequence for the supply fan during occupied periods. When set to 1 = Continuous, the fan will operate continuously during occupied periods.

When set to 0 = Automatic, the fan will run only during a heating or cooling mode.

Remote Switch Configutation (

RM.CF) — The remote switch input is connected to TB201 terminals 1 and 2. This switch can be used for several remote control functions. Please refer to the Remote Control Switch Input section on page 96 for details on its use and operation.

CEM Module Installed (

CEM) — This configuration instructs the control to communicate with the Controls Expansion Module (CEM) module over the local equipment network (LEN) when set to YES. When the unit is configured for certain sensors and configs, this option will be set to YES automatically.

The sensors and configurations that automatically turn on

this board are:

Configuration



UNITSENSSRH.S = Enable (Space

Relative Humidity Sensor Enable)

Configuration



UNITSENSRRH.S = Enable (Re-

turn Air Relative Humidity Sensor Enable)

Configuration



UNITSENSMRH.S = Enable

(Mixed Air Relative Humidity Sensor Enable)

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULTS

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION C.TYP Machine Control Type 1 to 4 CTRLTYPE 3 SIZE Unit Size (75-150) 75 to 150 UNITSIZE 75 FN.MD Fan Mode (0=Auto, 1=Cont) 0 to 1 FAN_MODE 1 RM.CF Remote Switch Config 0 to 3 RMTINCFG 0 CEM CEM Module Installed No/Yes CEM_BRD No LQ.SN Liquid Sensors Installed No/Yes LQ_SENS No PW.MN Power Monitor Installed No/Yes PWR_MON No VFD.B VFD Bypass Enable? No/Yes VFD_BYEN No UVC.L UV-C Lamp Config? 0 to 2 UVCL_CFG 0 TSC.C Temp.Cmp.Strt.Cool Factr 0 to 60 Minutes TCSTCOOL 0 TSC.H Temp.Cmp.Strt.Heat Factr 0 to 60 Minutes TCSTHEAT 0 SFS.S Fan Fail Shuts Down Unit No/Yes SFS_SHUT No SFS.M Fan Stat Monitoring Type 0 to 2 SFS_MON 0 VAV.S VAV Unocc.Fan Retry Time 0 to 720 Minutes SAMPMINS 50 MAT.S MAT Calc Config 0 to 2 MAT_SEL 1 MAT.R Reset MAT Table Entries? No/Yes MATRESET No MAT.D MAT Outside Air Default 0 to 100 % MATOADOS 20 ALTI Altitude……..in feet: –1000 to 60000 ALTITUDE 0 DLAY Star tup Delay Time 0 to 900 Seconds DELAY 0 AUX.R Auxiliary Relay Config 0 to 3 AUXRELAY 0 SENS INPUT SENSOR CONFIG SPT.S Space Temp Sensor Disable/Enable SPTSENS Disable SP.O.S Space Temp Offset Sensor Disable/Enable SPTOSENS Disable SP.O.R Space Temp Offset Range 1 to 10 SPTO_RNG 5 SRH.S Space Air RH Sensor Disable/Enable SPRHSENS Disable RRH.S Return Air RH Sensor Disable/Enable RARHSENS Disable MRH.S Mixed Air RH Sensor Disable/Enable MARHSENS Disable

Configuration

ing 4-20ma sensor)

Configuration

ing VFD Control)

Configuration

door Air CFM Sensor Enable)

Configuration

ply Air Reset Sensor Enable)

Configuration

Relative Humidity Sensor Enable)

Configuration

PUT) (Dehumidification Sensor - Discrete Input Select)

Configuration

ES) (Demand Limiting using 2 discrete switches)

Configuration

CTRL) (Demand Limiting using a 4-0ma sensor)

Configuration

CRETE) (IAQ discrete switch control)

Configuration

DISC.OVR) (IAQ discrete switch "override" control)

Configuration

SENS-DAQ) (Outdoor Air Quality Sensor)

Configuration

DAQ) (4-20ma sensor, no DAQ)

Configuration

Filter Status is not disabled or schedule)

Configuration

ter Status is not disabled or schedule) Liquid Sensors Installed (

structs the control to read the liquid temperature thermistors and pressure transducers on A and B refrigeration circuits.

Power Monitor Installed ( structs the control to monitor the power status input.

VFD Bypass Enable ( the control to enable the EXB in order to use the supply fan relay (SFBYRLY) and ret/exh bypass relay (PEBRLY) outputs.

UV-C Lamp Configuration ( controls the enabling of the UV-C lamps to 0) none, 1) enabled,

2) enabled with status feedback. Temperature Compensation Start Cooling Factor (

— This factor is used in the equation of the Temperature Compensated Start Time Bias for cooling. Refer to the Temperature Compensated Start section for more information. A setting of 0 minutes indicates Temperature Compensated Start in Cooling is not permitted.

Temperature Compensated Start Heating Factor ( — This factor is used in the equation of the Temperature Compensated Start Time Bias for heating. Refer to the Temperature Compensated Start section for more information. A setting of 0 minutes indicates Temperature Compensated Start in Heating is not permitted.

Fan Fail Shuts Down Unit ( will allow whether the unit should shut down on a supply fan status fail or simply alert the condition and continue to run.

YES – Shut down the unit if supply fan status monitoring fails and send out an alarm

NO – Do not shut down the unit if supply fan status monitoring fails but send out an alert.

Fan Status Monitoring Type ( selects the type of fan status monitoring to be performed.

0 – NONE – No switch or monitoring 1 – SWITCH – Use of the fan status switch 2 – SP RISE – Monitoring of the supply duct pressure.

SP



BP



SP.RS = 1 (Static Pressure Reset us-

SP.RS = 4 (Static Pressure Reset us-

ECONCFM.COCF.S = Enable (Out-

EDT.RRES.S = Enable (4-20 ma Sup-

ECONORH.S = Enable (Outside Air

IAQDEHUD.SEN = 3 (DISCR.IN-

DMD.LDM.L.S = 1 (2 SWITCH-

DMD.LDM.L.S = 2 (4-20MA

IAQAQ.CFIQ.I.C = 1 (IAQ DIS-

IAQAQ.CFIQ.I.C = 2 (IAQ

IAQAQ.CFOQ.A.C = 1 (OAQ

IAQAQ.CFOQ.A.C = 2 (4-20 NO

IAQFLTCMFL.S = 1,3,4,5 (Main

IAQFLTCPFL.S = 1,3,4,5 (Post Fil-

LQ.SN) — This configuration in-

PW.MN) — This configuration in-

VFD.B) — This configuration instructs

UVC.L) — This configuration

TCS.C

TSC.H

SFS.S) — This configuration

SFS.M) — This configuration

VAV Unoccupied Fan Retry Time ( trol types 1 and 2 (VAV-RAT,VAV-SPT) include a process for sampling the return-air temperature during unoccupied periods to prove a valid demand for heating or cooling before initiating an unoccupied heating or cooling mode. If the sampling routine runs but concludes a valid demand condition does not exist, the sampling process will not be permitted for the period of time defined by this configuration. Reducing this value allows a more frequent re-sampling process. Setting this value to zero will prevent any sampling sequence.

MAT Calc Config ( user three options in the processing of the mixed-air temperature (MAT) calculation:

• MAT.S = 0 The control will not attempt to learn MAT over time. The control will simply calculate MAT based on the position of the economizer, outside and return air temperature, linearly.

• MAT.S = 1 The control will attempt to learn MAT over time. Any time the system is in a vent mode and the economizer stays at a particular position for long enough, MAT = EDT. Using this, the control has an internal table whereby he can more closely zoom in on the true MAT value.

• MAT.S = 2 The control will stop learning and use whatever the control has already learned. This would infer that the control spent a part of its life at MAT.S = 1. This might be useful to a commissioner of a system who first sets MAT.S = 1, then might go into the service test mode, turn on the fan and open the economizer to a static position for a little more than 5 minutes and then move to several positions to repeat the same (20%,40%,60%,80%). The only stipulation to this "commissioning" is that it is important that the difference between return and outside temperature be greater than 5 degrees. (The greater the delta, the better.) When done, set MAT.S = 2 and the system has been "learned" forever.

Reset MAT Table Entries? ( allows the user to reset the internally stored MAT "learned" configuration entities back to their default values. The defaults are set to a linear relationship between the economizer damper

)

position and OAT and RAT in the calculation of MAT.

Altitude.......in feet: (

clude a barometric pressure sensor to thoroughly define the calculation of enthalpy and CFM, the control does include an altitude parameter which will serve to set up a "mean" barometric pressure for use to calculate with. The effect of barometric pressure in these calculations is not great, but could have an effect depending on the installed elevation of the unit. Basically, if the rooftop is installed at a particularly high altitude and enthalpy or CFM are being calculated, set this configuration to the current elevation of the installed rooftop.

Start Up Delay Time ( from operating after a power reset. The configuration may be adjusted from 0 to 900 seconds of delay.

Auxiliary Relay Output Configuration ( configuration allows the user to configure the function of the auxiliary relay output. The output is 1.4 vac, 5 va maximum. The configuration can be set from 0 to 3. If AUX.R is set to 0, the auxiliary relay contact will be energized during an alarm. The output can be used to turn on an indicator light or sound an alarm in a mechanical room. If AUX.R is set to 1, the auxiliary relay will energize when the controls determine dehumidification/reheat is needed. The relay would be wired to a third party dehumidification/reheat device and would energize the device when needed. If AUX.R is set to 2, the auxiliary relay will energize when the unit is in the occupied state. The relay could then be used to control lighting or other functions that need to be on

MAT.S) — This configuration gives the

ALTI) — As the control does not in-

DLAY) — This option inhibits the unit

VAV.S) — Machine con-

MAT.R) — This configuration

AUX.R) — This

during the occupied state. If AUX.R is set to 3, the auxiliary relay will energize when the supply fan is energized (and, if equipped with a VFD, the VFD output is not 0%). The default is 0.

Space Temp Sensor (

SPT.S) — If a space temperature sensor

is installed (T55/T56), enable this configuration. Space Temp Offset Sensor (

SP.O.S) — If a T56 sensor is installed with the space temperature offset slider, enable this configuration.

Space Temp Offset Range (

SP.O.R) — If a space temperature offset sensor is installed, it is possible to configure the "sweep" range of the slider by adjusting this "range" configuration.

Space Air RH Sensor (

SRH.S) — If a space relative humidity

sensor is installed, enable this configuration. Return RH Sensor (

RRH.S) — If a return air relative humidi-

ty sensor is installed, enable this configuration. Mixed RH Sensor (

MRH.S) — If a mixed air relative humid-

ity sensor is installed, enable this configuration.

Cooling Control — The N Series ComfortLink controls

offer two basic control approaches to mechanical cooling: multi-stage cooling (CV) and multiple stages of cooling (VAV). In addition, the ComfortLink controls offer the ability to run multiple stages of cooling for either a space temperature sensor or thermostat by controlling the unit to either a low or high cool supply air set point.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — The control type (Configu-

ration



UNITC.TYP) determines the selection of the type

of cooling control as well as the technique for selecting a cooling mode. Unit staging tables are shown in Appendix C.

NOTE: Whether a unit has a VFD or a supply fan installed for static pressure control has no effect on configuration of the machine control type (C.TYP). No matter what the control type, it is possible to run the unit in either CV or VAV mode provided there are enough stages to accommodate lower air volumes for VAV operation. Refer to the section on static pressure control on page 69 for information on how to set up the unit for the type of supply fan control desired.

Machine Control Type ( The most fundamental cooling control configuration is located under Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION C.TYP Machine Control Type 1 - 4 CTRLTYPE *

*This default is model number dependent.

This configuration defines the technique and control source responsible for selecting a cooling mode and in determining the method by which compressors are staged. The control types are:

• C.TYP = 1 (VAV-RAT) and C.TYP = 2 ( VAV- S P T )

Both of these configurations refer to standard VAV opera-

tion. If the control is occupied, the supply fan is run continu-

ously and return-air temperature will be used for both in the

determination of the selection of a cooling mode. VAV-SPT

differs from VAV-RAT only in that during the unoccupied

period, space temperature will be used instead of return-air

temperature to start the fan for ten minutes before the re-

turn-air temperature is allowed to call out any mode.

• C.TYP = 3 (TSTAT – MULTI)

This configuration will force the control to monitor the ther-

mostat inputs to make a determination of mode. Unlike tra-

ditional 2-stage thermostat control, the unit is allowed to use

multiple stages of cooling control and perform VAV style

ConfigurationUNITC.TYP) —



UNIT.

CCN

POINT

DEFAULTS

operation. The control will be able to call out a LOW COOL or a HIGH COOL mode and maintain a low or high cool supply air set point.

• C.TYP = 4 (SPT – MULTI) This configuration will force the control to monitor a space

temperature sensor to make a determination of mode. Unlike traditional 2-stage space temperature control, the unit is allowed to use multiple stages of cooling control and perform VAV style operation. The control will be able to call out a LOW COOL or a HIGH COOL mode and maintain a low or high cool supply air set point.

MACHINE DEPENDENT CONFIGURATIONS — Some configurations are linked to the physical unit and must not be changed. The configurations are provided in case a field replacement of a board occurs and the settings are not preserved by the download process of the new software. The following configurations apply to all machine control types (C.TYP). These configurations are located at the local display under Configuration



UNIT. See Table 26.

Table 26 — Machine Dependent Configurations

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION SIZE Unit Size (75-150) 75-150 UNITSIZE *

*Dependent on unit.

CCN

POINT

DEFAULTS

Unit Size (SIZE) — There are 6 unit sizes (tons) for the N Se- ries control. Make sure this configuration matches the size called out by the model number of the unit. This is important as the cooling stage tables are directly determined based on the SIZE configuration.

EDT Reset Configuration (

RS.CF) — This configuration ap-

plies to several machine control types (Configura-

tion



UNITC.TYP = 1,2,3, and 4). See Table 28.

• 0 = NO RESET No supply air reset is in effect

•1 = SPT RESET Space temperature will be used as the reset control variable

along with both RTIO and LIMT in the calculation of the final amount of reset to be applied (Inputs



SA.S.R).



RSET

• 2 = RAT RESET Return-air temperature will be used as the reset control vari-

able along with both RTIO and LIMT in the calculation of the final amount of reset to be applied (Inputs



RSET



SA.S.R).

• 3 = 3RD PARTY RESET The reset value is determined by a 4 to 20 mA third party

input. An input of 4 mA would correspond to 0º F reset. An input of 20 mA would correspond to 20º F reset. Configuring the control for this option will cause RES.S to become enabled automatically with the CEM board. To avoid alarms make sure the CEM board and third party input are connected first before enabling this option.

Reset Ratio (

RTIO) — This configuration is used when

RS.CF is set to 1 or 2. For every degree that the controlling

temperature (space/return) falls below the occupied cooling set point (OCSP), the calculated value of the supply air reset will rise by the number of degrees as specified by this parameter.

Reset Limit (

LIMT) — This configuration is used when

RS.CF is set to 1 or 2. This configuration places a clamp on the

amount of supply air reset that can be applied. EDT 4-20 mA Reset Input (

automatically enabled when Configuration

RES.S) — This configuration is



EDT.R



RS.CF is set to 3 (third party reset).

COOLING CONFIGURATION — Relevant configurations for mechanical cooling are located at the local display under

Configuration

Enable Compressor A1 (



COOL. See Table 29.

A1.EN) — This configuration is

used to disable the A1 compressor in case of failure for size 75 to 150 units.

Enable Compressor A2 (

A2.EN) — This configuration is used to disable the A2 compressor in case of failure for size 75 to 150 units.

Enable Compressor A3 (

A3.EN) — This configuration is used to disable the A3 compressor in case of failure for size 90 and 100 units. It is always disabled for size 75 units.

Enable Compressor A4 (

A4.EN) — This configuration is used to disable the A4 compressor in case of failure for size 120 to 150 units. It is always disabled for size 75 to 105 units.

Enable Compressor B1 (

B1.EN) — This configuration is used to disable the B1 compressor in case of failure for size 75 to 150 units.

Enable Compressor B2 (

B2.EN) — This configuration is used to disable the B2 compressor in case of failure for size 75 to 150 units.

Enable Compressor B3 (

B3.EN) — This configuration is used to disable the B3 compressor in case of failure for size 75 to 150 units.

Enable Compressor B4 (

B4.EN) — This configuration is used to disable the B4 compressor in case of failure for size 120 to 150 units. It is always disabled for size 75 to 105 units.

CSB A1 Feedback Alarm (

CS.A1) — This configuration is used to enable or disable the compressor A1 feedback alarm. This configuration must be enabled whenever A1.EN is enabled.

CSB A2 Feedback Alarm (

CS.A2) — This configuration is used to enable or disable the compressor A2 feedback alarm. This configuration must be enabled whenever A2.EN is enabled.

CSB A3 Feedback Alarm (

CS.A3) — This configuration is used to enable or disable the compressor A3 feedback alarm. This configuration must be enabled whenever A3.EN is enabled.

CSB A4 Feedback Alarm (

CS.A4) — This configuration is used to enable or disable the compressor A4 feedback alarm. This configuration must be enabled whenever A4.EN is enabled.

CSB B1 Feedback Alarm (

CS.B1) — This configuration is used to enable or disable the compressor B1 feedback alarm. This configuration must be enabled whenever B1.EN is enabled.

CSB B2 Feedback Alarm (

CS.B2) — This configuration is used to enable or disable the compressor B2 feedback alarm. This configuration must be enabled whenever B2.EN is enabled.

CSB B3 Feedback Alarm (

CS.B3) — This configuration is used to enable or disable the compressor B3 feedback alarm. This configuration must be enabled whenever B3.EN is enabled.

CSB B4 Feedback Alarm (

CS.B4) — This configuration is used to enable or disable the compressor B4 feedback alarm. This configuration must be enabled whenever B4.EN is enabled.

Capacity Threshold Adjust (

Z.GN) — This configuration provides an adjustment to the SUMZ Cooling Algorithm for capacity control. The configuration affects the cycling rate of the cooling stages by raising or lowering the threshold that demand must build to in order to add or subtract a stage of cooling.

Normally this configuration should not require any tuning or adjustment. If there is an application where the unit may be significantly oversized and there are indications of high compressor cycles, then the Capacity Threshold Adjust (Z.GN) can be used to adjust the overall logic gain. Normally this is set to

1.0, but it can be adjusted from 0.1 to 10. As the value of Z.GN is increased, the cycling of cooling stages will be slowed.

Compressor Lockout Temperature (

MC.LO) — This configuration defines the outdoor air temperature below which mechanical cooling is locked out.

Lead/Lag Operation? (

LLAG) — This configuration selects the type of lead/lag compressor operation for the unit. There are 3 choices: automatic, circuit A, and circuit B.

0 = AUTOMATIC

If this configuration is set to “AUTOMATIC,” every time cooling capacity drops to 0%, on the next call for cooling, the control will start up the first compressor on the circuit that did not start on the previous cooling cycle.

1 = CIRCUIT A

If this configuration is set to “CIRCUIT A,” every time cooling capacity drops to 0%, a circuit A compressor is always the first to start on the next call for cooling.

2 = CIRCUIT B

If this configuration is set to “CIRCUIT B,” every time cooling capacity drops to 0%, a circuit B compressor is always the first to start on the next call for cooling.

NOTE: If the unit is configured for a Digital Scroll (Configu-

ration



M.PIDDG.A1 = YES) or Minimum Load Valve

(Configuration



M.PIDMLV = ENABLE), then circuit A

is always the lead circuit regardless of the setting of this configuration.

If the unit is configured for the Humidi-MiZer

adaptive dehumidification system, then circuit B automatically becomes the lead circuit when the unit enters into one of the HumidiMiZer modes (dehumidification or reheat). The unit will immediately start a circuit B compressor when a Humidi-MiZer mode is initiated.

MotorMaster Control? (

M.M.) — The condenser fan staging control for the unit is managed directly by the ComfortLink controls. There is no physical Motormaster device in the standard unit. If the unit was ordered from the factory with low ambient control (Motormaster) option, nothing further needs to be done. This configuration must be set to YES if an accessory low ambient operation Motormaster V Control is installed on the unit. Setting this configuration to YES alters the condenser fan staging sequence to accommodate the Motormaster V control. See Head Pressure Control section, page 55, for more information.

Maximum Condenser Temp (

SCT.H) — This configuration defines the saturated condensing temperature at which the head pressure control routine will increase an outdoor fan stage. The saturated condensing temperature of either running circuit rising above this temperature will increase a fan stage. If the outdoor-air temperature is greater than 72 F, then no outdoor fan staging will occur, and the outdoor fan stage will default to the maximum stage.

Minimum Condenser Temp (

SCT.L) — This configuration defines the saturated condensing temperature at which the head pressure control routine will decrease an outdoor fan stage. The saturated condensing temperature of both running circuits decreasing below this temperature will decrease a fan stage. If the outdoor-air temperature is greater than 72 F no outdoor fan staging will occur, and the outdoor fan stage will default to the maximum stage.

A1 is Digital Scroll (

DG.A1) — This configuration instructs the unit controls as to whether the A1 compressor is a digital scroll or regular scroll compressor. If set to YES, the

compressor will be controlled by the compressor staging routine and SUMZ Cooling Algorithm.

A1 Min Digital Capacity (

MC.A1) — This configuration defines the minimum capacity the digital scroll compressor is allowed to modulate to. The digital scroll compressor modulation range will be limited from MC.A1 to 100%.

Dig Scroll Adjust Delta (

DS.AP) — This configuration defines the maximum capacity the digital scroll will be allowed to change per request by the SUMZ Cooling Algorithm.

Dig Scroll Adjust Delay (

DS.AD) — This configuration defines the time delay in seconds between digital scroll capacity adjustments.

Dig Scroll Reduce Delta (

DS.RP) — This configuration defines the maximum capacity the digital scroll will be allowed to decrease per request by the SUMZ Cooling Algorithm when OAT is greater than Configuration



M.PIDDS.RO. This

ramped reduction is only imposed on a decrease in digital scroll capacity. An increase in capacity will continue to follow the value defined by Configuration

Dig Scroll Reduce Delay (



M.PIDDS.AP.

DS.RD) — This configuration de-

fines the time delay, in seconds, between digital scroll capacity reduction adjustments when OAT is greater than Configura-

tion



M.PIDDS.RO. This ramped reduction is only im-

posed on a decrease in digital scroll capacity. An increase in capacity will continue to follow the value defined by Configura-

tion



M.PIDDS.AD.

Dig Scroll Reduction OAT (

DS.RO)

— Under certain operating conditions, a sharp decrease in digital scroll capacity can result in unstable unit operation. This configuration defines the outdoor air temperature above which a reduced capacity (

figuration tion



M.PIDDS.RP



M.PIDDS.RD

) and time delay (

) will be imposed on a digital scroll

Con-

Configura-

capacity reduction. This ramped reduction is only imposed on a

Table 27 — Setpoints

decrease in digital scroll capacity. An increase in capacity will continue to follow the values defined by

tionM.PIDDS.AP

and

ConfigurationM.PIDDS.AD

Configura-

Dig Scroll Max Only OAT (DS.MO) — This configuration defines the outdoor-air temperature above which the digital scroll will not be allowed to modulate. The digital scroll will be locked at 100% above this outdoor-air temperature.

Min Load Valve Enable (

MLV) — This configuration instructs the control as to whether a minimum load (hot gas bypass) valve has been installed and will be controlled by the compressor staging routine.

High SST Alert Delay Time (

H.SST) — This option allows the low saturated suction temperature alert timing delay to be adjusted.

Reverse Rotation Verified? (

RR.VF) — This configuration is used to enable or disable the compressor reverse rotation detection algorithm. This algorithm performs a check for correct compressor rotation upon power up of the unit. The method for detecting correct rotation is based on the assumption that there will be a drop in suction pressure upon a compressor start if it is rotating in the correct direction.

A test is made once, on power up, for suction pressure

change on the first compressor of the first circuit to start.

Reverse rotation is determined by measuring suction pres-

sure at 3 points in time:

• 5 seconds prior to compressor start.

• At the instant the compressor starts.

• 5 seconds after the compressor starts.

The rate of suction pressure change from 5 seconds prior to compressor start to compressor start (rate prior) is compared to the rate of suction pressure change from compressor start to 5 seconds after compressor start (rate after).

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

OHSP Occupied Heat Setpoint 40-99 dF OHSP 68 OCSP Occupied Cool Setpoint 40-99 dF OCSP 75 UHSP Unoccupied Heat Setpoint 40-99 dF UHSP 55 UCSP Unoccupied Cool Setpoint 40-110 dF UCSP 90 GAP Heat-Cool Setpoint Gap 2-10 deltaF HCSP_GAP 5 V. C. O N VAV Occ. Cool On Delta 0-25 deltaF VAVOCON 3.5 V. C. O F VAV Occ. Cool Off Delta 1-25 deltaF VAVOCOFF 2 SASP Supply Air Setpoint 45-75 dF SASP 55 SA.HI Supply Air Setpoint Hi 45-75 dF SASP_HI 55 SA.LO Supply Air Setpoint Lo 45-75 dF SASP_LO 60 SA.HT Heating Supply Air Setpt 90-145 dF SASPHEAT 85 T.P RG Tempering Purge SASP –20-80 dF TEMPPURG 50 T.C L Tempering in Cool SASP 5-75 dF TEMPCOOL 5 T.V.OC Tempering Vent Occ SASP –20-80 dF TEMPVOCC 65 T.V.UN Tempering Vent Unocc. SASP –20-80 dF TEMPVUNC 50

Table 28 — Supply Air Reset Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

EDT.R EVAP.DISCHRGE TEMP RESET RS.CF EDT Reset Configuration 0 - 3 EDRSTCFG 2 RTIO Reset Ratio 0 - 10 RTIO 3 LIMT Reset Limit 0 - 20 deltaF LIMT 10 RES.S EDT 4-20 ma Reset Input Enable/Disable EDTRSENS Disable

Table 29 — Cooling Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

COOL COOLING CONFIGURATION A1.EN Enable Compressor A1 Enable/Disable CMPA1ENA Enable A2.EN Enable Compressor A2 Enable/Disable CMPA2ENA Enable A3.EN Enable Compressor A3 Enable/Disable CMPA3ENA Enable A4.EN Enable Compressor A4 Enable/Disable CMPA4ENA Enable B1.EN Enable Compressor B1 Enable/Disable CMPB1ENA Enable B2.EN Enable Compressor B2 Enable/Disable CMPB2ENA Enable B3.EN Enable Compressor B3 Enable/Disable CMPB3ENA Enable B4.EN Enable Compressor B4 Enable/Disable CMPB4ENA Enable CS.A1 CSB A1 Feedback Alarm Enable/Disable CSB_A1EN Enable CS.A2 CSB A2 Feedback Alarm Enable/Disable CSB_A2EN Enable CS.A3 CSB A3 Feedback Alarm Enable/Disable CSB_A3EN Enable CS.A4 CSB A4 Feedback Alarm Enable/Disable CSB_A4EN Enable CS.B1 CSB B1 Feedback Alarm Enable/Disable CSB_B1EN Enable CS.B2 CSB B2 Feedback Alarm Enable/Disable CSB_B2EN Enable CS.B3 CSB B3 Feedback Alarm Enable/Disable CSB_B3EN Enable CS.B4 CSB B4 Feedback Alarm Enable/Disable CSB_B4EN Enable Z.GN Capacity Threshold Adjst 0.1 - 4.0 Z_GAIN 1 MC.LO Compressor Lockout Temp –25 - 55 dF OATLCOMP 40 LLAG Lead/Lag Operation ? Yes/No LLENABLE No HC.EV High Capacity Evaporator Yes/No HCAPEVAP No H.ODF High Efficiency OD Fans? Yes/No HIGH_EFF No M.M. Motor Master Control ? Yes/No MOTRMAST No MM.OF MM Setpoint Offset –20 - 20 dF MMSPOFST –10.0

M.PID MOTORMAST PID CONFIGS MM.RR Motor Master PI Run Rate 5-120 MM_RATE 5 MM.PG A1 Min Digital Capacity 10 - 100 % MINCAPA1 50 MM.PD Motor Master Deriv. Gain 0 - 5 MM_DG 0.3 MM.TI Motor Master Integ. Time 0.5 - 50 MM_TI 30.0 SCT.H Maximum Condenser Temp 100 - 150 °F SCT_MAX1 115 SCT.L Minimum Condenser Temp 40 - 90 °F SCT_MIN7 72 DG.A1 A1 is Digital Scroll Yes/No DIGCMPA1 No MC.A1 A1 Min Digital Capacity 10 - 100 % MINCAPA1 50 DS.AP Dig Scroll Adjust Delta 0 -100 % DSADJPCT 100 DS.AD Dig Scroll Adjust Delay 15 - 60 sec DSADJDLY 20 DS.RP Dig Scroll Reduce Delta 0 - 100 % DSREDPCT 6 DS.RD Dig Scroll Reduce Delay 15 - 60 sec DSREDDLY 30 DS.RO Dig Scroll Reduction OAT 70 - 120 °F DSREDOAT 95 DS.MO Dig Scroll Max Only OAT 70 - 120 °F DSMAXOAT 105 MLV Min Load Valve Enable Enable/ Disable MLV_ENAB Disable H.SST Hi SST Alert Delay Time 5 - 30 min HSSTTIME 10 RR.VF Rev Rotation Verified? Yes/No REVR_VER No CS.HP Use CSBs for HPS Detect? Yes/No CSBHPDET Yes

EXV.C EXV CIRCUIT CONFIGS EX.SA Cir. EXV Start Algorithm 0 - 1 EXV_STAL 1 SH.SP EXV Superheat Setpoint 5 - 40 °F SH_SP 12.0 ST.SH Cir. EXV Startup SH SP 1 - 10 °F SH_STSP 3.0 SH.DB EXV Superheat Deadband 0 - 2 °F SH_DB 0.5 MOP.S Max Oper. Pressure SP 40 - 120 psig MOP_SP 112 CS.DE EXV Cir Start Delay Secs 10 - 240 sec EXVCSDLY 180 CS.PD EXV Cir PreMove Dly Secs 0 - 30 sec EXVCPDLY 0 EX.MN Comp. Cir. Exv. Min Pos% 0 - 100 % CC_XMPOS 20.0 EX.MC Comp Cir EXV Mn Strt Pos 0 - 100 % EXV_CSMP 40.0

E.PID EXV PID CONFIGS EX.RR EXV PID Run Rate 5 - 120 sec EXV_RATE 5 EX.PG EXV PID Prop. Gain 0 - 5 EXV_PG 0.15 EX.TI EXV Integration Time 0.5 - 60 EXV_TI 12.0 EX.FG %EXV Move on Cir. Stg Up 0 - 100 % EXV_FF_G 15.0 EX.FD %EXV Move on Cir. Stg Dw 0 - 100 % EXV_FF_D 15.0 EX.CF EXV Pre-Move Config 0 - 3 EXVPMCFG 1 EX.PM EXV Pre-Move Delay Secs 0 - 30 sec EXVPMDLY 10 FL.SP EXV SH Flooding Setpoint 0 - 10 °F FL_SP 6.0 FL.OV Flooding Override Pct. –10 - –1 % FL_OV –4.0 FL.OC Flood Ovrde Press Cutoff 0 - 1000 psig FL_ODPC 600.0 FL.OD Flooding Override Delay 0 - 255 sec FL_OD 0 EX.SL EXV Init Pos Slope –100 - 100 EXV_SLP –1.0 EX.IN EXV Init Pos Intercept –200 - 200 EXV_INT 110.0 EX.HO Hmzr Oil Ret Flood Ovrde 0 - 2 EXV_HORF 0 EX.SM EXV Smoothing Algorithm 0 - 1 EXV_SMAL 1

DP.OC DP OVERRIDE CONFIGS DP.RS DP Rate of Change Set 2 - 15 °psig DP_RC_ST 10 DP.RC DP Rate of Change Clr 0 - 5 °psig DP_RC_CL 1 DP.L1 DP Override Limit 1 400 - 450 psig DP_OD_L1 400 DP.L2 DP Override Limit 2 480 - 550 psig DP_OD_L2 500 DP.TO DP Override Timeout 6-150 sec DP_OD_TO 90 DP.OR DP Override Percent 0-15 % DP_OD_PT 10

If (rate after) is less than (rate prior minus 1.25), alarm A140 is generated. This alarm will disable mechanical cooling and will require a manual reset.

It is important to note that in Service Test mode reverse rotation is checked on every compressor start.

Once it has been verified that power to the unit and compressors has been applied correctly and the compressors start up normally, this configuration can be set to YES to disable the reverse rotation check.

Use CSBs for HPS detect? (

CS.HP) — On units with multi-

ple compressors running on a circuit, the Current Sensor

Boards are used to help detect a High Pressure Switch trip. Set-

L.H.OF DMDLHOFF

L.H.ON DMDLHON

V.C. ON VAVOCON

V.C. OF VAVOCOFF

OHSP

Fig. 8 —VAV Occupied Period Trip Logic

a48-8414

ting this configuration to NO disables this additional High Pressure switch trip detection.

COOL MODE SELECTION PROCESS — The N Series ComfortLink controls offer three distinct methods by which they may select a cooling mode.

1. Thermostat (C.TYP=3): The thermostat does not depend upon the state of occupancy or temperature and the modes are called out directly by the discrete inputs (In-

puts



STATY1 and Y2).

2. VAV cooling types (C.TYP=1 and 2) are called out in the occupied period (Operating Modes



MODE



OCC=ON).

3. VAV cooling types (C.TYP=1 and 2) are called out in the unoccupied period (Operating Modes



MODE



OCC=OFF). They are also used for space sensor control types (C.TYP=4) in both the occupied and unoccupied periods.

This section is devoted to the process of cooling mode

determination for the three types outlined above. VAV Cool Mode Selection during the Occupied Period

(C.TYP = 1,2 and Operating ModesMODEOCC =ON) — There is no difference in the selection of a cooling mode for either VAV-RAT or VAV-SPT in the occupied period. The actual selection of a cool mode, for both control types, is based upon the controlling return-air temperature (Te mp e ra t u re s



AIR.TCTRLR.TMP). Typically this is the same as the return air temperature thermistor (Te m pe r at u re s



AIR.T RAT)

except when under CCN Linkage. Cool Mode Determination — If the machine control type

(Configuration



UNITC.TYP) = 1 (VAV-RAT) or 2 (VAV-

SPT) and the control is occupied (Operating

Modes



MODEOCC=ON), then the unit will not follow

the occupied cooling set point (OCSP). Instead, the control will follow two offsets in the determination of an occupied VAV cooling mode (Setpoints

points



V. C . O F ), applying them to the low-heat off trip point



V. C . O N and Set-

and comparing the resulting temperature to the controlling return temperature (R.TMP).

The Setpoints

Setpoints



V. C . O N (VAV cool mode on offset) and

V. C . O F (VAV cool mode off offset) offsets are

used in conjunction with the low heat mode off trip point to determine when to bring cooling on and off and in enforcing a true “vent” mode between heating and cooling. See Fig. 8. The occupied cooling set point is not used in the determination of the cool mode. The occupied cooling set point is used for supply air reset only.

The advantage of this offset technique is that the control can safely enforce a vent mode without worrying about crossing set points. Even more importantly, under CCN linkage, the occupied heating set point may drift up and down and as such this technique of using offsets ensures a guaranteed separation in degrees F between the calling out of a heating or cooling mode at all times.

VAV Occupied Cool Mode Evaluation Configuration — There are VAV occupied cooling offsets under Setpoints.

NOTE: There is a sub-menu at the local display (Run Status



TRIP) that allows the user to see the exact trip points for both the heating and cooling modes without having to calculate them. Refer to the Cool Mode Diagnostic Help section on page 52 for more information.

To enter into a VAV Occupied Cool mode, the controlling temperature must rise above [OHSP minus L.H.ON plus L.H.OF plus V. C . O N ].

To exit out of a VAV Occupied Cool Mode, the controlling temperature must fall below [OHSP minus L.H.ON plus L.H.OF plus V. C . O N minus V. C . O F ].

NOTE: With vent mode, it is possible to exit out of a cooling mode during the occupied period if the return-air temperature drops low enough. When supply-air temperature reset is not configured, this capability will work to prevent over-cooling the space during the occupied period.

Supply Air Set Point Control and the Staging of Compressors

— Once the control has determined that a cooling mode is in effect, the cooling control point (Run Status



CL.C.P) is calculated and is based upon the supply air set



VIEW

point (SetpointsSASP) plus any supply air reset being applied (Inputs



RSETSA.S.R).

Refer to the SumZ Cooling Algorithm section on page 52 for a discussion of how the N Series ComfortLink controls manage the staging of compressors to maintain supply-air temperature.

VAV Cool Mode Selection during the Unoccupied Period (C.TYP = 1,2; Operating ModesMODEOCC=OFF) and Space Sensor Cool Mode Selection (C.TYP=4) — The machine control types that utilize this technique of mode selection are:

• C.TYP = 1 (VAV-RAT) in the unoccupied period

• C.TYP = 2 (VAV-SPT) in the unoccupied period

• C.TYP = 4 (SPT-MULTI) in both the occupied and

unoccupied period

These particular control types operate differently than the VAV types in the occupied mode in that there is both a LOW COOL and a HIGH COOL mode. For both of these modes, the control offers two independent set points, Setpoints (for LOW COOL mode) and Setpoints



SA.HI (for HIGH



SA.LO

COOL mode).

The occupied and unoccupied cooling set points can be found under Setpoints.

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS

OCSP Occupied

UCSP Unoccupied

Cool Setpoint

55-80 dF OCSP 75

75-95 dF UCSP 90

CCN

POINT

DEFAULT

The heat/cool set point offsets are found under Configuration

BP

D.LV.T. See Table 30.

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS

V. C .O N VAV Oc c .

V. C .O F VAV Occ .

Cool On Delta

Cool Off Delta

0-25 deltaF VAVOCON 3.5

1-25 deltaF VAVOCOFF 2

CCN

POINT

DEFAULT

H.C.ON

L.C. OF/2

L.C.ON

Cooling Setpoint (OCSP,UCSP)

L.C. OF

Lo Cool End

Hi Cool End

Lo Cool Start

Hi Cool Start

Fig. 9 — Cool Mode Evaluation

Table 30 — Cool/Heat Set Point Offsets Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

D.LV.T COOL/HEAT SETPT. OFFSETS L.H.ON Dmd Level Lo Heat On -1 - 2 ^F DMDLHON 1.5 H.H.ON Dmd Level(+) Hi Heat On 0.5 - 20.0 ^F DMDHHON 0.5 L.H.OF Dmd Level(-) Lo Heat Off 0.5 - 2.0 ^F DMDLHOFF 1 L.C.ON Dmd Level Lo Cool On -1 - 2 ^F DMDLCON 1.5 H.C.ON Dmd Level(+) Hi Cool On 0.5 - 20.0 ^F DMDHCON 0.5 L.C.OF Dmd Level(-) Lo Cool Off 0.5 - 2 ^F DMDLCOFF 1 C.T.LV Cool Trend Demand Level 0.1 - 5 ^F CTRENDLV 0.1 H.T.LV Heat Trend Demand Level 0.1 - 5 ^F HTRENDLV 0.1 C.T.TM Cool Trend Time 30 - 600 sec CTRENDTM 120 H.T.TM Heat Trend Time 30 - 600 sec HTRENDTM 120

Operating modes are under Operating Modes

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE CCN POINT

MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT OCC Currently Occupied ON/OFF MODEOCCP T.C.ST Temp.Compensated Start ON/OFF MODETCST



MODE.

referred to as comfort trending and the configurations of interest are C.T.LV and C.T.TM.

Cool Trend Demand Level (C.T.LV) — This is the change in demand that must occur within the time period specified by C.T.TM in order to hold off a HIGH COOL mode regardless of demand. This is not applicable to VAV control types

Cool Mode Evaluation Logic

— The first thing the control determines is whether the unit is in the occupied mode (OCC) or is in the temperature compensated start mode (T. C. S T). If the unit is occupied or in temperature compensated start mode, the occupied cooling set point (OCSP) is used. For all other modes, the unoccupied cooling set point (UCSP) is used. For further discussion and simplification this will be referred to as the “cooling set point.” See Fig. 9.

(C.TYP=1 and 2) in the occupied period. As long as a LOW COOL mode is making progress in cooling the space, the control will hold off on the HIGH COOL mode. This is especially true for the space sensor machine control type (C.TYP) = 4, because the unit may transition into the occupied mode and see an immediate large cooling demand when the set points change.

Cool Trend Time (C.T.TM) — This is the time period upon which the cool trend demand level (

C.T.LV) operates and may hold off staging or a HIGH COOL mode. This is not applicable to VAV control types (C.TYP=1 and 2) in the occupied period. See the Cool Trend Demand Level section for more details.

Timeguards — In addition to the set points and offsets which determine the trip points for bringing on and bringing off cool modes there is a timeguard which enforces a time delay between the transitioning from a low cool to a high cool mode. This time delay is 8 minutes. There is a timeguard which enforces a time delay between the transitioning from a heat mode to a cool mode. This time delay is 5 minutes.

Supply Air Set Point Control — Once the control has deter- mined that a cooling mode is in effect, the cooling control

Demand Level Low Cool On Offset (L.C.ON) — This is the cooling set point offset added to the cooling set point at which point a Low Cool mode starts.

Demand Level High Cool On Offset (H.C.ON) — This is the cooling set point offset added to the “cooling set point plus L.C.ON” at which point a High Cool mode begins.

Demand Level Low Cool Off Offset (L.C.OF) — This is the cooling set point offset subtracted from “cooling set point plus L.C.ON” at which point a Low Cool mode ends.

NOTE: The “high cool end” trip point uses the “low cool off” (L.C.OF) offset divided by 2.

To enter into a LOW COOL mode, the controlling tempera-

ture must rise above [the cooling set point plus L.C.ON.]

To enter into a HIGH COOL mode, the controlling temperature must rise above [the cooling set point plus L.C.ON plus H.C.ON.]

To exit out of a LOW COOL mode, the controlling temperature must fall below [the cooling set point plus L.C.ON minus L.C.OF.]

To exit out of a HIGH COOL mode, the controlling temperature must fall below [the cooling set point plus L.C.ON minus L.C.OF/2.]

Comfort Trending — In addition to the set points and offsets which determine the trip points for bringing on and bringing off cool modes, there are 2 configurations which work to hold off the transitioning from a low cool to a high cool mode if the space is cooling down quickly enough. This technique is

point (Run Status based upon either Setpoints depending on whether a high or a low cooling mode is in effect, respectively. In addition, if supply air reset is configured, it will also be added to the cooling control point.

Refer to the SumZ Cooling Algorithm section for a discussion of how the N Series ComfortLink controls manage supplyair temperature and the staging of compressors for these control types.

C.TYP

= 3 (Thermostat Cool Mode Selection) — When a thermostat type is selected, the decision making process involved in determining the mode is straightforward. Upon energizing the Y1 input only, the unit HVAC mode will be LOW COOL. Upon the energizing of both Y1 and Y2 inputs, the unit HVAC mode will be HIGH COOL. If just input G is energized the unit HVAC mode will be VENT and the supply fan will run.

Selecting the C.TYP = 3 (TSTAT – MULTI) control type

will cause the control to do the following:

• The control will read both the Configuration

SIZE and ConfigurationUNIT50.HZ configuration parameters to determine the number of cooling stages and the pattern for each stage.

• An HVAC mode equal to LOW COOL will cause the

unit to select the Setpoints to. An HVAC mode equal to HIGH COOL will cause the unit to select the Setpoints to. Supply air reset (if configured) will be added to either the low or high cool set point.



VIEWCL.C.P) is calculated and is



SA.HI or SetpointsSA.LO,



SA.LO set point to control



SA.HI set point to control



UNIT



• The control will utilize the SumZ cooling algorithm and control cooling to a supply air set point. See the section for the SumZ Cooling Algorithm section for information on controlling to a supply air set point and compressor staging.

COOL MODE DIAGNOSTIC HELP — To quickly determine the current trip points for the cooling modes, the Run Status sub-menu at the local display allows the user to view the calculated start and stop points for both the cooling and heating trip points. The following sub-menu can be found at the local display under Run Status



TRIP. See Table 31.

Table 31 — Run Status Mode Trip Helper

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS

TRIP MODE TRIP HELPER UN.C.S Unoccup. Cool Mode Start dF UCCLSTRT UN.C.E Unoccup. Cool Mode End dF UCCL_END OC.C.S Occupied Cool Mode Start dF OCCLSTRT OC.C.E Occupied Cool Mode End dF OCCL_END TEMP Ctl.Temp R.TMP,S.TMP or Zone dF CTRLTEMP OC.H.E Occupied Heat Mode End dF OCHT_END OC.H.S Occupied Heat Mode Start dF OCHTSTRT UN.H.E Unoccup. Heat Mode End dF UCHT_END UN.H.S Unoccup. Heat Mode Start dF UCHTSTRT HVAC the current HVAC MODE String

CCN

POINT

The controlling temperature is “TEMP” and is in the middle

of the table for easy reference. The HVAC mode can also be viewed at the bottom of the table.

For non-linkage applications and VAV control types

(C.TYP = 1 or 2), “TEMP” is the controlling return air temper- ature (R.TMP). For space sensor control, “TEMP” is the controlling space temperature (S.TMP). For linkage applications, “TEMP” is zone temperature: AOZT during occupied periods and AZT during unoccupied periods.

SUMZ COOLING ALGORITHM — The SumZ cooling algorithm is an adaptive PID (proportional, integral, derivative) which is used by the control whenever more than 2 stages of cooling are present (C.TYP = 1,2,3, and 4). This section will describe its operation and define the pertinent parameters. It is generally not necessary to modify parameters in this section. The information is presented primarily for reference and may be helpful for troubleshooting complex operational problems.

The only configuration parameter for the SumZ algorithm is

located at the local display under Configura-

tion



COOLZ.GN. See Table 29.

Capacity Threshold Adjust (

Z.GN) — This configuration affects the cycling rate of the cooling stages by raising or lowering the threshold that capacity must build to in order to add or subtract a stage of cooling.

The cooling algorithm’s run-time variables are located at

the local display under Run Status Current Running Capacity (



COOL. See Table 32.

C.CAP) — This variable repre-

sents the amount of capacity currently running in percent. Current Cool Stage (

CUR.S) — This variable represents the

cool stage currently running. Requested Cool Stage (

REQ.S) — This variable represents the requested cool stage. Cooling relay timeguards in place may prevent the requested cool stage from matching the current cool stage.

Maximum Cool Stages (

MAX.S) — This variable is the max- imum number of cooling stages the control is configured for and capable of controlling.

Active Demand Limit (

DEM.L) — If demand limit is active, this variable will represent the amount of capacity that the control is currently limited to.

Capacity Load Factor (

SMZ) — This factor builds up or down over time and is used as the means of adding or subtracting a cooling stage during run time. It is a normalized representation of the relationship between “Sum” and “Z”. The control will add a stage when SMZ reaches 100 and decrease a stage when SMZ equals -100.

Next Stage EDT Decrease (

ADD.R) — This variable repre- sents (if adding a stage of cooling) how much the temperature should drop in degrees depending on the R.PCT calculation and exactly how much additional capacity is to be added.

ADD.R = R.PCT * (C.CAP — capacity after adding a cooling stage)

For example: If R.PCT = 0.2 and the control would be

adding 20% cooling capacity by taking the next step up,

0.2 times 20 = 4 F (ADD.R) Next Stage EDT Increase (

SUB.R) — This variable repre- sents (if subtracting a stage of cooling) how much the temperature should rise in degrees depending on the R.PCT calculation and exactly how much capacity is to be subtracted.

SUB.R = R.PCT * (C.CAP — capacity after subtracting a cooling stage)

For Example: If R.PCT = 0.2 and the control would be subtracting 30% capacity by taking the next step down, 0.2 times –30 = –6 F (SUB.R)

Rise Per Percent Capacity (

R.PCT) — This is a real time cal- culation that represents the number of degrees of drop/rise across the evaporator coil versus percent of current running capacity.

R.PCT = (MAT – EDT)/ C.CAP Cap Deadband Subtracting (

Y.MIN) — This is a control vari- able used for Low Temp Override (L.TMP) and Slow Change Override (SLOW).

Y.MIN = -SUB.R*0.4375 Cap Deadband Adding (

Y.PLU) — This is a control variable used for High Temp Override (H.TMP) and Slow Change Override (SLOW).

Y.PLU = -ADD.R*0.4375 Cap Threshold Subtracting (

Z.MIN) — This parameter is

used in the calculation of SMZ and is calculated as follows:

Z.MIN = Configuration



COOLZ.GN * (–10 + (4*

(–SUB.R))) * 0.6 Cap Threshold Adding (

Z.PLU) — This parameter is used in the calculation of SMZ and is calculated as follows:

Z.PLU = Configuration



COOLZ.GN * (10 + (4*

(–ADD.R))) * 0.6 High Temp Cap Override (

H.TMP) — If stages of mechani-

cal cooling are on and the error is greater than twice Y. PL U, and the rate of change of error is greater than 0.5F per minute, then a stage of mechanical cooling will be added every 30 seconds. This override is intended to react to situations where the load rapidly increases.

Low Temp Cap Override (

L.TMP) — If the error is less than

twice Y.MIN , and the rate of change of error is less than –0.5F per minute, then a mechanical stage will be removed every 30 seconds. This override is intended to quickly react to situations where the load is rapidly reduced.

Table 32 — Run Status Cool Display

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT WRITE STATUS

COOL COOLING INFORMATION C.CAP Current Running Capacity % CAPTOTAL CUR.S Current Cool Stage COOL_STG REQ.S Requested Cool Stage CL_STAGE MAX.S Maximum Cool Stages CLMAXSTG DEM.L Active Demand Limit % DEM_LIM forcible SUMZ COOL CAP. STAGE CONTROL SMZ Capacity Load Factor -100 – +100 SMZ ADD.R Next Stage EDT Decrease ^F ADDRISE SUB.R Next Stage EDT Increase ^F SUBRISE R.PCT Rise Per Percent Capacity RISE_PCT Y.MIN Cap Deadband Subtracting Y_MINUS Y.PLU Cap Deadband Adding Y_PLUS Z.MIN Cap Threshold Subtracting Z_MINUS Z.PLU Cap Threshold Adding Z_PLUS H.TMP High Temp Cap Override HI_TEMP L.TMP Low Temp Cap Override LOW_TEMP PULL Pull Down Cap Override PULLDOWN SLOW Slow Change Cap Override SLO_CHNG HMZR HUMIDIMIZER CAPC Humidimizer Capacity HMZRCAPC C.EXV Condenser EXV Position COND_EXV B.EXV Bypass EXV Position BYP_EXV RHV Humidimizer 3-Way Valve HUM3WVAL C.CPT Cooling Control Point COOLCPNT EDT Evaporator Discharge Tmp EDT H.CPT Heating Control Point HEATCPNT LAT Leaving Air Temperature LAT

EXVS EXVS INFORMATION A1.EX Circuit A EXV 1 Position XV1APOSP A2.EX Circuit A EXV 2 Position XV2APOSP B1.EX Circuit B EXV 1 Position XV1BPOSP B2.EX Circuit B EXV 2 Position XV2BPOSP SH.A1 Cir A EXV1 Superheat Tmp SH_A1 SH.A2 Cir A EXV2 Superheat Tmp SH_A2 SH.B1 Cir B EXV1 Superheat Tmp SH_B1 SH.B2 Cir B EXV2 Superheat Tmp SH_B2 CTRL EXVS CONTROL INFORMATION C.SHS EXV Superheat Ctrl SP SH_SP_CT C.FLS EXV SH Flooding Ctrl SP FL_SP_CT C.EXP EXV PID Ctrl Prop. Gain EXV_PG_C C.EXT EXV Ctrl Integrat. Time EXV_TI_C C.EXM Cir Strt EXV Mn Ctrl Pos EXCSMP_C

Pull Down Cap Override (

PULL) — If the error from set

point is above 4F, and the rate of change is less than –1F per minute, then pulldown is in effect, and “SUM” is set to 0. This keeps mechanical cooling stages from being added when the error is very large, but there is no load in the space. Pulldown for units is expected to rarely occur, but is included for the rare situation when it is needed. Most likely pulldown will occur when mechanical cooling first becomes available shortly after the control goes into an occupied mode (after a warm unoccupied mode).

Slow Change Cap Override (

SLOW) — With a rooftop unit,

the design rise at 100% total unit capacity is generally around 30 F. For a unit with 4 stages, each stage represents about

7.5F of change to EDT. If stages could reliably be cycled at very fast rates, the set point could be maintained very precisely. Since it is not desirable to cycle compressors more than 6 cycles per hour, slow change override takes care of keeping the PID under control when “relatively” close to set point.

Humidi-MiZer® Capacity

(CAPC) — This variable represents the total reheat capacity currently in use during a HumidiMiZer mode. A value of 100% indicates that all of the discharge gas is being bypassed around the condenser and into the Humidi-MiZer dehumidification/reheat coil (maximum reheat). A value of 0% indicates that all of the flow is going through the condenser before entering the Humidi-MiZer dehumidification/reheat coil (dehum/subcooling mode).

Condenser EXV Position

(C.EXV) — This variable repre-

sents the position of the condenser EXV (percent open). Bypass EXV Position

(B.EXV) — This variable represents

the position of the bypass EXV (percent open).

Humidi-MiZer 3-Way Valve

(RHV) — This variable represents the position of the 3-way valve used to switch the unit into and out of a Humidi-MiZer mode. A value of 0 indicates that the unit is in a standard cooling mode. A value of 1 indicates that the unit has energized the 3-way valve and entered into a Humidi-MiZer mode.

Cooling Control Point

(C.CPT) — Displays the current cooling control point (a target value for air temperature leaving the evaporator coil location). During a Humidi-MiZer mode, this variable will take on the value of the dehumidify cool set point (Configuration



DEHUD.C.SP). Compressors will stage

up or down to meet this temperature. Evaporator Discharge Temperature

(EDT) — Displays the temperature measured between the evaporator coils and the Humidi-MiZer dehumidification/reheat coil. Units configured with Humidi-MiZer system have a thermistor grid installed between these two coils to provide the measurement. This temperature can also be read at Temperatures

Heating Control Point

(H.CPT) — Displays the current heat-



AIR.TCCT.

ing control point for Humidi-MiZer system. During a Reheat mode, this temperature will be either an offset subtracted from return air temperature (D.V.RA) or the Vent Reheat Set Point (D.V.HT). During a Dehumidification mode, this temperature will take on the value of the original cooling control point so that the supply air is reheated just enough to meet the sensible demand in the space. The Humidi-Mizer modulating valves will adjust to meet this temperature set point.

Leaving Air Temperature

(LAT) — Displays the leaving air temperature after the Humidi-MiZer reheat/dehumidification coil.

SumZ Operation

— The SumZ algorithm is an adaptive PID style of control. The PID (proportional, integral, derivative) is programmed within the control and the relative speed of staging can only be influenced by the user through the adjustment of the Z.GN configuration, described in the reference section. The capacity control algorithm uses a modified PID algorithm, with a self adjusting gain which compensates for varying conditions, including changing flow rates across the evaporator coil.

Previous implementations of SumZ made static assumptions about the actual size of the next capacity jump up or down. This control uses a “rise per percent capacity” technique in the calculation of SumZ, instead of the previous “rise per stage” method. For each jump, up or down in capacity, the control will know beforehand the exact capacity change brought on. Better overall staging control can be realized with this technique.

SUM Calculation — The PID calculation of the “SUM” is evaluated once every 80 seconds.

SUM = Error + “SUM last time through” + (3 * Error Rate)

Where: SUM = the PID calculation Error = EDT – Cooling Control Point Error Rate = Error – “Error last time through” NOTE: “Error” is clamped between –10 and +50 and “Error

rate” is clamped between –5 and +5.

This “SUM” will be compared against the “Z” calculations in determining whether cooling stages should be added or subtracted.

Z Calculation — For the “Z” calculation, the control attempts to determine the entering and the leaving-air temperature of the evaporator coil and based upon the difference between the two during mechanical cooling, determines whether to add or subtract a stage of cooling. This is the adaptive element.

The entering-air temperature is referred to as MAT (mixed-air temperature) and the leaving-air temperature of the evaporator coil is referred to as EDT (evaporator discharge temperature). They are found at the local display under the

Temperatures



CTRL sub-menu.

The main elements to be calculated and used in the calculation of SumZ are:

1) the rise per percent capacity (R.PCT)

2) the amount of expected rise for the next cooling stage

addition

3) the amount of expected rise for the next cooling stage

subtraction

The calculation of “Z” requires two variables, Z.PLU used when adding a stage and Z.MIN used when subtracting a stage.

They are calculated with the following formulas:

Z.PLU = Z.GN * (10 + (4*(–ADD.R))) * 0.6 Z.MIN = Z.GN * (–10 + (4*(–SUB.R))) * 0.6

Where: Z.GN = configuration used to modify the threshold levels used

for staging (Configuration



COOLZ.GN)

ADD.R = R.PCT * (C.CAP – capacity after adding a cooling

stage) SUB.R = R.PCT * (C.CAP – capacity after subtracting a cool-

ing stage)

Both of these terms, Z.PLU and Z.MIN, represent a threshold both positive and negative upon which the “SUM” calculation must build up to in order to cause the compressor to stage up or down.

Comparing SUM and Z — The “SUM” calculation is compared against Z.PLU and Z.MIN.

• If “SUM” rises above Z.PLU, a cooling stage is added.

• If “SUM” falls below Z.MIN, a cooling stage is subtracted. There is a variable called SMZ which is described in the

reference section and which can simplify the task of watching the demand build up or down over time. It is calculated as follows:

If SUM is positive: SMZ = 100*(SUM/Z.PLU) If SUM is negative: SMZ = 100*(SUM/Z.MIN)

Mixed Air Temperature Calculation (MAT)

— The mixedair temperature is calculated and is a function of the economizer position. Additionally there are some calculations in the control which can zero in over time on the relationship of return and outside air as a function of economizer position. There are two configurations which relate to the calculation of “MAT.” These configurations can be located at the local display under

Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION MAT.S MAT Calc Config 0 - 2 MAT_SEL 1 MAT.R Reset MAT Table



UNIT.

Entries?

CCN

POINT

Yes/No MATRESET No

DEFAULTS

MAT Calc Config (MAT.S) — This configuration gives the user three options in the processing of the mixed-air temperature (MAT) calculation:

• MAT.S = 0

There will be no MAT calculation.

• MAT.S = 1

The control will attempt to learn MAT over time. Any time the system is in a vent mode and the economizer stays at a particular position for long enough, MAT = EDT. Using this, the control has an internal table whereby it can more closely determine the true MAT value.

• MAT.S = 2

The control will stop learning and use whatever the control has already learned. Using this setting infers that the control has spent some time set to MAT.S = 1.

First set MAT.S = 1. Then go into the Service Test mode, turn on the fan and open the economizer to a static position for 5 minutes. Move to several positions (20%,40%,60%,80%). It is important that the difference between return and outside temperature be greater than 5 degrees. (The greater the delta, the better). When done, set MAT.S = 2 and the system has been commissioned.

Reset MAT Table Entries? (MAT.R) — This configuration allows the user to reset the internally stored MAT learned configuration data back to the default values. The defaults are set to a linear relationship between the economizer damper position and OAT and RAT in the calculation of MAT.

SumZ Overrides

— There are a number of overrides to the

SumZ algorithm which may add or subtract stages of cooling.

• High Temp Cap Override (H.TMP)

• Low Temp Cap Override (L.TMP)

• Pull Down Cap Override (PULL)

• Slow Change Cap Override (SLOW) Economizer Trim Override

— The unit may drop stages of cooling when the economizer is performing free cooling and the configuration Configuration



ECONE.TRM is set to

Yes. The economizer controls to the same supply air set point as mechanical cooling does for SumZ when E.TRM = Yes. This allows for much tighter temperature control as well as cutting down on the cycling of compressors.

For a long cooling session where the outside-air temperature may drop over time, there may be a point at which the economizer has closed down far enough were the unit could

remove a cooling stage and open up the economizer further to make up the difference.

Mechanical Cooling Lockout (

ConfigurationCOOL



MC.LO) — This configuration allows a configurable outside- air temperature set point below which mechanical cooling will be completely locked out.

DEMAND LIMIT CONTROL — Demand Limit Control may override the cooling algorithm and clamp or shed cooling capacity during run time. The term Demand Limit Control refers to the restriction of the machine capacity to control the amount of power that a machine will use. Demand limit control is intended to interface with an external Loadshed Device either through CCN communications, external switches, or 4 to 20 mA input.

The control has the capability of loadshedding and limiting

in 3 ways:

• Two discrete inputs tied to configurable demand limit set point percentages.

• An external 4 to 20 mA input that can reset capacity back linearly to a set point percentage.

• CCN loadshed functionality.

NOTE: It is also possible to force the demand limit variable (Run Status



COOLDEM.L).

To use Demand Limiting, select the type of demand limiting

to use. This is done with the Demand Limit Select configuration (Configuration

BP

DMD.LDM.L.S).

To view the current demand limiting currently in effect,

look at Run Status



COOLDEM.L.

The configurations associated with demand limiting can be

viewed at the local display at Configuration

BP

DMD.L.

See Table 33. Demand Limit Select (

DM.L.S) — This configuration deter-

mines the type of demand limiting.

• 0 = NONE — Demand Limiting not configured.

• 1 = 2 SWITCHES — This will enable switch input demand limiting using the switch inputs connected to the CEM board. Connections should be made to TB202 terminals 1,2,3, and 4.

• 2 = 4 to 20 mA — This will enable the use of a remote 4 to 20 mA demand limit signal. The CEM module must be used. The 4 to 20 mA signal must come from an externally sourced controller and should be connected to TB202 terminals 10 and 11.

• 3 = CCN LOADSHED — This will allow for loadshed and red lining through CCN communications.

Two-Switch Demand Limiting (DM.L.S = 1) — This type of demand limiting utilizes two discrete inputs:

• Demand Limit Switch 1 Setpoint (D.L.S1) — Dmd Limit Switch Setpoint 1 (0 to 100% total capacity)

• Demand Limit 2 Setpoint (D.L.S2) — Dmd Limit Switch Setpoint 2 (0 to 100% total capacity)

The state of the discrete switch inputs can be found at the lo-

cal display:

Inputs



GEN.IDL.S1

Inputs



GEN.IDL.S2

The following table illustrates the demand limiting (Run

Status



COOLDEM.L) that will be in effect based on the

logic of the applied switches:

Switch Status Run StatusCOOLDEM.L = 1 Inputs



GEN.IDL.S1 = OFF



Inputs Inputs

InputsGEN.IDL.S2 = OFF Inputs

Inputs Inputs

Inputs

GEN.IDL.S2 = OFF



GEN.IDL.S1= ON



GEN.IDL.S1= ON



GEN.IDL.S2 = ON



GEN.IDL.S1= OFF



GEN.IDL.S2 = ON

100%

ConfigurationDMD.LD.L.S1



Configuration

DMD.LD.L.S2



DMD.LD.L.S2

4-20 mA Demand Limiting (DM.L.S = 2) — If the unit has been configured for 4 to 20 mA demand limiting, then the

Inputs



4-20DML.M value is used to determine the

amount of demand limiting in effect (Run Sta-

tus



COOLDEM.L). The Demand Limit at 20 mA

(D.L.20) configuration must be set. This is the configured demand limit corresponding to a 20 mA input (0 to 100%).

The value of percentage reset is determined by a linear

interpolation from 0% to “D.L.20”% based on the Inputs



4-20DML.M input value.

The following examples illustrate the demand limiting

(Run Status



COOLDEM.L) that will be in effect based on

amount of current seen at the 4 to 20 mA input, DML.M.

D.L.20 = 80% D.L.20 = 80% D.L.20 = 80% DML.M = 4mA DML.M = 12 mA DML.M = 20mA DEM.L = 100% DEM.L = 90% DEM.L = 80%

CCN Loadshed Demand Limiting (DM.L.S = 3) — If the unit has been configured for CCN Loadshed Demand Limiting, then the demand limiting variable (Run Status



COOL



DEM.L) is controlled via CCN commands.

The relevant configurations for this type of demand limiting

are: Loadshed Group Number (SH.NM) — CCN Loadshed Group

number Loadshed Demand Delta (SH.DL) — CCN Loadshed

Demand Delta Maximum Loadshed Time (SH.TM) — CCN Maximum

Loadshed time

The Loadshed Group Number (SH.NM) corresponds to the loadshed supervisory device that resides elsewhere on the CCN network and broadcasts loadshed and redline commands to its associated equipment parts. The SH.NM variable will default to zero which is an invalid group number. This allows the loadshed function to be disabled until configured.

Upon reception of a redline command, the machine will be prevented from starting if it is not running. If it is running, then DEM.L is set equal to the current running cooling capacity (Run Status



COOLC.CAP).

Upon reception of a loadshed command, the DEM.L variable is set to the current running cooling capacity (Run Status



COOLC.CAP) minus the configured Loadshed Demand

Delta (SH.DL).

A redline command or loadshed command will stay in effect until a Cancel redline or Cancel loadshed command is received, or until the configurable Maximum Loadshed time (SH.TM) has elapsed.

HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL — Condenser head pressure for the 48/50N Series is managed directly by the ComfortLink controls. The controls are able to cycle up to 9 stages of outdoor fans to maintain acceptable head pressure. Fan stages will be turned on or off in reaction to discharge pressure sensors with the pressure converted to the corresponding saturated condensing temperature.

An option to allow fan speed control (Motormaster

) on the

first stage is configured by setting Configura-

tion



COOLM.M = Yes.

There are five configurations provided for head pressure control that can be found at the local display:

Configuration



COOLM.M (MotorMaster enable)



M.PIDSCT.H (Maximum Condensing

Tem p)

Configuration



M.PIDSCT.L (Minimum Condensing

Tem p)

There are up to four outputs provided to control head

pressure:

Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs



FA NSCDF.1 — Condenser Fan Output 1



FA NSCDF.2 — Condenser Fan Output 2



FA NSCDF.3 — Condenser Fan Output 3



FA NSCDF.4 — Condenser Fan Output 4



FA NSCDF.5 — Condenser Fan Output 5

The specific staging sequence for a unit depends on the 3 factors: the unit size (tonnage), which refrigeration circuits are currently operating, and whether or not MotorMaster is en-

The condenser fan output controls outdoor fan contactors and outdoor fans for each unit tonnage as shown in Fig. 10. Each stage of fans is also shown. The ComfortLink controller adds or subtracts stages of fans based on SCT.H and SCT.L. When the SCT rises above SCT.H, a fan stage will be added. The ComfortLink controller will continue to add a fan stage every 10 seconds thereafter if the SCT remains above SCT.H. If SCT rises above 130 F, the controller will turn on the maximum fan stages for the unit. When the SCT drops below the SCT.L, a fan stage will be subtracted. The ComfortLink con- troller will continue to drop a fan stage every 2 minutes thereafter if the SCT remains below SCT.L.

abled. See Fig. 10-13 for fan staging sequencing.

Table 33 — Demand Limit Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

DMD.L DEMAND LIMIT CONFIG. DM.L.S Demand Limit Select 0 - 3 DMD_CTRL 0 D.L.20 Demand Limit at 20 ma 0 - 100 % DMT20MA 100 SH.NM Loadshed Group Number 0 - 99 SHED_NUM 0 SH.DL Loadshed Demand Delta 0 - 60 % SHED_DEL 0 SH.TM Maximum Loadshed Time 0 - 120 min SHED_TIM 60 D.L.S1 Demand Limit Sw.1 Setpt. 0 - 100 % DLSWSP1 80 D.L.S2 Demand Limit Sw.2 Setpt. 0 - 100 % DLSWSP2 50

75 Ton Standard Efficiency

Circuit B

Contac tor OFM(s)

Coils

Software Board Conrolled Controlled

A CONDFAN1 MBB Rly 6 OFC1 OFM1

Comp A1 or A2 ON

B CONDFAN2 MBB Rly 5 OFC2 OFM6 Comp B1, B2, or B3 ON

Common CONDFAN3 RCB Rly 1 OFC3 OFM3, 4 Circ uit A or B S CT or OAT

# of Fans ON

Fans ON # of Fans ON Fans ON

Stage 1 OFC1 1 OFM1 Stage 1 OFC2 1 OFM6

Stage 2 OFC1,3 2 OFM1,3,4 Stage 2 OFC2,3 2 OFM3,4,6

Low Ambient Prestart 1 (OAT ≤ 50 F) = Stage 1

Low Ambient Prestart 2 (50 F < OAT < 70 F) = Stage 2

Circuit A

High Ambient Prestart (OAT ≥ 70 F) = St age 2

Coils

High Saturated Condensing Temp (SCT>130) = Stage 2

Stage down allowed if SCT<SCT_MIN

Stage up allowed if SCT_MAX<SCT<130

Current st age if SCT_MIN<SCT<SCT_MAX

75 Ton High Efficiency

Circuit B

Contac tor OFM(s)

Coils

Software Board Conrolled Controlled

A CONDFAN1 MBB Rly 6 OFC1 OFM2

B CONDFAN2 MBB Rly 5 OFC2 OFM5

Common CONDFAN3 RCB Rly 1 OFC3 OFM1, 6

Common CONDFAN4 RCB Rly 2 OFC4 OFM3, 4

# of Fans ON

Fans ON # of Fans ON Fans ON

Stage 1 OFC1 1 OFM2 Stage 1 OFC2 1 OFM5

Stage 2 OFC1,3 2 OFM1,2,6 Stage 2 OFC2,3 2 OFM1,5,6

Stage 3 OFC1,3,4 3 OFM1,2,3,4,6 Stage 3 OFC2,3,4 3 OFM1,3,4,5,6

Circuit A

Low Ambient Prestart 1 (OAT ≤ 50 F) = Stage 1

Coils

Low Ambient Prestart 2 (50 F < OAT < 70 F) = Stage 2

High Ambient Prestart (OAT ≥ 70 F) = St age 3

High Saturated Condensing Temp (SCT>130) = Stage 3

Stage down allowed if SCT<SCT_MIN

Stage up allowed if SCT_MAX<SCT<130

Current st age if SCT_MIN<SCT<SCT_MAX

Allow Fan Staging if OAT < 70 F and:

Logic

Circuit

Controlling Output

Circuit

Controlling Output

Logic

Comp A1 or A2 ON

Comp B1, B2, or B3 ON

Circuit A or B SCT or OAT

Circu it A

Circu it A Circu it B

Circu it B

Allow Fan Staging if OAT < 70 F and:

POWER

BOX

POWER

BOX

Fig. 10 — 75 Ton Unit Condenser Fan Staging Sequence

a48-8696

LEGEND

MM — Motormaster

OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

OFC — Outdoor Fan Contactor

OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor

90-105 Ton Standard Efficiency (identic al to 75 Ton High Efficiency)

Circuit B

Contact or OFM(s)

Coils

Software Board Conrolled Controlled

A CONDFAN1 MBB Rly 6 OFC1 OFM2 Comp A1, A2, or A3 ON

B CONDFAN2 MBB Rly 5 OFC2 OFM5 Comp B1, B2, or B3 ON

Common CONDFA N3 RCB Rly 1 OF C3 OFM1,6 Circ uit A or B SCT or OA T

Common CONDFA N4 RCB Rly 2 OF C4 OFM3,4 Circ uit A or B SCT or OA T

# of Fans ON

Fans ON # of Fans ON Fans ON

Stage 1 OFC1 1 OFM2 Stage 1 OFC2 1 OFM5

Stage 2 OFC1,3 2 OFM1,2,6 St age 2 OFC2,3 2 OFM1,5, 6

Stage 3 OFC1,3,4 3 OFM1,2, 3,4, 6 Stage 3 OFC2,3,4 3 OFM1,3, 4,5,6

Low Ambient Prestart 1 (OA T ≤ 50F) = Stage 1

Circuit A

Low Ambient Prestart 2 (50F < OAT < 70F) = Stage 2

Coils

High Ambient Pres tart (OAT ≥ 70F) = St age 3

High Saturated Condensing Temp (SCT>130) = Stage 3

Stage down allowed if SCT<SCT_MIN

Stage up allowed if SCT_MAX<SCT<130

Current st age if SCT_MIN<SCT<SCT_MAX

Circuit B

Coils

90-105 Ton High Efficiency (identic al to 150 Ton Standard Efficiency)

Contact or OFM(s)

Software Board Conrolled Controlled

A CONDF AN1 MBB Rly 6 OFC1 OFM2

Common CONDFA N2 MB B Rl y 5 OFC2 OFM5

B CONDF AN3 RCB Rly 1 OFC3 OF M8

Common CONDFA N4 RCB Rly 2 OF C4 OFM3,7

Common CONDFA N5 RCB Rly 3 OF C5 OFM1,4,6, 9

Circuit A

Coils

Allow Fan Staging if OAT < 70F and:

Se e 150 Ton Sta nda rd Efficiency

Circuit

Controlling Output

Logic

Circu it A

Circu it B

Comp A1, A2, or A3 ON

Comp B1, B2, or B3 ON

Circuit A or B SCT or OAT

Circuit

Controlling Output

Logic

Circuit A or B SCT or OAT

POWER

BOX

POWER

BOX

Fig. 11 — 90, 105 Ton Unit Condenser Fan Staging Sequence

a48-8697

LEGEND

MM — Motormaster

OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

OFC — Outdoor Fan Contactor

OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor

Circuit B

Coils

120 Ton Standard Efficienc y (identical to 75 Ton High Efficiency)

Contact or OFM(s)

Software Board Conrolled Controlled

A CONDFAN1 MBB Rly 6 OFC1 OFM2

B CONDFAN2 MBB Rly 5 OFC2 OFM5

Common CONDFA N3 RCB Rly 1 OF C3 OFM1, 6

Common CONDFA N4 RCB Rly 2 OF C4 OFM3, 4

# of Fans ON

Fans ON # of Fans ON Fans ON

Stage 1 OFC1 1 OFM2 Stage 1 OFC2 1 OFM5

Stage 2 OFC1,3 2 OFM1,2, 6 Stage 2 OFC2, 3 2 OFM1, 5,6

Circuit A Stage 3 OFC1,3,4 3 OFM1,2,3,4,6 St age 3 OFC2,3, 4 3 OFM1, 3,4,5,6

Coils

Low Ambient Prestart 1 (OA T ≤ 50 F) = Stage 1

Low Ambient Prestart 2 (50 F < OAT < 70 F) = S tage 2

High Ambient Pres tart (OAT ≥ 70 F) = Stage 3

High Saturated Condensing Temp (SCT>130) = Stage 3

Stage down allowed if SCT<SCT_MIN

Stage up allowed if SCT_MAX<SCT<130

Circuit B

Current st age if SCT_MIN<SCT<SCT_MAX

Coils

130 Ton Standard Efficiency

120-130 Ton High Efficiency (identic al to 150 Ton Standard Effic iency)

Contact or OFM(s)

Software Board Conrolled Controlled

A CONDFAN1 MBB Rly 6 OFC1 OFM2

Common CONDFAN2 MBB Rly 5 OFC2 OFM5

B CONDFAN3 RCB Rly 1 OFC3 OFM8

Common CONDFA N4 RCB Rly 2 OF C4 OFM3, 7

Common CONDFA N5 RCB Rly 3 OF C5 OFM1, 4,6,9

Circuit A

Coils

Circuit

Controlling Output

Logic

Circuit

Controlling Output

Logic

Comp A1, A2, A3, or A4 ON

Comp B1, B2, B3, or B4 ON

Circuit A or B SCT or OAT

Allow Fan Staging if OAT < 70 F and:

See 150 Ton Standard Efficiency

Circuit A or B SCT or OAT

Comp A1, A2, A3, or A4 ON

Comp B1, B2, B3, or B4 ON

Circuit A or B SCT or OAT

Circu it A

Circu it B

Circuit A or B SCT or OAT

POWER

BOX

POWER

BOX

Fig. 12 — 120-130 Ton Unit Condenser Fan Staging Sequence

a48-8699

LEGEND

MM — Motormaster

OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

OFC — Outdoor Fan Contactor

OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor

150 Ton Standard Efficienc y

Circuit B

Contac tor OFM(s)

Coils

Software Board Conrolled Controlled

A CONDFAN1 MBB Rly 6 OFC1 OFM2

Common CONDFA N2 M BB Rly 5 OFC2 OFM5

B CONDFAN3 RCB Rly 1 OFC3 OFM8

Common CONDFA N4 RCB Rly 2 OF C4 OFM3, 7

Common CONDFA N5 RCB Rly 3 OF C5 OFM1, 4,6,9

# of Fans ON

Fans ON # of Fans ON Fans ON

Stage 1 OFC2 0.5 OFM5 Stage 1 OFC2 0.5 OFM5

Stage 2 OFC1 1 OFM2 Stage 2 OFC3 1 OFM 8

Stage 3 OFC1,2 1.5 OFM2,5 Stage 3 OFC2,3 1.5 OFM5,8

Stage 4 OFC5 2 OFM1,4,6,9 Stage 4 OFC5 2 OFM1,4,6,9

Stage 5 OFC1,2,4 2.5 OFM2,3,5,7 Stage 5 OFC2,3,4 2.5 OFM3,5,8, 9

Stage 6 OFC1,5 3 OFM1,2,4,6,9 Stage 6 OFC2,5 3 OFM1,4,6,8,9

Circuit A

Stage 7 OFC1,2,5 3.5 OFM1,2,4,5,6,9 Stage 7 OFC2,3,5 3.5 OFM1,4,5,6,8,9

Coils

Stage 8 OFC1,4,5 4 OFM1,2,3,4,6,7,9 Stage 8 OFC2,4,5 4 OFM1,3,4,6,7,8,9

Stage 9 OFC1,2,4,5 4.5 OFM1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9 Stage 9 OFC2,3,4,5 4.5 OFM1,3,4,5,6,7,8,9

Low Ambient Prestart 1 (OAT ≤ 50 F) = Stage 1 # of Fans ON

Fans ON

Low Ambient Prestart 2 (50 F < OAT < 70 F) = S tage 3 Stage 1 OFC2 1 OFM5

High Ambient Pres tart (OAT ≥ 70 F) = Stage 7/9 Stage 2 OFC1,3 2 OFM2,8

High Saturated Condensing Temp (SCT>130) = Stage 7/9 Stage 3 OFC1,2,3 3 OFM2, 5,8

Stage 4 OFC5 4 OFM1,4,6,9

Stage down allowed if SCT<SCT_MIN Stage 5 OFC2,5 5 OFM1,4,5,6,9

Stage up allowed if SCT_MAX<SCT<130 Stage 6 OFC2,4,5 7 OFM1, 3,4, 5,6,7,9

Current stage if SCT_MIN<SCT<SCT_MAX Stage 7 OFC1,2,3,4,5 9 OFM1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9

# of Fans ON

Fans ON # of Fans ON Fans ON

Stage 1 OFC1 1 OFM2 Stage 1 OFC3 1 OFM 8

Stage 2 OFC1,2 1.5 OFM2,5 Stage 2 OFC2,3 1.5 OFM5,8

Stage 3 OFC1,2,4 2.5 OFM2,3,5,7 Stage 3 OFC2,3,4 2.5 OFM3,5,8, 9

Stage 4 OFC1,5 3 OFM1,2,4,6,9 Stage 4 OFC2,5 3 OFM1,4,6,8,9

Stage 5 OFC1,2,5 3.5 OFM1,2,4,5,6,9 Stage 5 OFC2,3,5 3.5 OFM1,4,5,6,8,9

Stage 6 OFC1,4,5 4 OFM1,2,3,4,6,7,9 Stage 6 OFC2,4,5 4 OFM1,3,4,6,7,8,9

Stage 7 OFC1,2,4,5 4.5 OFM1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9 Stage 7 OFC2,3,4,5 4.5 OFM1,3,4,5,6,7,8,9

Low Ambient Prestart 1 (OAT ≤ 50 F) = Stage 1 # of Fans ON

Fans ON

Low Ambient Prestart 2 (50F < OAT < 70 F) = Stage 2 St age 1 OFC1,3 2 OFM2,8

High Ambient Pres tart (OAT ≥ 70 F) = Stage 6/7 Stage 2 OFC1,2,3 3 OFM2,5,8

High Saturated Condensing Temp (SCT>130) = Stage 6/7 Stage 3 OFC1,3,4 4 OFM2,3,7,8

Stage 4 OFC1,2,3, 4 5 OFM2,3,4,7,8

Stage down allowed if SCT<SCT_MIN Stage 5 OFC1,3,5 6 OFM1,2,4,6,8, 9

Stage up allowed if SCT_MAX<SCT<130 Stage 6 OFC1,2,3,4, 5 9 OFM1, 2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,9

Current st age if SCT_MIN<SCT<SCT_MAX

Circuit A or B SCT or OAT

Allow Fan Staging if OAT < 70 F and:

Circu it A, M.M.=NO

Circuit B, M.M.=NO

Common, M.M.=NO

Circuit B, M.M.=YES

Common, M.M.=YES Circu it A, M.M.=YES

Allow Fan Staging if OAT < 70 F and:

Circuit

Controlling Output

Logic

Comp A1, A2, A3, or A4 ON

Comp B1, B2, B3, or B4 ON

POWER

BOX

Fig. 13 — 150 Ton Unit Condenser Fan Staging Sequence

a48-8700

LEGEND

MM — Motormaster

OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

OFC — Outdoor Fan Contactor

OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor

When a condenser fan output is common to both refrigeration circuits, in other words when the fan(s) will affect both circuit A and circuit B, the following logic is used: in order to add a fan stage, the SCT of either circuit must be above SCT.H for 30 seconds and in order to subtract a stage, the SCT of both circuits must be below SCT.L for 30 seconds.

Whenever the outdoor ambient temperature (OAT), is above 70 F, the maximum stage will always be on when the compressors are on.

On the initial start-up of a circuit, the condenser fans will start 5 seconds prior to the compressor starting in order to ensure proper head pressure of the compressor immediately at start-up. After the compressor starts, the normal head pressure routine will begin 30 seconds after the condenser fan pre-start. What stage fans starts depends on the outdoor ambient temperature. The three situations are:

OAT <

50 F 50 F < OAT < 70 F OAT >

70 F See Fig. 10-13 for what stage of fans starts for each

scenario. ECONOMIZER INTEGRATION WITH MECHANICAL

COOLING — When the economizer is able to provide free cooling (Run Status cooling may be delayed or even held off indefinitely.

NOTE: Once mechanical cooling has started, this delay logic is no longer relevant.

Multi-Stage Cooling Economizer Mechanical Cooling Delay — This type of mechanical cooling delay is relevant to the following machine control types:

C.TYP = 1 VAV-RAT C.TYP = 2 VAV-SPT C.TYP = 3 TSTAT-MULTI C.TYP = 4 SPT-MULTI

If the economizer is able to provide free cooling at the start

of a cooling session, the mechanical cooling algorithm (SumZ), checks the economizer’s current position (Run Status



ECONECn.P) and compares it to the economizer’s

maximum position (ConfigurationECONEC.MX) – 5%. Once the economizer has opened beyond this point a 150 second timer starts. If the economizer stays beyond this point for

2.5 minutes continuously, the mechanical cooling algorithm is allowed to start computing demand and stage compressors and unloaders.



ECONACTV = YES), mechanical

Heating Control — The N Series ComfortLink controls

offers control for six different types of heating systems to satisfy general space heating requirements: 2-stage gas heat, 2-stage electric heat, SCR (modulating) electric heat, steam heat, modulating gas heat, and hydronic heat. Heating control also provides tempering and reheat functions. These functions are discussed in separate sections. Reheat is discussed under Dehumidification function on page 87.

Variable air volume (VAV) type applications (C.TYP = 1 or

2) require that the space terminal positions be commanded to open to minimum heating positions when gas or electric heat systems are active, to provide for the unit heating system’s Minimum Heating Airflow rate.

Also, for VAV applications, the heat interlock relay (HIR)

function provides the switching of a control signal intended for use by the VAV terminals. This signal must be used to

command the terminals to open to their Heating Open positions. The HIR is energized whenever the Heating mode is active, an IAQ pre-occupied force is active, or if fire smoke modes, pressurization, or smoke purge modes are active.

Hydronic and steam heating applications that use the unit’s control require the installation of a communicating actuator on the hydronic heating coil’s control valve. This actuator (with or without matching control valve) may be separately shipped for field installation.

All heating systems are available as factory-installed options. The hydronic or steam heating coil may also be fieldsupplied and field-installed; the actuator is still required if unit control will be used to manage this heating sequence.

POST FILTER APPLICATION — Gas heat controls also use an airflow switch when post filter option is installed in unit. Lack of airflow will prevent gas heat from operating.

Electric heat controls add filter temperature switches at the post filters. The filter temperature switches will prevent electric heat from operating when high temperatures are experienced.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — The essential heating configurations located at the local display under Configuration HEAT. See Table 34.

Heating Control Type ( available are selected/configured with this variable.

0 = No Heat

1 = 2 Stage Electric Heat

2 = 2 Stage Gas Heat

3 = Staged Gas Heat or Modulating Gas Heat

4 = Hydronic Heat (Hot Water or Steam)

5 = SCR Electric Heat Heating Supply Air Set Point (

for either modulating gas, SCR electric, or hydronic heat, this is the supply air set point for heating.

Occupied Heating Enable ( only applies when the unit’s control type (Configuration



UNITC.TYP) is configured for 1 (VAV-RAT) or 2 (VAV-

SPT). If the user wants to have the capability of performing heating throughout the entire occupied period, then this configuration needs to be set to “YES.” Most installations do not require this capability, and if heating is installed, it is used to heat the building up in the morning. In this case set OC.EN to “NO.”

NOTE: This unit des not support simultaneous heating and cooling. If significant simultaneous heating and cooling demand is expected, it may be necessary to provide additional heating or cooling equipment and a control system to provide occupants with proper comfort.

MBB Sensor Heat Relocate ( the user additional performance benefit when under CCN Linkage for the 2-stage electric and gas heating types. As twostage heating types do not “modulate” to a supply air set point, no leaving air thermistor is required and none is provided. The evaporator discharge thermistor, which is initially installed upstream of the heater, can be repositioned downstream and the control can expect to sense this heat. While the control does not need this to energize stages of heat, the control can wait for a sufficient temperature rise before announcing a heating mode to a CCN Linkage system (ComfortID™).

If the sensor is relocated, the user will now have the capability to view the leaving-air temperature at all times at

Te mp e ra t ur e s



HT.CF) — The heating control types

HT.SP) — In a low heat mode

OC.EN) — This configuration

LAT.M) — This option allows

AIR.TCTRLLAT.



Table 34 — Heating Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

HEAT HEATING CONFIGURATION HT.CF Heating Control Type 0 - 5 HEATTYPE 0* HT.SP Heating Supply Air Setpt 80 - 120 dF SASPHEAT 85 OC.EN Occupied Heating Enabled Yes/No HTOCCENA No LAT.M MBB Sensor Heat Relocate Yes/No HTLATMON No

SG.CF STAGED HEAT CONFIGS HT.ST Staged Heat Type 0 - 3 HTSTGTYP 0* CAP.M Max Cap Change per Cycle 5 - 45 HTCAPMAX 45* M.R.DB St.Ht DB min.dF/PID Rate 0 - 5 HT_MR_DB 0.5 S.G.DB St.Heat Temp. Dead Band 0 - 5 ^F HT_SG_DB 2 RISE Heat Rise dF/sec Clamp 0.05 - 0.2 HTSGRISE 0.06 LAT.L LAT Limit Config 0 - 20 ^F HTLATLIM 10 LIM.M Limit Switch Monitoring? Yes/No HTLIMMON Yes SW.H.T Limit Switch High Temp 80 - 210 dF HT_LIMHI 170* SW.L.T Limit Switch Low Temp 80 - 210 dF HT_LIMLO 160* HT.P Heat Control Prop. Gain 0 - 1.5 HT_PGAIN 1 HT.D Heat Control Derv. Gain 0 - 1.5 HT_DGAIN 1 HT.TM Heat PID Rate Config 30 - 300 sec HTSGPIDR 90*

HH.CF HYDRONIC HEAT CONFIGS HW.P Hydronic Ctl.Prop. Gain 0 - 1.5 HW_PGAIN 1 HW.I Hydronic Ctl.Integ. Gain 0 - 1.5 HW_IGAIN 1 HW.D Hydronic Ctl.Derv. Gain 0 - 1.5 HW_DGAIN 1 HW.TM Hydronic PID Rate Config 15 - 300 sec HOTWPIDR 90

ACT.C HYDR.HEAT ACTUATOR CFGS. SN.1 Hydronic Ht.Serial Num.1 0 - 9999 HTCL_SN1 0 SN.2 Hydronic Ht.Serial Num.2 0 - 6 HTCL_SN2 0 SN.3 Hydronic Ht.Serial Num.3 0 - 9999 HTCL_SN3 0 SN.4 Hydronic Ht.Serial Num.4 0 - 254 HTCL_SN4 0 C.A.LM Hydr.Ht.Ctl.Ang.Lo Limit 0-90 HTCLCALM 85

*Some defaults are model number dependent.

NOTE: If the user does not relocate this sensor for the 2-stage electric or gas heating types and is under CCN Linkage, then the control will send a heating mode (if present) unconditionally to the linkage coordinator in the CCN zoning system regardless of the leaving-air temperature.

HEAT MODE SELECTION PROCESS — There are two possible heat modes that the control will call out for heating control: HVAC Mode = LOW HEAT and HVAC Mode = HIGH HEAT. These modes will be called out based on control type (C.TYP).

VAV- R AT (

C.TYP = 1) and VAV-SPT (C.TYP = 2) — There is no difference in the selection of a heating mode for either VAV-RAT or VAV-SPT, except that for VAV-SPT, space temperature is used in the unoccupied period to turn on the supply fan for 10 minutes before checking return-air temperature. The actual selection of a heat mode, LOW or HIGH for both control types, will be based upon the controlling return-air temperature.

With sufficient heating demand, there are still conditions that will prevent the unit from selecting a heat mode. First, the unit must be configured for a heat type (Configuration



HEATHT.CF not equal to “NONE”). Second, the unit has a configuration which can enable or disable heating in the occupied period except for a standard morning warmup cycle (Configuration



HEATOC.EN). See descriptions above in

the Setting Up the System section for more information. Tstat-Multi-Stage (

C.TYP = 3) — With thermostat control the W1 and W2 inputs determine whether the HVAC Mode is LOW or HIGH HEAT.

W1 = ON, W2 = OFF: HVAC MODE = LOW HEAT* W2 = ON, W2 = ON: HVAC MODE = HIGH HEAT

*If the heating type is either 2-stage electric or 2-stage gas, the

unit may promote a low heat mode to a high heat mode.

NOTE: If W2 = ON and W1 is OFF, a “HIGH HEAT” HVAC Mode will be called out but an alert (T422) will be generated. See Alarms and Alerts section on page 115.

SPT Multi-Stage (

C.TYP = 4) — The unit is free to select a

heating mode based on space temperature (SPT).

If the unit is allowed to select a heat mode, then the next step is an evaluation of demand versus set point. At this point, the logic is the same as for control types VAV-RAT and VAV-SPT, (C.TYP = 1,2) except for the actual temperature compared against set point. See Temperature Driven Heat Mode Evaluation section below.

TEMPERATURE DRIVEN HEAT MODE EVALUATION — This section discusses the technique for selecting a heating mode based on temperature. Regardless of whether the unit is configured for return air or space temperature the logic is exactly the same. For the rest of this discussion, the temperature in question will be referred to as the controlling temperature.

First, the occupied and unoccupied heating set points under Setpoints must be configured.

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS

OHSP

UHSP

Occupied Heat Setpoint

Unoccupied Heat Setpoint

55-80 dF OHSP 68

40-80 dF UHSP 55

CCN

POINT

DEFAULT

Then, the heat/cool set point offsets under Configura-

tion

BP

Related operating modes are under Operating Modes

D.LV.T should be set. See Table 35.



MODE.

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE CCN POINT

MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT

OCC Currently Occupied ON/OFF MODEOCCP

T.C.ST Temp.Compensated Start ON/OFF MODETCST

The first thing the control determines is whether the unit is in the occupied mode (OCC) or in the temperature compensated start mode (T. C. S T). If the unit is occupied or in temperature compensated start mode, the occupied heating set point (OHSP) is used. In all other cases, the unoccupied heating setpoint (UHSP) is used.

The control will call out a low or high heat mode by comparing the controlling temperature to the heating set point and the heating set point offset. The set point offsets are used as additional help in customizing and tweaking comfort into the building space. See Fig. 14 for an example of offsets.

HEATING SET POINT

Fig. 14 — Heating Offsets

a48-8407

L.H.ON

L.H.OF

67.5 F

L.H.OF/2

H.H.ON

66.0 F

Demand Level Low Heat on Offset (

66.5 F

L.H.ON) — This is the

68.0 F

heating set point offset below the heating set point at which point Low Heat starts.

Demand Level High Heat on Offset (

H.H.ON) — This is the heating set point offset below [the heating set point minus L.H.ON] at which point high heat starts.

Demand Level Low Heat Off Offset (

L.H.OF) — This is the heating set point offset above [the heating set point minus L.H.ON] at which point the Low Heat mode ends.

To enter into a LOW HEAT mode, if the controlling temperature falls below [the heating set point minus L.H.ON], then HVAC mode = LOW HEAT.

To enter into a HIGH HEAT mode, if the controlling temperature falls below [the heating set point minus L.H.ON minus H.H.ON], then HVAC mode = HIGH HEAT.

To get out of a LOW HEAT mode, the controlling temperature must rise above [the heating set point minus L.H.ON plus L.H.OF].

To get out of a HIGH HEAT mode, the controlling temperature must rise above [the heating set point minus L.H.ON plus L.H.OF/2].

The Run Status table in the local display allows the user to see the exact trip points for both the heating and cooling modes without doing the calculations.

Heat Trend Demand Level (

H.T.LV) — This is the change in demand that must be seen within the time period specified by H.T.TM in order to hold off a HIGH HEAT mode regardless of demand. This is not applicable to VAV control types (C.TYP=1 and 2) in the occupied period. This technique has been referred to as “Comfort Trending.” As long as a LOW HEAT mode is making progress in warming the space, the control will hold off on a HIGH HEAT mode. This is relevant for the space sensor machine control types (C.TYP = 4) because the unit may tran- sition into the occupied mode and see an immediate and large heating demand when the set points change.

Heat Trend Time (

H.T.TM) — This is the time period upon which the heat trend demand level (H.T.LV) operates and may work to hold off staging or a HIGH HEAT mode. This is not applicable to VAV control types (C.TYP=1 and 2) in the occupied period. See “Heat Trend Demand Level” section for more details.

Table 35 — Heat/Cool Set Point Offsets

HEAT MODE DIAGNOSTIC HELP — To quickly determine the current trip points for the low and high heat modes, there is a menu in the local display which lets the user quickly view the state of the system. This menu also contains the cool trip points as well. See Table 31 at the local display under Run

Status



TRIP.

The controlling temperature is “TEMP” and is in the middle of the table for easy reference. Also, the “HVAC” mode can be viewed at the bottom of the table.

TWO-STAGE GAS AND ELECTRIC HEAT CONTROL (HT.CF = 1,2) — If the HVAC mode is LOW HEAT:

• If electric heat is configured, then the control will request

the supply fan ON

• If gas heat is configured, then the IGC and IFO (IGC fan

output) controls the supply fan request

• The control will turn on Heat Relay 1 (HS1)

• If evaporator discharge temperature is less than 50 F,

then the control will turn on Heat Relay 2 (HS2)* *The logic for this “low heat” override is that one stage of

heating will not be able to raise the temperature of the supply airstream sufficient to heat the space.

If the HVAC mode is HIGH HEAT:

• If electric heat is configured, then the control will request

the supply fan ON

• If gas heat is configured, then the IGC and IFO output

controls the supply fan request

• The control will turn on Heat Relay 1 (HS1)

• The control will turn on Heat Relay 2 (HS2) HYDRONIC HEATING CONTROL (HT.CF = 4) — Hy-

dronic heating in N Series units refers to a hot water or steam coil controlled by an actuator. This actuator is a communicating actuator and may be field supplied. When Configuration



HEATHT.CF=4, there is a thermistor array called Te m -

peratures



AIR.TCCT, that is connected to the RXB, that

serves as the evaporator discharge temperature (EDT). The leaving-air temperature (LAT) is assigned the thermistor that is normally assigned to EDT and is located at the supply fan housing (Te mp e ra t ur e s



AIR.TSAT).

The configurations for hydronic heating are located at the local displays under Configuration



HEATHH.CF.

See Table 36. Hydronic Heating Control Proportional Gain (

HW.P) — This configuration is the proportional term for the PID which runs in the HVAC mode LOW HEAT.

Hydronic Heating Control Integral Gain (

HW.I) — This configuration is the integral term for the PID which runs in the HVAC mode LOW HEAT.

Hydronic Heating Control Derivative Gain (

HW.D) — This configuration is the derivative term for the PID which runs in the HVAC mode LOW HEAT.

Hydronic Heating Control Run Time Rate (

HW.TM) — This configuration is the PID run time rate which runs in the HVAC mode LOW HEAT.

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

D.LV.T COOL/HEAT SETPT. OFFSETS

L.H.ON Dmd Level Lo Heat On -1 - 2 ^F DMDLHON 1.5

H.H.ON Dmd Level(+) Hi Heat On 0.5 - 2.0 ^F DMDHHON 0.5

L.H.OF Dmd Level(-) Lo Heat Off 0.5 - 2 ^F DMDLHOFF 1 L.C.ON Dmd Level Lo Cool On -1 - 2 ^F DMDLCON 1.5

H.C.ON Dmd Level(+) Hi Cool On 0.5 - 2 ^F DMDHCON 0.5

L.C.OF Dmd Level(-) Lo Cool Off 0.5 - 2 ^F DMDLCOFF 1

C.T.LV Cool Trend Demand Level 0.1 - 5 ^F CTRENDLV 0.1

H.T.LV Heat Trend Demand Level 0.1 - 5 ^F HTRENDLV 0.1 C.T.TM Cool Trend Time 30 - 600 sec CTRENDTM 120 H.T.TM Heat Trend Time 30 - 600 sec HTRENDTM 120

Hydronic Heating Logic

00850 - 30063 - 084 -083

ACTUATOR SERIAL NUMBER

{

NOT

USED

{

SN.1

{

SN.2 SN.3{NOT

USED

{

SN.4

SN.1 = 850 SN.2 = 3 SN.3 = 63 SN.4 = 83

Fig. 15 — Actuator Serial Number Configuration

a48-8507

If the HVAC mode is LOW HEAT:

• The control will command the supply fan on

• The control will modulate the hot water or steam coil actuator to the heating control point (Run Sta-

tus



VIEWHT.C.P). The heating control point for

hydronic heat is the heating supply air set point (Set-

points



SA.HT).

If the HVAC mode is HIGH HEAT:

• The control will command the supply fan on

• The control will command the hot water coil actuator to 100%.

Hydronic Heating PID Process LOW HEAT, then the hydronic heating actuator will modulate to the heating control point (Run Status Control is performed with a generic PID loop where:

Error = Heating Control Point (HT.C.P) – Leaving Air Tem- perature (LAT)

The PID terms are calculated as follows: P = K * HW.P * error

I = K * HW.I * error + “I” last time through D = K * HW.D * (error – error last time through)

Where K = HW.TM/60 to normalize the effect of changing the run time rate.

NOTE: The PID values should be not be modified without approval from Carrier.

Freeze Status Switch Logic ( the freezestat input (FRZ) alarms, indicating that the coil is freezing, normal heat control is overridden and the following actions will be taken:

1. Command the hot water coil actuator to 100%.

2. Command the economizer damper to 0%.

3. Command the supply fan on.

Configuring Hydronic Heat to Communicate Via Actuator Serial Number — Every actuator used in the N Series control system has its own unique serial number. The rooftop control uses this serial number to communicate with the actuator. These serial numbers are programmed at the factory and should not need changing. Should field replacement of an actuator become necessary, it will be required to configure the serial numbers of the new actuator. Four individual numbers make up this serial number and these can be programmed to match the serial number of the actuator in its Hydronic Heating Actuator Configs group, ACT.C (SN.1, SN.2, SN.3, SN.4). See Fig. 15.

NOTE: The serial numbers for all actuators can be found inside the control doors of the unit as well as on the actuator itself. If an actuator is replaced in the field, it is a good idea to

— If the HVAC mode is



VIEWHT.C.P).

InputsGEN.IFRZ.S) — If

Table 36 — Hydronic Heat Configuration

remove the additional peel off serial number sticker on the actuator and cover up the old one inside the control doors.

MODULATING GAS HEAT CONTROL (HT.CF = 3 and HT.ST = 0, 1, 2, or 3) — As an option, the units with gas heat can be equipped with modulating gas heat controls that will provide infinite stages of heat capacity. This is intended for tempering mode and tempering economizer air when in a cooling mode and the dampers are at minimum vent position. Tempering can also be used during a pre-occupancy purge to prevent low temperature air from being delivered to the space. Tempering for staged gas, modulating gas, and hydronic heat will be discussed in its own section. This section will focus on heat mode control, which ultimately is relevant to tempering, minus the consideration of the supply air heating control point.

The modulating gas and SCR electric heat configurations

are located at the local display under Configura-

tion



HEATSG.CF. See Table 37.

SCR ELECTRIC HEAT CONTROL (HT.CF = 5, no req. set HT.ST) — As an option, the units with electric heat can be equipped with modulating SCR electric heater controls that will provide infinite stages of heat capacity. This is intended for tempering mode and tempering economizer air when in a cooling mode and the dampers are at minimum vent position. Tempering can also be used during a pre-occupancy purge to prevent low temperature air from being delivered to the space. Tempering for modulating gas, hydronic and SCR electric heat will be discussed in its own section. This section will focus on heat mode control, which ultimately is relevant to tempering, minus the consideration of the supply air heating control point.

Staged Heat Type ( control as to how many stages and in what order they are staged. Setting HT.ST = 0, 1, 2, or 3 configures the unit for Modulating Gas Heat.

Max Cap Change per Cycle ( tion limits the maximum change in capacity per PID run time cycle.

HT.ST) — This configuration instructs the

CAP.M) — This configura-

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

Table 37 — Staged Heat Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

*Some configurations are model number dependent.

St.Ht DB Min.dF/PID Rate (M.R.DB) — This configuration is a deadband minimum temperature per second rate. See capacity calculation logic on this page for more details.

St.Heat Temp.Dead Band (

S.G.DB) — This configuration is a deadband delta temperature. See capacity calculation logic on this page for more details.

Heat Rise in dF/Sec Clamp (

RISE) — This configuration clamps heat staging up when the leaving-air temperature is rising too fast.

LAT Limit Config (

LAT.L) — This configuration senses when leaving air temperature is outside a delta temperature band around set point and allows staging to react quicker.

Limit Switch Monitoring? (

LIM.M) — This configuration allows the operation of the limit switch monitoring routine. This is always enabled for 48N Series as a limit switch temperature sensor is always present for modulating gas operation. It is not used on SCR electric heat units.

Limit Switch High Temp (

SW.H.T) — This configuration is

the temperature limit above which stages of heat will be shed. Limit Switch Low Temp (

SW.L.T) — This configuration is the temperature limit above which no additional stages of heat will be allowed.

Heat Control Prop. Gain (

HT.P) — This configuration is the proportional term for the PID which runs in the HVAC mode LOW HEAT.

Heat Control Derv. Gain (

HT.D) — This configuration is the derivative term for the PID which runs in the HVAC mode LOW HEAT.

Heat PID Rate Config (

HT.TM) — This configuration is the

PID run time rate. Staged Heating Logic

— If the HVAC mode is HIGH HEAT:

• On 48N units, the supply fan for staged heating is con-

trolled by the integrated gas control (IGC) boards and unless the supply fan is on for a different reason, will be controlled by the IFO. On 50N units, the fan is ON whenever the heat is ON.

• Command all stages of heat ON If the HVAC mode is LOW HEAT:

• On 48N units, the supply fan for modulating gas heating

is controlled by the integrated gas control (IGC) boards and unless the supply fan is on for a different reason, will be controlled by the IGC IFO input. On 50N units, the fan is ON whenever the heat is ON.

• The unit will control stages of heat to the heating control

point (Run Status



VIEWHT.C.P). The heating con-

trol point in a LOW HEAT HVAC mode for staged heat is the heating supply air set point (Setpoints

Staged Heating PID Logic

— The heat control loop is a PID



SA.HT).

design with exceptions, overrides and clamps. Capacity rises and falls based on set point and supply-air temperature. When the ComfortLink control is in Low Heat or Tempering Mode

(HVAC mode), the algorithm calculates the desired heat capacity. The basic factors that govern the controlling technique are:

• how frequently the algorithm is run.

• the amount of proportional and derivative gain applied.

• the maximum allowed capacity change each time this algorithm is run.

• deadband hold-off range when rate is low. This routine is run once every “HT.TM” seconds. Every

time the routine is run, the calculated sum is added to the control output value. In this manner, integral effect is achieved. Every time this algorithm is run, the following calculation is performed:

Error = HT.C.P – LAT Error_last = error calculated previous time P = HT.P*(Error) D = HT.D*(Error – Error_last)

The P and D terms are overridden to zero if: Error < S.G.DB AND Error > – S.G.DB AND D < M.R.DB

AND D > – M.R.DB. “P + D” are then clamped based on CAP.M. This sum can be

no larger or no smaller than +CAP.M or –CAP.M. Finally, the desired capacity is calculated: Staged Heat Capacity Calculation = “P + D” + old Staged Heat

Capacity Calculation. NOTE: The PID values should not be modified without

approval from Carrier.

IMPORTANT: When gas or electric heat is used in a VAV

application with third party terminals, the HIR relay output must be connected to the VAV terminals in the system in order to enforce a minimum heating cfm. The installer is responsible to ensure the total minimum heating cfm is not below limits set for the equipment. Failure to do so will result in limit switch tripping and may void warranty.

Modulating Gas Heat Staging

— Different unit sizes will control heat stages differently based on the amount of heating capacity included. These staging patterns are selected based on the unit model number. The selection of a set of staging patterns is controlled via the heat stage type configuration parameter Configuration→HEAT→SG.CF→HT.ST. Setting HT.ST to 0, 1, 2, or 3 configures the unit for Modulating Gas Heat. The selection of HT.ST = 0, 1, 2, or 3 is based on the unit size and heat size. See Table 38.

As the heating capacity rises and falls based on demand, the modulating gas control logic will stage the heat relay patterns up and down respectively (Run Status→VIEW→HT.ST) and set the capacity of the Modulating Gas section (Outputs →HEAT→H1.CP). The Heat Stage Type configuration selects one of the staging patterns that the modulating gas control will use. In addition to the staging patterns, the capacity for each stage is also determined by the modulating gas heating PID algorithm. Therefore, choosing the heat relay outputs and setting

the modulating gas section capacity is a function of the capacity desired, the available heat staging patterns configured with heat stage type (HT.ST), and the capacity range presented by each staging pattern.

As the modulating gas control desired capacity rises, it is continually checked against the capacity ranges of the next higher staging patterns. Since each stage has a range of capacities, and the capacities of some stages overlap, the control selects the highest stage with sufficient minimum capacity.

Similarly, as the modulating gas control desired capacity drops, it is continually checked against the capacity ranges of the next lower stages. The control selects the lowest stage with sufficient maximum capacity.

The first two modulating gas heat outputs are located on the MBB. Outputs 3, 4, 5, 6, and the analog output that sets the modulating gas section capacity are located on the SCB outputs 7 and 8 are located on the CXB. The heat stage selected (Run Status→VIEW→HT.ST) is clamped between 0 and the

Table 39 — Modulating Gas Heat Control Steps (HT.ST = 0)

maximum number of stages possible (Run Status→VIEW→H.MAX). See Tables 39- 42.

SCR Electric Heat Staging

— For all SCR electric heat units there is only 1 heat stage. Whenever the heat is energized, all heaters will be active will be modulatied through The SCR control.

Table 38 — Modulating Gas Heat

NUMBER

STAGES

3 0 2 75, 90, 105 Low

4 13

5 24

7 3 5 120,130,150 High

HT.ST

CONFIG.

No. of

Heat

Exchanger

Sections

UNIT SIZE

48N

75 High

90, 105 Med

120,130,150 Low

90-105 High

120,130,150 Med

HEAT

SIZE

RELAY OUTPUT

STAGE

0 OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 0

1 ON OFF/ON* OFF OFF 15 50

2 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF 52 88

3 ON OFF/ON* ON ON 65 100

* ON when OutputsHEATH1.CP > 54%, OFF when OutputsHEATH1.CP < 46%.

Heat 1 Heat 2 Heat 3 Heat 4

MBB-RLY8 TR1-CR SCB-RLY1 SCB-RLY2

IGC1 MGV1 IGC2 MGV2 MIN MAX

CAPACITY

Table 40 — Modulating Gas Heat Control Steps (HT.ST = 1)

RELAY OUTPUT

STAGE

0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 0

1 ON OFF/ON* OFF OFF OFF OFF 10 33

2 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF OFF OFF 35 58

3 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF ON OFF 60 83

4 ONOFF/ON*ONONONON76100

* ON when OutputsHEATH1.CP > 54%, OFF when OutputsHEATH1.CP < 46%.

Heat 1 Heat 2 Heat 3 Heat 4 Heat 5 Heat 6

MBB-RLY8 TR1-CR SCB-RLY1 SCB-RLY2 SCB-RLY3 SCB-RLY4

IGC1 MGV1 IGC2 MGV2 IGC3 MGV3 MIN MAX

CAPACITY

Table 41 — Modulating Gas Heat Control Steps (HT.ST = 2)

STAGE

0 OFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFF00

1 ON OFF/ON* OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 7 25

2 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 26 44

3 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 45 63

4 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 64 81

5 ONOFF/ON*ONONONONONON82100

* ON when OutputsHEATH1.CP > 54%, OFF when OutputsHEATH1.CP < 46%.

Heat 1 Heat 2 Heat 3 Heat 4 Heat 5 Heat 6 Heat 7 Heat 8

MBB-RLY8 TR1-CR SCB-RLY1 SCB-RLY2 SCB-RLY3 SCB-RLY4 MBB-RLY9 MBB-RLY10

IGC1 MGV1 IGC2 MGV2 IGC3 MGV3 IGC4 MGV4 MIN MAX

RELAY OUTPUT

CAPACITY

Table 42 — Modulating Gas Heat Control Steps (HT.ST = 3)

RELAY OUTPUT

STAGE

* ON when OutputsHEATH1.CP > 54%, OFF when OutputsHEATH1.CP < 46%.

log output that sets the SCR electric heat section capacity is located on the SCB.

Limit Switch Temperature Monitoring ( air volume applications in the low heat or tempering mode can experience low airflow and as a result it is possible for nuisance trips of the gas heat limit switch, thereby shutting off all gas stages. In order to achieve consistent heating in a tempering mode, a thermistor (Te mp e ra t ur e s next to the limit switch and monitored for overheating. In order to control a tempering application where the limit switch temperature has risen above either the upper or lower configuration parameters (SW.L.T, SW.H.T), the staged gas control will respond by clamping or droping gas stages. See Table 43.

(LIM.M) is set to YES, all the modes will be monitored. If set to NO, then only LAT Cutoff mode and Capacity Clamp mode for RISE will be monitored.

through the capacity calculation) is greater than (RISE) degrees F per second, the control will not allow the capacity routine to add stages and will turn on the Capacity Clamp mode.

ity routine immediately and drop all heat stages and will turn on the Limiting mode.

Capacity Clamp mode and Limiting mode with one exception. If (LAT – LAT last time through the capacity calculation) is greater than “RISE” degrees F per second, the control will stay in the Capacity Clamp mode.

below SW.L.T, and LAT is not rising quickly, the control will run the capacity calculation routine immediately and allow a full stage to come back on if desired this first time through upon recovery. This will effectively override the “max capacity stage” clamp.

for the supply-air temperature to rise and fall radically between capacity calculations, thereby impacting the limit switch temperature. In the case where supply-air temperature (LAT) rises above the control point (HT.C.P) + the cutoff point (LAT.L) the

Heat 1 Heat 2 Heat 3 Heat 4 Heat 5 Heat 6 Heat 7 Heat 8 Heat 9 Heat 10

MBB-RLY8 TR1-CR SCB-RLY1 SCB-RLY2 SCB-RLY3 SCB-RLY4 MBB-RLY9 MBB-RLY10 CXB-RLY1 CXB-RLY2

IGC1 MGV1 IGC2 MGV2 IGC3 MGV3 IGC4 MGV4 IGC5 MGV5 MIN MAX

0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 0

1 ON OFF/ON* OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 6 20

2 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 21 35

3 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 36 50

4 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 51 65

5 ON OFF/ON* ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 66 80

6 ON OFF/ON* ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 76 90

7 ON OFF/ON* ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 86 100

The electric heat outputs are located on the MBB. The ana-

and drop a stage of heat. Thereafter, every time the capacity calculation routine runs, provided the control is still in the LAT cutoff mode condition, a stage will drop each time through.

LIM.M) — Variable

Falling back below the cutoff point will turn off the LAT cutoff mode.

CONTROL BOARD INFORMATION



AIR.TS.G.LS) is placed

Integrated Gas Control (IGC) each bank of gas heat exchangers; 2, 3, 4, or 5 IGC are used depending on unit size and heat capacity. The IGC controls the

— One IGC is provided with

direct spark ignition system and monitors the rollout switch, limit switches, and induced-draft motor Hall Effect switch. For units equipped with Modulating Gas heat, the IGC in the Modulating Gas section uses a Pressure Switch in place of the Hall Effect sensor. The IGC is equipped with a LED (light-emitting

Table 43 — SCR Electric Heat Control Steps

STAGE

0OFFOFF0 0 1 ON ON 0 100

RELAY OUTPUT CAPACITY (%)

Heat1 Heat2 Min. Max.

If the Limit Switch Monitoring configuration parameter

diode) for diagnostics. See Table 44. Integrated Gas Control Board Logic

— This board provides

control for the ignition system for the gas heat sections.

When a call for gas heat is initiated, power is sent to W on the IGC boards. For standard 2-stage heat, all boards are wired in parallel. For modulating gas heat, each board is controlled separately. When energized, an LED on the IGC board will be turned on. See Table 44 for LED explanations.

Each board will ensure that the rollout switch and limit switch are closed. The induced-draft motor is then energized.

If S.G.LS rises above SW.L.T or if (LAT – LAT last time

For units equipped with 2-stage gas heat the speed of the motor is proven with a Hall Effect sensor on the motor. For units equipped with modulating gas heat the motor function is proven with a pressure switch. When the motor speed or function is proven, the ignition activation period begins. The burners ig-

If S.G.LS rises above SW.H.T the control will run the capac-

nite within 5 seconds. If the burners do not light, there is a 22second delay before another 5-second attempt is made. If the burners still do not light, this sequence is repeated for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes have elapsed and the burners have not

If S.G.LS falls below SW.L.T the control will turn off both

ignited then heating is locked out. The control will reset when the request for W (heat) is temporarily removed.

When ignition occurs, the IGC board will continue to monitor the condition of the rollout switch, limit switches, Hall Effect sensor or pressure switch, and the flame sensor. Forty-five

If control is in the Limiting mode and then S.G.LS falls

seconds after ignition has occurred, the IGC will request that the indoor fan be turned on.

The IGC fan output (IFO) is connected to the indoor fan input on the MBB which will indicate to the controls that the indoor fan should be turned on (if not already on). If for some reason the overtemperature limit switch trips prior to the start

In addition to the above checks, it is also possible at low cfm

of the indoor fan blower, on the next attempt the 45-second delay will be shortened by 5 seconds. Gas will not be interrupted to the burners and heating will continue. Once modified, the fan delay will not change back to 45 seconds unless power is reset to the control.

CAPACITY

control will run the capacity calculation routine immediately

The IGC boards only control the first stage of gas heat on each gas valve. The second stages are controlled directly from the MBB board for staged gas. For units equipped with modulating gas heat, the second stage is controlled from the timer relay board (TR1). The IGC board has a minimum on-time of 1 minute.

In modes such as Service Test where long minimum on times are not enforced, the 1-minute timer on the IGC will still be followed and the gas will remain on for a minimum of 1 minute.

Staged Gas Heat Board (SCB)

— When optional modulating gas heat is used, the SCB board is installed and controls additional stages of gas heat. The SCB also provides additional sensors for monitoring of the supply-air and limit switch temperatures. For units equipped with modulating gas heat, the SCB provides the 4 to 20 mA signal to the SC30 board that sets the modulating gas section capacity. This board is located in the main unit control box.

Timer Relay Control Board (TR1)

— The TR1 is used on modulating gas heat equipped units only. It is located in the gas heat section and is used in combination with the SC30 to provide control of the modulating gas heat section. The TR1 receives an input from the IGC, initiates a start-up sequence, powers the SC30, sets the induced-draft motor speed, and provides the main gas valve high fire input. When the start-up sequence is complete, the TR1 checks the input from the SC30 to determine which state to command the induced-draft motor and main gas valve. See Table 45.

Signal Conditioner Control Board (SC30)

— The SC30 is used on modulating gas heat equipped units only. It is located in the gas heat section and is used in combination with the TR1 to provide control of the modulating gas heat section. The SC30 is powered by an output from the TR1. It receives a capacity input from the SCB, provides a capacity output to the modulating gas valve, and provides an output to the TR1 to determine which state to command the induced-draft motor and main gas valve. See Table 45.

Modulating Gas Control Boards (SC30 and TR1) Logic

— All gas modulating units are equipped with one timer relay board (TR1) and one signal conditioner board (SC30), regardless the unit size. The boards provide control for variable heating output for the gas heat section.

Similar with staged gas heat option, each IGC board is controlled separately. The IGC functions are not affected by the modulating gas control logic. When a call for gas heat is initiated, W on the IGC board and the timer relay board (TR1) are energized. The LED on TR1 board will be turned on. See Table 45 for LED explanation.

When TR1 received an input from the IGC board, the relay board starts Timer no. 1 or start-up sequence: sets the gas valve stage and the inducer motor speed, and enables the signal conditioner board SC30. During Timer no. 1, the SC30 board keeps a fixed heating output. When Timer no. 1 expires, the modulating gas control boards start Timer no. 2. Throughout the duration of Timer no. 2, the boards determine which state to adjust the capacity output to satisfy the heat demand. When Timer no. 2 expires, the boards receive a capacity input from the SCB board and continuous modulate the heat output until the mode selection sensor is satisfied.

Table 44 — IGC LED Indicators

ERROR CODE LED INDICATION Normal Operation On Hardware Failure Off Fan On/Off Delay Modified 1 Flash Limit Switch Fault 2 Flashes Fame Sense Fault 3 Flashes Five Consecutive Limit Switch Faults 4 Flashes Ignition Lockout Fault 5 Flashes Ignition Switch Fault 6 Flashes Rollout Switch Fault 7 Flashes Internal Control Fault 8 Flashes Software Lockout 9 Flashes

NOTES:

1. There is a 3-second pause between error code displays.

2. If more than one error code exists, all applicable error codes will be displayed in numerical sequence.

3. Error codes on the IGC will be lost if power to the unit is interrupted.

Table 45 — TR1 Board LED Indicators

LED

DESIGNATION

ON 24 VAC Supplied to TR1

SR Input received from IGC2, starts timer no. 1

FR IDM2 operates at high speed

Modulating Gas Valve modulated except during fixed output delay time

Modulating Gas Valve operates in high pressure stage

RESULT/ACTION

The IGC boards only control the first stage of gas heat on each gas valve. The second stages are controlled directly from the MBB board. The IGC board has a minimum on-time of 1 minute.

In modes such as Service Test where long minimum on times are not enforced, the 1-minute timer on the IGC will still be followed and the gas will remain on for a minimum of 1 minute.

RELOCATE SAT FOR HEATING-LINKAGE APPLICATIONS — If Configuration the supply air temperature thermistor (Temperatures



SAT) must be relocated downstream of the installed heating



HEATLAT.M is set to YES,



AIR.T

device. This only applies to two-stage gas or electric heating types (Configuration



HEAT HT.CF=1 or 2).

Determine a location in the supply duct that will provide a fairly uniform airflow. Typically this would be a minimum of 5 equivalent duct diameters downstream of the unit. Also, care should be taken to avoid placing the thermistor within a direct line-of-sight of the heating element to avoid radiant effects.

Run a new two-wire conductor cable from the control box through the low voltage conduit into the space inside the building and route the cable to the new sensor location.

Installing a New Sensor

— Procure a duct-mount temperature sensor (Carrier P/N 33ZCSENPAT or equivalent 10,000 ohm at 25C NTC [negative temperature coefficient] sensor). Install the sensor through the side wall of the duct and secure.

Re-Using the Factory SAT Sensor

— The factory sensor is attached to the left-hand side of the supply fan housing. Disconnect the sensor from the factory harness. Fabricate a mounting method to insert the sensor through the duct wall and secure in place.

Attach the new conductor cable to the sensor leads and terminate in an appropriate junction box. Connect the opposite end inside the unit control box at the factory leads from MBB J8 terminals 11 and 12 (PNK) leads. Secure the unattached PNK leads from the factory harness to ensure no accidental contact with other terminals inside the control box.

TEMPERING MODE — In a vent or cooling mode, the economizer at minimum position may send extremely cold outside air down the ductwork of the building. Therefore it may be necessary to bring heat on to counter-effect this low supply-air temperature. This is referred to as the tempering mode.

Setting up the System

— The relevant set points for temper-

ing are located at the local display under Setpoints:

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS

T.P RG

T.C L

T.V. OC

T.V. UN

Operation

Tempering Purge SASP

Tempering in Cool Offset

Tempering Vent Occ SASP

Tempering Vent Unocc. SASP

— First, the unit must be in a vent mode, a low cool,

–20-80 dF TEMPPURG 50

5-75 ^F TEMPCOOL 5

–20-80 dF TEMPVOCC 65

–20-80 dF TEMPVUNC 50

CCN

POINT

DEFAULT

or a high cool HVAC mode to be considered for a tempering mode. Secondly, the tempering mode is only allowed when the rooftop is configured for modulating gas, SCR electric heat, or hydronic heating (Configuration



HEATHT.CF=3 or 4).

Also, if OAT is above the chosen tempering set point, temper-

ing will not be allowed. Additionally, tempering mode is locked out if any stages of mechanical cooling are present.

If the control is configured for staged gas, modulating gas, SCR electric heat, or hydronic heating and the control is in a vent, low cool, or high cool HVAC mode, and the rooftop control is in a situation where the economizer must maintain a minimum position/minimum cfm, then the evaporator discharge temperature (EDT) will be monitored. If the EDT falls below a particular trip point then tempering mode may be called out:

HVAC mode = “Tempering Vent”

HVAC mode = “Tempering LoCool”

HVAC mode = “Tempering HiCool”

The decision making/selection process for the tempering trip set point is as follows:

If an HVAC cool mode is in effect, then the tempering cool point is SASP – T.CL.

If not in effect and unit is in a pre-occupied purge mode (Operating Modes



MODEIAQ.P=ON), then the trip point

is T. PR G.

If not in effect and unit is in an occupied mode (Operating

Modes



MODEIAQ.P=ON), then the trip point is

TEMPVOCC.

For all other cases, the trip point is TEMPVUNC. NOTE: The unoccupied economizer free cooling does not

qualify as a HVAC cool mode as it is an energy saving feature and has its own OAT lockout already. The unoccupied free cooling mode (HVAC mode = Unocc. Free Cool) will override any unoccupied vent mode from triggering a tempering mode.

A minimum amount of time must pass before calling out any tempering mode. In effect, the EDT must fall below the trip point value –1° F continuously for a minimum of 2 minutes. Also, at the end of a mechanical cooling cycle, a 10-minute delay will be enforced before considering a tempering during vent mode in order to allow any residual cooling to dissipate from the evaporator coil.

If the above conditions are met, the algorithm is free to select the tempering mode (MODETEMP).

If a tempering mode becomes active, the modulating heat source (staged gas, modulating gas, SCR electric heat, or hot water) will attempt to maintain leaving-air temperature (LAT) at the tempering set point used to trigger the tempering mode. The technique for modulation of set point for staged gas, modulating gas, SCR electric heat, and hydronic heat is the same as

in a heat mode. More information regarding the operation of heating can be referenced in the Heating Control section.

Recovery from a tempering mode (MODETEMP) will occur when the EDT rises above the trip point. On any change in HVACMODE, the tempering routine will re-assess the tempering set point which may cause the control to continue or exit tempering mode.

Static Pressure Control — Variable air volume (VAV)

air-conditioning systems must provide varying amounts of air to the conditioned space. As air terminals downstream of the unit modulate their flows, the unit must simply maintain control over duct static pressure in order to accommodate the needs of the terminals, and therefore to meet the varying combined airflow requirement. The unit design includes an optional means of accommodating this requirement. This section describes the technique by which this control takes place.

A unit intended for use in a VAV system can be equipped with a variable frequency drive (VFD) for the supply fan. The speed of the fan can be controlled directly by the ComfortLink controls. A duct static pressure transducer is located in the auxiliary control box. The signal from the pressure sensor is received by the RCB board and is then used in a PID control routine that outputs a fan speed to the VFD.

The PID routine periodically calculates the static pressure error from set point. This error at any point in time is simply the duct static pressure set point minus the measured duct static. It is the Proportional term of the PID. The routine also calculates the Integral of the error over time, and the Derivative (rate of change) of the error. A calculated value is then used to create an output signal used to adjust the VFD to maintain the static pressure set point.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — Here are the options under the Local Display Mode Configuration

Static Pressure Configuration (

SP.CF) — This variable is used to configure the use of ComfortLink for static pressure control. It has the following options:

• 0 (DISABLED) - No static pressure control by Com-

fortLink controls. This would be used for a constant volume (CV) application when static pressure control is not required or for a VAV application if there will be thirdparty control of the VFD. In this latter case, a suitable means of control must be field installed.

• 1 (ENABLED) - This will enable the use of ComfortLink

controls

Staged Air Volume Control (

SP.SV) — This variable enabled

the use of a CV unit with VFD for staged air volume control. Static Pressure Sensor (

SP.S) — This variable enables the use of a supply duct static pressure sensor. This must be enabled to use ComfortLink controls for static pressure control. If using a third-party control for the VFD then this should be disabled.

Static Pressure Low Range (

SP.LO) — This is the minimum static pressure that the sensor will measure. For most sensors this will be 0 in. wg. ComfortLink controls will map this value to a 4 mA sensor output.

Static Pressure High Range (

SP.HI) — This is the maximum static pressure that the sensor will measure. Commonly this will be 5 in. wg. The ComfortLink controls will map this value to a 20 mA sensor output when the signal is 20 mA.

Static Pressure Set Point (

SP.SP) — This is the static pressure control point. It is the point against which ComfortLink controls compares the actual measured supply duct pressure for determination of the error that is used for PID control. Adjust SP.SP to the minimum value necessary for proper operation of air terminals in the conditioned space at full load and part load. Too high a value will cause unnecessary fan motor power consumption at part load conditions and/or noise problems. Too low a value will result in insufficient airflow.



SP. See Table 46.

VFD Minimum Speed ( speed for the supply fan VFD. Typically the value is chosen to maintain a minimum level of ventilation.

NOTE Most VFDs have a built-in minimum speed adjustment which should be configured fort 0% when using ComfortLink controls for static pressure control..

VFD Maximum Speed ( speed for the supply fan VFD. This is usually set to 100%.

VFD Fire Speed Override ( the supply fan VFD will use during the fire modes; pressurization, evacuation and purge. This is usually set to 100%.

Static Pressure Reset Configuration ( is used to configure the static pressure reset function. When SP.RS = 0, there is no static pressure reset via an analog input. When SP.RS = 1, there is static pressure reset based on the CEM 4-20 mA input and ranged from 0 to 3 in. wg. When SP.RS = 2, there is static pressure reset based on RAT and defined by SP.RT and SP.LM. When SP.RS = 3, there is static pressure reset based on SPT and defined by SP.RT and SP.LM. When SP.RS = 4, there is VFD speed control where 0 mA = 0% speed and 20 mA = 100% (SP.MN and SP.MX will over- ride).

Static Pressure Reset Ratio ( the reset ratio in terms of static pressure versus temperature. The reset ratio determines how much the static pressure is reduced for every degree below set point for RAT or SPT.

Static Pressure Reset Limit ( the maximum amount of static pressure reset that is allowed. This is sometimes called a "clamp."

NOTE: Resetting static pressure via RAT and SPT is primarily a constant volume application which utilizes a VFD. The reasoning is that there is significant energy savings in slowing down a supply fan as opposed to running full speed with supply air reset. Maintaining the supply air set point and slowing down the fan has the additional benefit of working around dehumidification concerns.

Static Pressure PID Config ( configuration can be accessed under this heading in the Con-

figuration



SP submenu. Under most operating conditions

SP.MN) — This is the minimum

SP.MX) — This is the maximum

SP.FS) — This is the speed that

SP.RS) — This option

SP.RT) — This option defines

SP.LM) — This option defines

S.PID) — Static pressure PID

the control PID factors will not require any adjustment and the factory defaults should be used. If persistent static pressure fluctuations are detected, small changes to these factors may improve performance. Decreasing the factors generally reduce the responsiveness of the control loop, while increasing the factors increase its responsiveness. Note the existing settings before making changes, and seek technical assistance from Carrier before making significant changes to these factors.

Static Pressure PID Run Rate (S.PID



SP.TM) — This is the number of seconds between duct static pressure readings taken by the ComfortLink PID routine.

Static Pressure Proportional Gain (S.PID



SP.P) — This is the proportional gain for the static pressure control PID control loop.

Static Pressure Integral Gain (S.PID



SP.I) — This is the

integral gain for the static pressure control PID control loop.

Static Pressure Derivative Gain (S.PID



SP.D) — This is the

derivative gain for the static pressure control PID control loop. RELATED POINTS — These points represent static pressure

control and static pressure reset inputs and outputs. See Table 47. Static Pressure mA (

SP.M) — This variable reflects the value of the static pressure sensor signal received by ComfortLink controls. It may in some cases be helpful in troubleshooting.

Static Pressure mA Trim (

SP.M.T) — This input allows a modest amount of trim to the 4 to 20mA static pressure transducer signal, and can be used to calibrate a transducer.

Static Pressure Reset (

SP.RS) — This variable reflects the value of the static pressure reset signal applied from a CCN system.

Static Pressure Reset mA (

SP.R.M) —This input reflects the value of the static pressure transducer reset signal applied from a CCN system.

Static Pressure Reset Sensor (

SP.RS) — This variable can be configured to allow static pressure reset from a CCN system. See relevant CCN documentation for additional details.

Supply Fan VFD Speed (

S.VFD) — This output can be used to check on the actual speed of the VFD. This may be helpful in some cases for troubleshooting.

Table 46 — Static Pressure Control Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

SP SUPPLY STATIC PRESS.CFG.

SP.CF Static Pressure Config Enable/Disable STATICFG Disable SP.SV Staged Air Volume Ctrl Enable/Disable STATICFG Disable SP.S Static Pressure Sensor Enable/Disable SPSENS Disable SP.LO Static Press. Low Range –10 - 0 in. W.C. SP_LOW 0 SP.HI Static Press. High Range 0 - 10 in. W.C. SP_HIGH 5 SP.SP Static Pressure Setpoint 0 - 5 in. W.C. SPSP 1.5 SP.MN VFD Minimum Speed 10 - 50 % STATPMIN 20 SP.MX VFD Maximum Speed 50 - 100 % STATPMAX 100 SP.FS VFD Fire Speed Over. 0 - 100 % STATPFSO 100 SP.RS Stat. Pres. Reset Config 0 - 4 SPRSTCFG 0 SP.RT SP Reset Ratio 0 - 2.00 SPRRATIO 0.2 SP.LM SP Reset Limit 0 - 2.00 SPRLIMIT 0.75 SP.EC SP Reset Econo.Position 0 - 100 % ECONOSPR 5 S.PID STAT.PRESS.PID CONFIGS SP.TM Static Press. PID Run Rate 5 - 120 sec SPIDRATE 15 SP.P Static Press. Prop. Gain 0 - 5 STATP_PG 0.5 SP.I Static Pressure Intg. Gain 0 - 2 STATP_IG 0.5 SP.D Static Pressure Derv. Gain 0 - 5 STATP_DG 0.3

STATIC PRESSURE RESET CCN Linkage

— The ComfortLink controls supports the use of static pressure reset. For static pressure reset to occur, the unit must be part of a CCN system with access to CCN reset variable and the Linkage Master Terminal System Logic. The Linkage Master terminal monitors the primary air damper position of all the terminals in the system (done through LINKAGE with the new ComfortID™ air terminals).

It then calculates the amount of supply static pressure reduction necessary to cause the most open damper in the system to open more than the minimum value (60%) but not more than the maximum value (90% or negligible static pressure drop). This is a dynamic calculation, which occurs every two minutes whenever the system is operating. The calculation ensures that the supply static pressure is always enough to supply the required airflow at the worst case terminal but never more than necessary, so that the primary air dampers do not have to operate with an excessive pressure drop (more than required to maintain the airflow set point of each individual terminal in the system). As the system operates, if the most open damper opens more than 90%, the system recalculates the pressure reduction variable and the value is reduced. Because the reset value is subtracted from the controlling set point at the equipment, the pressure set point increases and the primary air dampers close a little (to less than 90%). If the most open damper closes to less than 60%, the system recalculates the pressure reduction variable and the value is increased. This results in a decrease in the controlling set point at the equipment, which causes the primary air dampers to open a little more (to greater than 60%).

The rooftop unit has the design static pressure set point programmed into the CCN control. This is the maximum set point that could ever be achieved under any condition. To simplify the installation and commissioning process for the field, this system control is designed so that the installer only needs to enter a maximum duct design pressure or maximum equipment pressure, whichever is less. There is no longer a need to calculate the worst case pressure drop at design conditions and then hope that some intermediate condition does not require a higher supply static pressure to meet the load conditions. For example, a system design requirement may be 1.2 in. wg, the equipment may be capable of providing 3.0 in. wg and the supply duct is designed for 5.0 in. wg. In this case, the installer could enter 3.0 in. wg as the supply static pressure set point and allow the air terminal system to dynamically adjust the supply duct static pressure set point as required.

The system will determine the actual set point required delivering the required airflow at every terminal under the current

Table 47 — Static Pressure Reset Related Points

load conditions. It will always be the lowest value under the given conditions, and as the conditions and airflow set point at each terminal change throughout the operating period, and so will the equipment static pressure set point.

The CCN system must have access to a CCN variable (SPRESET which is part of the equipment controller). In the algorithm for static pressure control, the SPRESET value is always subtracted from the configured static pressure set point by the equipment controller. The SPRESET variable is always checked to be a positive value or zero only (negative values are clamped to zero). The result of the subtraction of the SPRESET variable from the configured set point is limited so that it cannot be less than zero.

The result is that the system will dynamically determine the required duct static pressure based on the actual load conditions currently in the space. It eliminates the need to calculate the design supply static pressure set point (although some may still want to do it anyway). It also saves the energy that is the difference between the design static pressure set point and the required static pressure (multiplied by the airflow). Normally, the VAV system operates at the design static pressure set point all the time, however, a typical VAV system operates at design conditions less than 2% of the time. A significant saving in fan horsepower can be achieved utilizing static pressure reset.

Third Party 4-20mA Input

— It is also possible to perform static pressure reset via an external 4-20 mA signal connected to the CEM board where 4 mA corresponds to 0 in. reset and 20 mA corresponds to 3 in. of reset. The only caveat to this is that the static pressure 4-20 mA input shares the same input as the analog OAQ sensor. Therefore, obviously both sensors cannot be used at the same time. To enable the static pressure reset 4-20 mA sensor: Set Configuration



UNITSENSSP.RS

to "Enabled." Static Pressure Reset Sensor (

quality sensor is not configured (Configuration

SP.RS) — If the outdoor air



IAQ



AQ.CFOQ.A.C = 0), then it is possible to use that sensor's location on the CEM board to monitor or perform static pressure reset via an external 4-20 mA input. Enabling this sensor will give the user the ability to reset from 0 in. to 3 in. of static, the supply static pressure setpoint (Configura-

tion

SP

SP.SP), where 4 mA= 0 in. and 20 mA = 3 inches.

As an example: If the static pressure reset input is measuring 6 mA, then the input is resetting 2 mA of its 16 mA (4-20) "control range." This is essentially

/16 of 3 in. or 0.375 in. of reset. If the static pressure setpoint (SP.SP) = 1.5 in., then the static pressure control point for the system will be 1.5 - 0.375 =

1.125 inches.

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

Inputs



4-20  SP.M Static Pressure mA 4-20 mA SP_MA



4-20  SP.M.T Static Pressure mA Trim -2.0  +2.0 mA SPMATRIM



RSET SP.RS Static Pressure Reset 0.0-3.0 in. wg SPRESET 0.0



4-20 SP.RM Static Pressure Reset mA 4-20 mA SPRST_MA 0.0



RSET SP.RS Static Pressure Reset Sensor Enable/Diable SPRSTSEN Disable

Outputs



FANS  S.VFD Supply Fan VFD Speed 0-100 % SFAN_VFD

Fan Status Monitoring

GENERAL — The N Series ComfortLink controls offer the capability to detect a failed supply fan through either a duct static pressure transducer or an accessory discrete switch. The fan status switch is an accessory that allows for the monitoring of a discrete switch, which trips above a differential pressure drop across the supply fan. But for any unit with an installed duct static pressure sensor, it is possible to measure duct pressure rise directly, which removes the need for a differential switch.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — There are two configurations of concern located in Configuration



UNIT. See

Table 48.

Table 48 — Fan Status Monitoring Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE CCN POINT

SFS.S Fan Fail Shuts Down Unit Yes/No SFS_SHUT

SFS.M Fan Stat Monitoring Type 0 - 2 SFS_MON

Fan Stat Monitoring Type (

SFS.M) — This configuration se-

lects the type of fan status monitoring to be performed. 0 - NONE — No switch or monitoring

1 - SWITCH — Use of the fan status switch 2 - SP RISE — Monitoring of the supply duct pressure.

Fan Fail Shuts Down Unit (

SFS.S) — This configuration will allow whether the unit should shut down on a supply fan status fail or simply alert the condition and continue to run.

YES — Shut down the unit if supply fan status monitoring fails and send out an alarm.

NO — Do not shut down the unit if supply fan status monitoring fails but send out an alert.

SUPPLY FAN STATUS MONITORING LOGIC — Regardless of whether the user is monitoring a discrete switch or is monitoring static pressure, the timings for both techniques are the same and rely upon the configuration of static pressure control.

The configuration which determines static pressure control

is Configuration

SP

SP.CF. If this configuration is set to 0 (none), a fan failure condition must wait 60 continuous seconds before taking action. If this configuration is 1 (VFD), a fan failure condition must wait 3 continuous minutes before taking action.

If the unit is configured to monitor a fan status switch (SFS.M = 1), and if the supply fan commanded state does not match the supply fan status switch for 3 continuous minutes, then a fan status failure has occurred.

If the unit is configured for supply duct pressure monitoring (SFS.M = 2), then

• If the supply fan is requested ON and the static pressure

reading is not greater than 0.2 in. wg for the time clarified

above, a fan failure has occurred.

• If the supply fan is requested OFF and the static pressure

reading is not less than 0.2-in. wg for the time clarified

above, a fan failure has occurred.

Dirty Filter Switch — This unit is equipped with several

filter stages. It is important to maintain clean filters to reduce the energy consumption of the system. This unit is designed to provide several ways to achieve this goal. Table 49 shows the nine configurations for filter monitoring in this unit. If the configuration for either the main or final filter is set to 0-Disable then the input is set to read clean all the time. There are several controls which need to be used in conjunction with the filter configuration so that each corresponding setting will operate correctly.

The fault status timer is a parameter which sets the number of minutes the filter status must be in a fault state before the fault latch is closed. To set the fault time use Configuration



IAQFLTCFS.FT the range is between 0 and 10 min-

utes. The default for this parameter is 2 minutes.

Filter types (MF_TYP, PF_TYP) and final resistance (MF_FR, PF_FR) are used for the Delta Pressure and Predictive Life configurations for the main and post filter. The final resistance will be automatically set when the filter type is selected. After selecting a filter type it is possible to change the filter final resistance. Settings for filters based on Table 49 and 50 for main and post filters.

Table 49 — Main Filter Types

MAIN FILTER TYPE

(MF_TYP)

DESCRIPTION

Std 2 in. MERV 1

4 in. MERV 8 1

4 in. MERV 14 1.5

12 in. MERV 14 Bag with 2 in. pre’s

12 in. MERV 14 Bag with 4 in. pre’s

19 in. MERV 15 Bag with 2 in. pre’s

19 in. MERV 15 Bag with 4 in. pre’s

12 in. MERV 14 Cart with 2 in. pre’s

12 in. MERV 14 Cart with 4 in. pre’s

Strion Air 2

MAIN FILTER FINAL

RESISTANCE

(MF_FR)

2.5

Table 50 — Final Filter Types

MAIN FILTER TYPE

(MF_TYP)

DESCRIPTION

None 0

12 in. MERV 14 Cart with 2 in. pre’s

12 in. MERV 14 Cart with 4 in. pre’s

19 in. MERV 15 Bag with 2 in. pre’s

19 in. MERV 15 Bag with 4 in. pre’s

12 in. MERV 17 Bag with 2 in. pre’s

12 in. MERV 17 Bag with 4 in. pre’s

MAIN FILTER FINAL

RESISTANCE

(MF_FR)

2.5

To change the filter type for the main filter use Configuration



IAQFLTCMF.TY set between 0 and 6 according to

the main filter type table. To change the filter type for the final filter use Configuration



IAQFLTCPF.TY set the be-

tween 0 and 6 according to the post filter type table. To adjust the final resistance for the main filter after a filter type has been selected use Configuration



IAQFLTCMF.FR and set

from 0 to 10. To adjust the final resistance for the post filter use

Configuration



IAQFLTCPF.FR and set between 0 and

10. 1 = Switch

— If the Filter configuration for either the main or post filter is set to 1 (Switch) then a filter status switch should be installed. The monitoring of the filters is based on a clean/dirty switch input.

Monitoring of the main and post filter status switches is disabled in the Service Test mode and when the supply fan is not commanded on. If the fan is on and the unit is not in a test mode and either the main or post filter status switch reads "dirty for a user set continuous amount of time, an alert is generated. Recovery from this alert is done through a clearing of all alarms or after cleaning the filter and the switch reads clean for 30 seconds.

2 = Schedule

— Filter configuration for either main or post filter can be set to 2 (Schedule). In this mode the filter status is based on a schedule set by the user. The status is determined by the amount of time remaining in the filter life. The user sets the lifetime for the filter in months from 1 to 60 (5 years). The default for this parameter is 12 months. It is also possible to set a reminder and reset the schedule.

The main and post filters use "Birth points" and current date to calculate filter life and filter reminder. The birth date and current date are expressed as the number of days since 1/1/2000.

To change the main filter life use Configura-

tion



IAQFLTCMF.LT and set to required filter life from

1 to 60 months. To change the post filter life use Configura-

tion



IAQFLTCPF.LT and set to required filter life from

1 to 60 months.

To set main filter life reminder use

tion



IAQFLTCMF.RM

and enter required filter reminder

from 0 to 60 months. To set post filter life reminder use

ration



IAQFLTCPF.RM

and enter required filter re-

Configura-

Configu-

minder from 0 to 60 months. Setting the reminder for either main or post filter to 0 will disable the reminder function for that filter.

To reset the main filter status schedule use Configura-

tion



IAQFLTCMF.RS, when set to 'yes' the birth date

for the main filter will be converted to the current date in number of days since 1/1/2000. To reset the post filter status schedule use Configuration



IAQFLTCPF.RS, when set to

'yes' the birth date for the post filter will be converted to the current date in number of days since 1/1/2000.

3 = Delta Pressure

— Main and post filter status can be determined in relation to a maximum pressure differential across the corresponding filter. The pressure difference is provided by a transducer and sensors. The delta pressure configuration is disabled in Service Test mode and when the supply fan is not commanded on. If the fan is on, the unit is not in test mode and the filter delta pressure is greater than or equal to the filter final resistance (MF_FR, PF_FR) for a period of time equal to the status fault timer (FS.FT) then an alarm will be generated. Recov- ery from this alert is possible by clearing all alarms or by replacing the dirty filter and the delta pressure is less than the new filters final resistance for more than 30 seconds.

4 = Predictive Life (Calculate and Learn)

— The filter status can be determined through a predicted life. When clean filters are first installed using this configuration they must be commissioned before use. This is done by setting the supply fan to a certain speed (in %) and measuring Supply Air CFM (SACFM) versus delta pressure (MF.DP or PF.DP) across the filter. There will need to be a maximum of 10 entries plus an entry for 0 SACFM and one for maximum SACFM. The data is collected and stored by the control.

The 10 entries are separated into bins based on maximum Supply Air CFM (SACFM). Maximum SACFM is based on unit size and supply fan SACFM configuration (SCFM_CFG) view Table 51.

Table 51 — Maximum SACFM

UNIT SIZE SCFM_CFG MAX_SACFM

75, 90, 105

120, 130, 150

75, 90, 105, 120, 130, 150

LOW FAN 40,000

LOW FAN 50,000

HIGH FAN 60,000

During runtime the SACFM is used to interpolate the baseline pressure. The interpolation is then used to calculate the filter status. See Table 52.

It is possible to reset the main filter predictive life table and the post filter predictive life table separately. To reset the main filter predictive life table use and select yes. To reset the post filter predictive life table use

figuration



IAQFLTCPFT.R

ConfigurationIAQFLTCMFT.R

Con-

and select yes.

5 = Predictive Life (Calculate only) — Once the control has learned the life of the filter it is possible to set the control to use the learned information to calculate the life of filters used in the future. This is only an option when the replacement filters used are the same type and final resistance as the filters used to learn the life.

Table 52 — Dirty Filter Switch Points

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE

Main Filter Status Configuration

Configuration FLTCMFL.S

Configuration FLTCPFL.S

InputsGEN.I



FLT.S

InputsGEN.I



PFL.S



Post Filter Status Configuration



Filter Status Input DRTY/CLN FLTS

Filter Status Input DRTY/CLN PFLTS

0 - Disable 1 - S w i t c h 2 - Schedule 3 - Delta Pressure 4 - Calculate and Learn 5 - Calculate Only

CCN

POINT

FLTS_ENA

PFLS_ENA

Economizer — The N Series economizer damper is con-

trolled by communicating actuators motor over the local equipment network (LEN) and is connected directly to linkage in the economizer section.

Economizers are used to provide ventilation air as well as free cooling based on several configuration options. This section shall be devoted to a description of the economizer and its ability to provide free cooling. Please see the section on Indoor Air Quality for more information on setting up and using the economizer to perform demand controlled ventilation (DCV) via the controlling of its minimum position. Also, please see the Third Party Control interface section for a description on how to take over the operation of the economizer through external control.

The N Series controls have the capability to not only control an economizer but also to report its health and operation both to the local display and CCN network. Also, through either the local display or the CCN, the service technician has additional diagnostic tools at his/her disposal to predict the state of the economizer.

ECONOMIZER FAULT DETECTION AND DIAGNOSTICS (FDD) CONTROL — The Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics control can be divided into two tests: test for mechanically disconnected actuator and test for stuck/jammed actuator.

Mechanically Disconnected Actuator chanically disconnected actuator shall be performed by monitoring SAT as the actuator position changes and the damper blades modulate. As the damper opens, it is expected SAT will drop and approach OAT when the damper is at 100%. As the damper closes, it is expected SAT will rise and approach RAT when the damper is at 0%. The basic test shall be as follows:

1. With supply fan running take a sample of SAT at current actuator position.

2. Modulate actuator to new position.

3. Allow time for SAT to stabilize at new position.

4. Take sample of SAT at new actuator position and determine:

a. If damper has opened, SAT should have decreased. b. If damper has closed, SAT should have increased.

5. Use current SAT and actuator position as samples for next comparison after next actuator move.

— The test for a me-

The control shall test for a mechanically disconnected damper if all the following conditions are true:

1. An economizer is installed.

2. The supply fan is running.

3. Conditions are good for economizing.

4. The difference between RAT and OAT > T24RATDF. It is necessary for there to be a large enough difference between RAT and OAT in order to measure a change in SAT as the damper modulates.

5. The actuator has moved at least T24ECSTS %. A very small change in damper position may result in a very small (or non-measurable) change in SAT.

6. At least part of the economizer movement is within the range T24TSTMN% to T24TSTMX%. Because the mixing of outside air and return air is not linear over the entire range of damper position, near the ends of the range even a large change in damper position may result in a very small (or non-measurable) change in SAT.

Furthermore, the control shall test for a mechanically disconnected actuator after T24CHDLY minutes have expired when any of the following occur (this is to allow the heat/cool cycle to dissipate and not influence SAT):

1. The supply fans switches from OFF to ON.

2. Mechanical cooling switches from ON to OFF.

3. Reheat switches from ON to OFF.

4. The SAT sensor has been relocated downstream of the heating section and heat switches from ON to OFF.

The economizer shall be considered moving if the reported position has changed at least +/- T24ECMDB %. A very small changed in position shall not be considered movement.

The determination of whether the economizer is mechanically disconnected shall occur SAT_SEC/2 seconds after the economizer has stopped moving. The control shall log a "damper not modulating" alert if:

1. SAT has not decreased by T24SATMD degrees F SAT_SET/2 seconds after opening the economizer at least T24ECSTS%, taking into account whether the entire movement has occurred within the range 0T24TSTMN%.

2. SAT has not increased by T24SATMD degrees F SAT_SET/2 seconds after closing the economizer at least T24ECSTS%, taking into account whether the entire movement has occurred within the range T24TSTMX100%..

3. Economizer reported position <=5% and SAT is not approximately equal to RAT. SAT not approximately equal to RAT shall be determined as follows:

a. SAT<RAT-(2*2(thermistor accuracy) + 2 (SAT

increase due to fan)) or

b. SAT>RAT+(2*2(thermistor accuracy) + 2 (SAT

increase due to fan))

4. Economizer reported position >=95% and SAT is not approximately equal to OAT. SAT not approximately equal to OAT shall be determined as follows:

a. SAT<OAT-(2*2(thermistor accuracy) + 2 (SAT

increase due to fan)) or

b. SAT>OAT+(2*2(thermistor accuracy) + 2 (SAT

increase due to fan))

Except when run as part of a self-test, the control shall not

automatically clear "damper not modulating" alerts on units. Test for stuck/jammed actuator

— The control shall test for a

jammed actuator as follows:

• If the actuator has stopped moving and the reported position (ECONxPOS, where x is 1,2) is not within ± EC_FLGAP% of the command position (ECONOCMD)

after EC_FLTMR seconds, a "damper stuck or jammed" alert shall be logged, i.e. abs(ECONxPOS ECONODMD) > EC_FLGAP for a continuous time period EC_FLTMR seconds.

• If the actuator jammed while opening (i.e., reported position < commanded position), a "not economizing when it should" alert shall be logged.

• If the actuator jammed while closing (i.e., reported position > command position), the "economizing when it should not" and "too much outside air" alerts shall be logged.

The control shall automatically clear the jammed actuator

alerts as follows:

• If the actuator moves at least 1%, the alerts shall be cleared.

Alternate Excess Outdoor Air Test

— For units configured

with outdoor air measuring stations (OCFMSENS=YES):

Configuration



ECONCFM.COCF.S=YES

Under the following conditions:

1. Unit is not performing free cooling

2. OACFM sensor is detected as good

3. IAQ is not overriding CFM

4. Purge is not overriding CFM If OACFM > (ECMINCFM + EX_ARCFM) for

EX_ARTMR seconds the "excess outside air" alert shall be logged.

DIFFERENTIAL DRY BULB CUTOFF CONTROL Differential Dry Bulb Changeover

— As both return air and outside air temperature sensors are installed as standard on these units, the user may select this option, E.SEL = 1, to perform a qualification of return and outside air in the enabling/ disabling of free cooling. If this option is selected the outside air temperature shall be compared to the return-air temperature to dis-allow free cooling as shown Table 53:

Table 53 — Differential Dry Bulb Cutoff Control

E.SEL (ECON_SEL)

NONE, OUTDR.ENTH, DIF.ENTHALPY

DIFF.DRY BULB

DDB.C

(EC_DDBCO)

N/A N/A NO

0 degF OAT>RAT YES

–2 degF OAT>RAT-2 YES

–4 degF OAT>RAT-4 YES

–6 degF OAT>RAT-6 YES

OAT/RAT

Comparison

OAT<=RAT NO

OAT<=RAT-2 NO

OAT<=RAT-4 NO

OAT<=RAT-6 NO

(DDBCSTAT)

DDBC

The status of differential dry bulb cutoff shall be visible un-

der Run Status



ECONDISADDBC.

There shall be hysteresis where OAT must fall 1 deg F lower than the comparison temperature when transitioning from DDBCSTAT=YES to DDBSTAT=NO.

ECONOMIZER SELF TEST — It is possible for one actuator to become mechanically disconnected while the other(s) continue to work properly, the following self-test utilizes fan characteristics and motor power measurements to determine whether the dampers are properly modulating. A fan that is moving more air uses additional power than a fan that is moving a lesser quantity of air. In this test, each actuator/damper assembly is commanded independently while the fan and motor characteristics are monitored.

It shall be possible to manually start the self-test:

• In Navigator display, this test shall be located at Service

Te st



AC.DTEC.TS.

• Running the test shall require setting Service

Te st



TEST=ON

The test shall also automatically run based on EC.DY (T24_ECDY) and EC.TM (T24_ECTM):

• If conditions are acceptable to run the self-test (see below), the test shall be automatically started on the configured day EC.DY (T24_ECDY) at the configured time EC.TM (T24_ECTM).

• If conditions are not acceptable to run the self-test, it shall be re-scheduled for 24 hours later.

The economizer self-test shall only be allowed run if all of the following conditions are valid:

1. The economizer is enabled

2. No actuators are detected as stuck

3. No actuators are detect as unavailable

4. RCB1 is properly communicating

5. The unit not down due to failure (A152)

6. The supply fan VFD is not in bypass mode (if unit has this option)

7. If configured for building pressure, the unit has an return fan VFD and the fan is not in bypass mode

In addition to the above conditions, the economizer self-test shall not be automatically run if any of the following conditions are valid:

1. Unit not in OFF or VENT mode. The Test screen should be similiar to the following: EC.TR ON

EC.DT WAITING S.VFD 20.0 % TORQ 17.5 % ECN.P 20 % EC2.P 0 % EC3.P 0 % EC.ST RUNNING

Setting EC.TS=ON shall perform the following:

1. Command all actuators and dampers to the closed posi-

tion.

2. Run the fan at T24SFSPD for T24ACMRT minutes and

take a baseline torque (VFD1TMAV) measurement. With the dampers closed, there will be the least amount of airflow, and therefore the least amount of motor torque.

3. Modulate a single actuator/damper assembly open to

T24ACOPN. This will increase the airflow.

4. Let the motor run for one minute. If the torque has in-

creased by T24VFDPC % over the baseline measurement from Step 2, the current torque is set as the new baseline measurement and proceed to Step 5. If the torque has not increased by T24VFDPC % continue to run the fan for a total of T24ACMRT minutes. If, after T24ACMRT minutes total, the torque has not increased by T24VFDPC % over the Step 2 baseline measurement, a fault is logged, and the test is ended.

5. Modulate the actuator/damper assembly closed.

6. Let the motor run for one minute. If the torque has de-

creased by T24VFDPC % over the baseline measurement from Step 4, the current torque is set as the new baseline measurement and proceed to Step 7. If the torque has not decreased by T24VFDPC % continue to run the fan for a total of T24ACMRT minutes. If, after T24ACMRT minutes total, the torque has not decreased by T24VFDPC % below the Step 4 baseline measurement, a fault is logged, and the test is ended.

7. Repeat Steps 1-5 for additional actuator/damper assemblies.

8. Command actuators/dampers to "normal" positions.

If the torque increases and decreases properly,

EC.ST="PASS", otherwise EC.ST="FAIL".

If EC.ST is set to pass, any existing "damper not modulat-

ing" alert shall be automatically cleared.

If EC.ST is set to fail, the "damper not modulating" alert

shall be logged.

If at any point in the test the fan does not reach the command speed or an actuator does not reach the command position within five minutes, the test shall be stopped and the status set to "NOT RUN."

FDD CONFIGURATIONS Log Title 24 Faults (LOG.F) — Enables Title 24 detection

and logging of mechanically disconnected actuator faults. T24 Econ Move Detect

(EC.MD) — Detects the amount of

change required in the reported position before economizer is detected as moving.

T24 Econ Move SAT Test

(EC.ST) — The minimum

amount the economizer must move in order to trigger the test for a change in SAT. The economizer must move at least EC.ST % before the control will attempt to determine whether the actuator is mechanically disconnected.

T24 Econ Move SAT Change

(S.CHG) — The minimum

amount (in degrees F) SAT is expected to change based on economizer position change of EC.ST.

T24 Econ RAT-OAT Diff

(E.SOD) — The minimum amount

(in degrees F) between RAT (if available) or SAT (with economizer closed and fan on) and OAT to perform mechanically disconnected actuator testing.

T24 Heat/Cool End Delay

(E.CHD) — The amount of time

(in minutes) to wait before mechanical cooling or heating has ended before testing for mechanically disconnected actuator. This is to allow SAT to stabilize at conclusion of mechanical cooling or heating.

T24 Test Minimum Position

(ET.MN) — The minimum po-

sition below which tests for a mechanically disconnected actuator will not be performed. For example, if the actuator moves entirely within the range 0 to ET.MN a determination of whether the actuator is mechanically disconnected will not be made. This is due to the fact that at the extreme ends of the actuator movement, a change in position may not result in a detectable change in temperature. When the actuator stops in the range 0 to 2% (the actuator is considered to be closed), a test shall be performed where SAT is expected to be approximately equal to RAT. If SAT is not determined to be approximately equal to RAT, a “damper not modulating” alert shall be logged.

T24 Test Maximum Position

(ET.MX) — The maximum po-

sition above which tests for a mechanically disconnected actuator will not be performed. For example, if the actuator moves entirely within the range ET.MX to 100 a determination of whether the actuator is mechanically disconnected will not be made. This is due to the fact that at the extreme ends of the actuator movement, a change in position may not result in a detectable change in temperature. When the actuator stops in the range 98 to 100% (the actuator is considered to be open), a test shall be performed where SAT is expected to be approximately equal to OAT. If SAT is not determined to be approximately equal to OAT, a “damper not modulating” alert shall be logged.

SAT Settling Time

(SAT.T) — The amount of time (in sec-

onds) the economizer reported position must remain unchanged (± EC.MD) before the control will attempt to detect a mechanically disconnected actuator. This is to allow SAT to stabilize at the current economizer position. This configuration sets the settling time of the supply-air temperature (SAT). This typically tells the control how long to wait after a stage change

before trusting the SAT reading, and has been reused for Title 24 purposes.

Economizer Deadband Temp deadband between measured SAT and calculated SAT when performing economizer self-test. Range is 0-10, default is 4.

Econ Fault Detect Gap tween actuator command and reported position in %. Used to detect actuator stuck/jammed. Range is 2-100, default is 5.

Econ Fault Detect Timer fault detection in seconds. Used to detect actuator stuck/ jammed. Range is 10-240, default is 20.

Excess Air CFM CFM. Used to detect excess outside air. Range is 400-4000, default is 800.

Excess Air Detect Timer air detection with a range of 30-240. Default is 150.

Econ Auto-Test Day ( form automatic economizer test. Range=NEVER, MON, TUE, WED, THR, FRI, SAT, SUN. Default is SAT.

Econ Auto=Test Time ( form automatic economizer test. The range is 0-23, default is 2.

T24 AutoTest SF Run Time run supply fan before sampling torque or making torque comparison. Range is 1 to 10, default is 2.

T24 Auto-Test VFD Speed during economizer auto-component test. Range is 10 to 50, default is 20.

T24 Auto-Test Econ % Open ( each economizer during auto-component test. Range is 1 to

100. Default is 30. T24 Auto-Test VFD % Change

change in torque when damper opens from 0 to AC.OP and then from AC.OP to 0. Range is 1 to 20, default is 10.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — The economizer configuration options are under the Local Display Mode Configura-

tion



ECON. See Table 54. ECONOMIZER OPERATION Is Economizer Enabled?

used or is to be completely disabled the configuration option EC.EN may be set to NO. Otherwise the economizer enabled configuration must be set to YES. Without the economizer enabled, the outdoor-air dampers will open to minimum position when the supply fan is running. Outdoor-air dampers will spring-return closed upon loss of power or shutdown of the supply fan.

What is the Economizer Minimum Position? uration option EC.MN is the economizer minimum position. See the section on Indoor Air Quality for further information on how to reset the economizer even further to gain energy savings and to more carefully monitor "indoor IAQ problems."

What is the Economizer Maximum Position? limit of the economizer may be clamped if so desired via configuration option EC.MX.

It defaults to 98% to avoid problems associated with slight changes in the economizer damper's end stop over time. Typically this will not need to be adjusted.

What is Economizer Trim for Sum Z? simple explanation. Sum Z stands for the adaptive cooling

(X.CFM) — The max allowed excess air in

(AC.EC) — The allowed

(E.GAP) — The discrepancy be-

(E.TMR) — The timer for actuator

(X.TMR) — The timer for excess

EC.DY) — The day on which to per-

EC.TM) — The time at which to per-

(AC.MR) — Amount of time to

(AC.SP) — Speed to run VFD

AC.OP) — Amount to open

(VF.PC) — Expected

— If an economizer is not being

— The config-

— The upper

— A strange title but a

control algorithm used for multiple stages of compression. The configuration option, E.TRM is typically set to Yes, and allows the economizer to modulate to the same control point "Sum Z" uses to control compressor staging. The advantage is lower compressor cycling coupled with tighter temperature control. Setting this option to "No" will cause the economizer, if it is indeed able to provide free cooling, to open to the Economizer Max. Position (EC.MX) during mechanical cooling.

ECONOMIZER CHANGEOVER SELECTION — There are four potential elements at play which may run concurrently which determine whether the economizer is able to provide free cooling:

• Dry Bulb Changeover (outside air temperature qualification)

• The Enthalpy Switch (discrete switch input monitoring)

• Economizer Changeover Select (E.SEL economizer changeover select configuration option)

• Outdoor Dewpoint Limit Check (needs an outdoor relative humidity sensor installed)

Dry Bulb Changeover viewed under TemperaturesAIR.TOAT.

The control constantly compares its outside-air temperature

reading against OAT.L. If the temperature reads above OAT.L, the economizer will not be allowed to perform free cooling.

NOTE: If the user wishes to disable the enthalpy switch from running concurrently, a field-supplied jumper must be installed between TB201 terminals 3 and 4.

Enthalpy Switch viewed under Inputs installed as standard on all N Series rooftops. When the switch reads HIGH, free cooling will be disallowed.

The enthalpy switch opens* when the outdoor enthalpy is

above 24 Btu/lb or dry bulb temperature is above 70 F and will close when the outdoor enthalpy is below 23 Btu/lb or the dry bulb temperature is below 69.5 F.

There are two jumpers under the cover of the enthalpy

switch. One jumper determines the mode of the enthalpy switch/receiver. The other is not used. For the enthalpy switch, the factory setting is M1 and should not need to be changed.

The enthalpy switch may also be field converted to a differ-

ential enthalpy switch by field installing an enthalpy sensor (33CSENTSEN or HL39ZZ003). The enthalpy switch/receiver remains installed in its factory location to sense outdoor air enthalpy. The additional enthalpy sensor is mounted in the return air stream to measure return air enthalpy. The enthalpy control jumper must be changed from M1 to M2 for differential enthalpy control. For the return air enthalpy sensor, a "two wire" sensor, connect power to the Vin input and signal to the 4-20 loop input.

It should be noted that there is another way to accomplish

differential enthalpy control when both an outdoor and return air relative humidity sensor are present. See section on Economizer Changeover Select for further information.

*NOTE: The enthalpy switch has both a low and a high output. To use this switch as designed the control must be connected to the "low" output. Additionally there is a "switch logic" setting for the enthalpy switch under Configuration SW.LGENT.L. This setting must be configured to closed (CLSE) to work properly when connected to the low output of the enthalpy switch.

— Outside-air temperature may be

— The state of the enthalpy switch can be



GEN.IENTH. Enthalpy switches are



IAQ



Table 54 — Economizer Configuration Table

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

EC.EN Economizer Installed? Yes/No ECON_ENA Yes EC.MN Economizer Min.Position 0 - 100 % ECONOMIN 5 EC.MX Economizer Max.Position 0 - 100 % ECONOMAX 98 E.TRM Economzr Trim For SumZ ? Yes/No ECONTRIM Yes E.SEL Econ ChangeOver Select 0 - 3 ECON_SEL 0 DDB.C OA.E.C OA Enthalpy ChgOvr Selct 1 - 5 OAEC_SEL 4 OA.EN Outdr.Enth Compare Value 18 - 28 OAEN_CFG 24 OAT.L High OAT Lockout Temp 55 - 120 dF OAT_LOCK 60 O.DE W OA Dewpoint Temp Limit 50 - 62 dF OADEWCFG 55 ORH.S Outside Air RH Sensor Enable/Disable OARHSENS Disable CFM.C OUTDOOR AIR CFM CONTROL OCF.S Outdoor Air CFM Sensor Enable/Disable OCFMSENS Disable O.C.MX Economizer Min.Flow 0 - 20000 CFM OACFMMAX 2000 O.C.MN IAQ Demand Vent Min.Flow 0 - 20000 CFM OACFMMIN 0 O.C.DB Econ.Min.Flow Deadband 200 - 1000 CFM OACFM_DB 400 E.CFG ECON.OPERATION CONFIGS E.P.GN Economizer Prop.Gain 0.7 - 3.0 EC_PGAIN 1 E.RNG Economizer Range Adjust 0.5 - 5 ^F EC_RANGE 2.5 E.SPD Economizer Speed Adjust 0.1 - 10 EC_SPEED 0.75 E.DBD Economizer Deadband 0.1 - 2 ^F EC_DBAND 0.5 UEFC UNOCC.ECON.FREE COOLING FC.CF Unoc Econ Free Cool Cfg 0-2 UEFC_CFG 0 FC.TM Unoc Econ Free Cool Time 0 - 720 min UEFCTIME 120 FC.L.O Un.Ec.Free Cool OAT Lock 40 - 70 dF UEFCNTLO 50 ACT.C ECON.ACTUATOR CONFIGS SN.1.1 Econ Serial Number 1 0 - 255 ECON_SN1 0 SN.1.2 Econ Serial Number 2 0 - 255 ECON_SN2 0 SN.1.3 Econ Serial Number 3 0 - 255 ECON_SN3 0 SN.1.4 Econ Serial Number 4 0 - 255 ECON_SN4 0 SN.1.5 Econ Serial Number 5 0 - 255 ECON_SN5 0 C.A.L1 Econ Ctrl Angle Lo Limit 0 - 90 ECONCALM 85 SN.2.1 Econ 2 Serial Number 1 0 - 255 ECN2_SN1 0 SN.2.2 Econ 2 Serial Number 2 0 - 255 ECN2_SN2 0 SN.2.3 Econ 2 Serial Number 3 0 - 255 ECN2_SN3 0 SN.2.4 Econ 2 Serial Number 4 0 - 255 ECN2_SN4 0 SN.2.5 Econ 2 Serial Number 5 0 - 255 ECN2_SN5 0 C.A.L2 Econ 2 Ctrl Angle Lo Limit 0 - 90 ECN2CALM 85 SN.3.1 Econ 3 Serial Number 1 0 - 255 ECN3_SN1 0 SN.3.2 Econ 3 Serial Number 2 0 - 255 ECN3_SN2 0 SN.3.3 Econ 3 Serial Number 3 0 - 255 ECN3_SN3 0 SN.3.4 Econ 3 Serial Number 4 0 - 255 ECN3_SN4 0 SN.3.5 Econ 3 Serial Number 5 0 - 255 ECN3_SN5 0 C.A.L3 Econ 3 Ctrl Angle Lo Limit 0 - 90 ECN3CALM 85 T.24.C TITLE 24 CONFIGS LOG.F Log Title 24 Faults Yes/No T24LOGFL No EC.MD T24 Econ Move Detect 1 - 10 T24ECMDB 1 EC.ST T24 Econ Move SAT Test 10 - 20 T24ECSTS 10 S.CHG T24 Econ Move SAT Change 0 - 5 T24SATMD 0.2 E.SOD T24 Econ RAT-OAT Diff 5 - 20 T24RATDF 15 E.CHD T24 Heat/Cool End Delay 0 - 60 T24CHDLY 25 ET.MN T24 Test Minimum Pos. 0 - 50 T24TSTMN 15 ET.MX T24 Test Maximum Pos. 50 - 100 T24TSTMX 85 SAT.T SAT Settling Time 10 - 900 SAT_SET 240 AC.EC Economizer Deadband Temp 0 - 10 AC_EC_DB 4 E.GAP Econ Fault Detect Gap 2 - 100 EC_FLGAP 5 E.TMR Econ Fault Detect Timer 10 - 240 EC_FLTMR 20 X.CFM Excess Air CFM 400 - 4000 EX_ARCFM 800 X.TMR Excess Air Detect Timer 30 - 240 EX_ARTMR 150 AC.MR T24 AutoTest SF Run Time 1 - 10 T24ACMRT 2 AC.SP T24 Auto-Test VFD Speed 10 - 50 T24ACSPD 20 AC.OP T24 Auto-Test Econ % Opn 1 - 100 T24ACOPN 30 VF.PC T24 Auto-Test VFD % Chng 1 - 20 T24VFDPC 10

EC.DY

EC.TM T24 Econ Auto-Test Time 0 - 23 T24_ECTM 2

Diff Dry Bulb RAT Offset 0 - 3

T24 Econ Auto-Test Day 0=Never,

1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday, 5=Friday, 6=Saturday, 7=Sunday

EC_DDBCO ?

T24_ECDY 6=Saturday

Economizer Changeover Select

Fig. 16 — Custom Changeover Curve Example

a48-8722

— The control is capable of performing any one of the following changeover types in addition to both the dry bulb lockout and the discrete switch input:

E.SEL = 0 none E.SEL = 1 Differential Dry Bulb Changeover E.SEL = 2 Outdoor Enthalpy Changeover E.SEL = 3 Differential Enthalpy Changeover

Differential Dry Bulb Changeover

— As both return air and outside air temperature sensors are installed as standard on these units, the user may select this option, E.SEL = 1, to per- form a qualification of return and outside air in the enabling/ disabling of free cooling. If this option is selected and outsideair temperature is greater than return-air temperature, free cooling will not be allowed.

Outdoor Enthalpy Changeover

— This option should be used in climates with higher humidity conditions. Unlike most control systems that use an enthalpy switch or enthalpy sensor, the N Series units can use the standard installed outdoor dry bulb sensor and an accessory relative humidity sensor to calculate the enthalpy of the air.

Setting E.SEL = 2, requires that the user configure OA.E.C, the "Outdoor Enthalpy Changeover Select" configuration item, install an outdoor relative humidity sensor and to make sure a control expansion module board (CEM) is present. Once the sensor and board are installed, all the user need do is to enable ORH.S, the outdoor relative humidity sensor configuration option. This in turn will enable the CEM board to be read, if it is not so already, automatically.

NOTE: If the user wishes to disable the enthalpy switch from running concurrently, a field-supplied jumper must be installed between TB201 terminals 3 and 4.

Differential Enthalpy Changeover

— This option compares the outdoor air enthalpy to the return air enthalpy and favors the airstream with the lowest enthalpy. This option should be used in climates with high humidity conditions. This option uses both humidity sensors and dry bulb sensors to calculate

the enthalpy of the outdoor and return air. An accessory outdoor air humidity sensor (ORH.S) and return air humidity sen- sor (RRH.S) are used. The outdoor air relative humidity sensor configuration (ORH.S) and return air humidity sensor configu- ration (Configuration



SENSRRH.S) must be enabled.

NOTE: If the user wishes to disable the enthalpy switch from running concurrently, a field-supplied jumper must be installed between TB201 terminals 3 and 4.

Outdoor Dewpoint Limit Check

— If an outdoor relative humidity sensor is installed, the control is able to calculate the outdoor air dewpoint temperature and will compare this temperature against the outside air dewpoint temperature limit configuration (O.DEW).

If the outdoor air dewpoint temperature is greater than

O.DEW, "free cooling" will not be allowed. Custom Psychrometric Curves

— See Figure 16 for an exam-

ple of a custom curve constructed on a psychrometric chart. Configuring the Economizer to Communicate Via Actuator

"Serial Number" — Every actuator used in the N Series control system has its own unique serial number. The rooftop control uses this serial number to communicate with the actuator over the local equipment network (LEN). These serial numbers are programmed at the factory and should not need changing. Should field replacement of an actuator become necessary, it will be required to configure the serial numbers of the new actuator. Five individual numbers make up this serial number and these can be programmed to match the serial number of the actuator in its "Economizer Actuator Configs" group, ACT.C. (SN.1.1, SN.1.2, SN.1.3, SN.1.4, SN.1.5, SN.2.1, SN.2.2,

SN.2.3, SN.2.4, SN.2.5, SN.3.1, SN.3.2, SN.3.3, SN.3.4, SN.3.5).

NOTE: The serial numbers for all "LEN" actuators can be found inside the control doors of the unit as well as on the actuator itself. If an actuator is replaced in the field, it is a good idea to remove the additional peel off serial number sticker on the actuator and cover up the old one inside the control doors.

40 45

DEWPOINT TEMPERATURE

50 55

60 65

70 75

90%

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

10%

80 85

ENTHALPY

RELATIVE HUMIDITY

90 95

20 25

100 105

110

DRY BULB TEMPERATURE

115

Control Angle Alarm Configuration tuator learns what its end stops are though a calibration at the factory. Field-installed actuators may be calibrated in the Service Test mode. When an actuator learns its end stops through calibration, internally it remembers what its "control angle" is. From that moment on, the actuator will resolve this control angle and express its operation in a percent (%) of this "learned range."

If the economizer has not learned a "sufficient" or "large enough" control angle during calibration, the economizer damper will be unable to control ventilation and free cooling, For this reason the economizer actuator used in the N Series control system has a configurable "control angle" alarm low limit in its "Economizer Actuator Configs" group, ACT.C. (C.A.L1, C.A.L2, C.A.L3). If the control angle learned through calibration is less than C.A.L1, C.A.L2, or C.AL3, an alert will occur and the actuator will not function.

NOTE: This configuration does not typically need adjustment. It is configurable for the small number of jobs which may require a custom solution or workaround.

UNOCCUPIED ECONOMIZER FREE COOLING — This "Free Cooling" function is used to start the supply fan and use the economizer to bring in outside air when the outside temperature is cool enough to pre-cool the space. This is done to delay the need for mechanical cooling when the system enters the occupied period. Once the space has been sufficiently cooled during this cycle, the fan will be stopped.

In basic terms, the economizer will modulate in an unoccupied period and attempt to maintain space temperature to the "occupied" cooling set point. This necessitates the presence of a space temperature sensor.

Configuring the economizer for Unoccupied Economizer Free Cooling is done in the UEFC group. Here you will find three configuration options, FC.CF, FC.TM and FC.LO re- spectively.

Unoccupied Economizer Free Cooling Configuration (FC.CF) — This option is used to configure the "type" of unoccupied economizer free cooling control that is desired.

0 = disable unoccupied economizer free cooling 1 = perform unoccupied economizer free cooling as available

during the entire unoccupied period. 2 = perform unoccupied economizer free cooling as available,

FC.TM minutes before the next occupied period. Unoccupied Economizer Free Cooling Time Configuration

(FC.TM) — This option is a configurable time period, prior to the "next occupied period," that the control will allow unoccupied economizer free cooling to operate. This option is only applicable when FC.CF = 2.

Unoccupied Economizer Free Cooling Lockout Temperature (FC.LO) — This configuration option allows the user to select an outside air temperature, that below which unoccupied free cooling is disallowed. This is further explained in the logic section.

Unoccupied Economizer Free Cooling Logic qualifications that must be in order for unoccupied free cooling to operate.

• Unit configured for an economizer

• Unit in the unoccupied mode

• FC.CF set to 1 or FC.CF set to 2 and within FC.TM

minutes of the next occupied period

• Not in the Temperature Compensated Start Mode

• Not in a cooling mode

• Not in a heating mode

• Not in a tempering mode

• Space temperature sensor enabled and sensor reading

healthy

— The economizer ac-

— There are

• Outside air temperature sensor healthy

• The economizer would be allowed to cool if the fan were requested and in a cool mode.

• OAT > FC.LO ( 1.0 dF hysteresis applied)

• The rooftop is not in a fire smoke mode

• No fan failure when configured to shut the unit down on a fan failure

If all of the above conditions are satisfied: Unoccupied Economizer Free Cooling shall start when both

of the following conditions are true:

{SPT > (OCSP + 2)} AND {SPT > (OAT + 8)} The Night Time Free Cooling Mode shall stop when either

of the following conditions are true:

{SPT < OCSP} OR {SPT < (OAT + 3)} …where SPT = Space Temperature and OCSP = Occupied

Cooling Setpoint

When the Unoccupied Economizer Free Cooling mode is

active, the supply fan is turned on and the economizer damper modulated to control to the supply air setpoint (Set-

points



(Inputs OUTDOOR AIR CFM CONTROL — If an outdoor air cfm

flow station has been installed on a N Series rooftop, the economizer is able to provide minimum ventilation based on CFM, instead of damper position. The Outdoor Air CFM reading can be found in Inputs

control: Outdoor Air CFM Sensor Enable (

enabled the outdoor air cfm sensor will be read and outside air cfm control will be enabled.

Economizer Minimum Flow Rate ( configuration option replaces the Economizer Minimum Position (EC.MN) when the outdoor air cfm sensor is enabled.

IAQ Demand Vent Minimum Flow Rate ( "CFM" configuration option replaces the IAQ Demand Ventilation Minimum Position (Configuration IAQ.M) when the outdoor air cfm sensor is enabled.

Economizer Minimum Flow Deadband ( "CFM" configuration option defines the deadband of the CFM control logic.

tain amount of CFM at any time for ventilation purposes. If the outdoor air cfm measured is less than the current calculated CFM minimum position, then the economizer will attempt to open until the outdoor air cfm is greater than or equal to this cfm minimum position. Now, this configurable deadband helps keeps the economizer from attempting to close until the outdoor air cfm rises to the current minimum cfm position PLUS the deadband value. Increasing this deadband value may help to slow down excessive economizer movement when attempting to control to a minimum position at the expense of bringing in more ventilation air then desired.

ECONOMIZER OPERATION CONFIGURATIONS (WHICH AFFECT FREE COOLING ACTUATOR MODULATION) — There are configuration items in the E.CFG menu group that affect how the economizer modulates when attempting to follow an economizer cooling set point. Typically, they will not need adjustment. In fact, it is strongly advised not to adjust these configurations from their default settings without first consulting a service engineering representative.

algorithm is designed to automatically slow down the economizer actuator's rate of travel as outside-air temperature decreases. See Table 55.

SASP) plus any supply air reset that may be applied



RSETSA.S.R).



CFMO.CFM .

The following options are used to program outside air cfm

OCF.S) — If this option is

O.C.MX) — This "CFM"

O.C.MN) — This



IAQDCV.C

O.C.DB) — This

During CFM control, the economizer must guarantee a cer-

In addition, it should be noted that the economizer cooling



Table 55 — Economizer Run Status Table

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT WRITE STATUS

EC1.P Economizer 1 Out Act. Curr. Pos. 0-100 % ECONOPOS EC2.P Economizer 2 Ret. Act.Curr.Pos. 0-100 % ECON2POS EC3.P Economizer 3 Out Act.Curr.Pos. 0-100 % ECON3POS ECN.C Economizer Out Act.Cmd.Pos. 0-100 % ECONOCMD forcible ACTV Economizer Active ? YES/NO ECACTIVE DISA ECON DISABLING CONDITIONS UNV.1 Econ Out Act. Unavailable? YES/NO ECONUNAV UNV.2 Econ2 Ret Act. Unavailable? YES/NO ECN2UNAV UNV.3 Econ3 Out Act. Unavailable? YES/NO ECN3UNAV ENTH Enth. Switch Read High ? YES/NO ENTH DBC DBC - OAT Lockout? YES/NO DBC_STAT DEW DEW - OA Dewpt.Lockout? YES/NO DEW_STAT DDBC DDBD- OAT > RAT Lockout? YES/NO DDBCSTAT OAEC OAEC- OA Enth Lockout? YES/NO OAECSTAT DEC DEC - Diff.Enth.Lockout? YES/NO DEC_STAT EDT EDT Sensor Bad? YES/NO EDT_STAT OAT OAT Sensor Bad ? YES/NO OAT_STAT FORC Economizer Forced ? YES/NO ECONFORC SFON Supply Fan Not On 30s ? YES/NO SFONSTAT CLOF Cool Mode Not In Effect? YES/NO COOL_OFF OAQL OAQ Lockout in Effect ? YES/NO OAQLOCKD HELD Econ Recovery Hold Off? YES/NO ECONHELD DH.DS Dehumid. Disabled Econ.? YES/NO DHDISABL O.AIR OUTSIDE AIR INFORMATION OAT Outside Air Temperature dF OAT forcible OA.RH Outside Air Rel. Humidity % OARH forcible OA.E Outside Air Enthalpy OAE OA.D.T Outside Air Dewpoint Temp dF OADEWTMP

ECONOMIZER DIAGNOSTIC HELP — Because there are so many conditions which might disable the economizer from being able to provide free cooling, the control offers a handy place to identify these potentially disabling sources. All the user has to do is check ACTV, the "Economizer Active" flag. If this flag is set to "Yes" there is no reason to explore the group under DISA, the "Economizer Disabling Conditions." If the flag is set to "No," this means that at least one or more of the flags under the group DISA are set to "Yes" and the user can easily discover exactly what is preventing the economizer from performing "free cooling."

In addition, the economizer's reported and commanded positions are viewable as well as one convenient place to view outside-air temperature, relative humidity, enthalpy and dew point temperature.

The following information can be found under the local display mode Run Status

Economizer Control Point Determination Logic



ECON.

— Once the economizer is allowed to provide free cooling, the economizer must determine exactly what set point it should try to maintain. The set point the economizer attempts to maintain when “free cooling” is located at Run Status



VIEWEC.C.P. This is

the economizer control point.

The control selects set points differently, based on the

control type of the unit. This control type can be found at

Configuration



UNITC.TYP. There are 4 types of control.

C.TYP = 1 VAV-RAT C.TYP = 2 VAV-SPT C.TYP = 3 TSTAT Multi-Staging C.TYP = 4 SPT Multi-Staging

If the economizer is not allowed to do free cooling, then EC.C.P = 0.

If the economizer is allowed to do free cooling and the

Unoccupied Free Cooling Mode is ON, then EC.C.P =

Setpoints



SASP + InputsRSETSA.S.R.

If the economizer is allowed to do free cooling and the Dehumidification mode is ON, then EC.C.P = the Cooling Control Point (Run Status



VIEWCL.C.P).

NOTE: To check the current cooling stage go to Run Status



CoolCUR.S.

If the C.TYP is either 1,2,3 or 4, and the unit is in a cool

mode, then EC.C.P = the Cooling Control Point (Run Status VIEWCL.C.P).

Building Pressure Control — The N Series Com-

fortLink controller supports several physical rooftop configura-

tions which are used to control building pressure. This section will describe the various types used. See Table 56.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — The building pressure configs are found at the local display under Configuration

Building Pressure Configuration ( tion selects the type of building pressure control in place

• BP.CF = 0, No building pressure control

• BP.CF = 1, VFD controlling power exhaust to modulate building pressure control based on building pressure sensor

• BP.CF = 2, VFD controlling return fan (VFD fan track- ing)

Building Pressure Sensor ( the reading of a building pressure sensor when enabled. This sensor configuration is automatically enabled when BP.CF = 1 or 2.

Building Pressure (+/-) Range ( establishes the range in H2O that a 4 to 20 mA sensor will be scaled to. This configuration only allows sensors that measure both "positive and negative" pressure.

Building Pressure Setpoint ( building pressure control setpoint. If configured for a type of modulating building pressure control then this is the set point that the control will try to clamp or control to.

Building Pressure Setpoint Offset ( pressure configurations BP.CF=1, this is the offset below the building pressure set point that the building pressure must fall below to turn off and disable power exhaust control.

VFD/ Actuator Fire Speed/Pos. ( and 2, this configuration is the fire speed override position when the control is in the purge and evacuation smoke control modes.

VFD/ Actuator Minimum Speed/Pos. ( BP.CF = 1 and 2, this configuration is the minimum VFD speed/actuator position during building pressure operation below which the VFD/actuator may not control.

BP.CF) — This configura-

BP.S) —This configuration allows

BP.R) — This configuration

BP.SP) — This set point is the

BP.SO) — For building

BP.FS) — For BP.CF = 1

BP.MN) — For



BP.

Table 56 — Building Pressure Control Table

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT WRITE STATUS

BP BUILDING PRESSURE CONFIGURATIONS BP.CF Building Pressure Configuration 0 - 3 BLDG_CFG 0* BP.S Building Pressure Sensor Enable/Disable BPSENS Disable* BP.R Building Pressure (+/-) Range 0.10 - 0.25 H20 BP_Range 0.25

BP.SP BP.SO BP Setpoint Offset 0 - 0.5 H20 BPSO 0.05

B.V.A VFD CONFIGURATION BP.FS VFD/Act. Fire Speed/Pos. 0 - 100 % BLDGPFSO 100 BP.MN VFD/Act. Min. Speed/Pos. 0 - 50 % BLDGPMIN 10 BP.MX VFD Maximum Speed 50 - 100 % BLDGPMAX 100 FAN.T FAN TRACKING CONFIG FT.CF Fan Track Learn Enable Yes/No DCFM_CFG No FT.TM Fan Track Learn Rate 5 - 60 min DCFMRATE 15 FT.ST Fan Track Initial DCFM –20,000 - 20,000 CFM DCFMSTRT 2000 FT.MX Fan Track Max Clamp 0 - 20,000 CFM CDCFM_MAX 4000 FT.AD Fan Track Max Correction 0 - 20,000 CFM DCFM_ADJ 1,000 FT.OF Fan Track Internal EEPROM –20,000 - 20,000 CFM DCFM_OFF 0 FT.RM Fan Track Internal RAM –20,000 - 20,000 CFM DCFM_RAM 0 FT.RS Fan Track Reset Internal Yes/No DCFMRSET No FAN.C SUPPLY, RETURN FAN CFG SCF.C Supply Air CFM Config 1 - 2 SCFM_CFG 2 REF.C Return/Exhaust Air CFM Config. 1 - 2 RCFM_CFG 2 SCF.S Supply Air CFM Sensor Enable/Disable SCFMSENS Disable* RCF.S Return Air CFM Sensor Enable/Disable RCFMSENS Disable* ECF.S Exhaust Air CFM Sensor Enable/Disable ECFMSENS Disable* B.PID BLDG. PRESS. PID CONFIGURATIONS BP.TM Bldg. Press. PID Run Rate 5 - 120 sec BPIDRATE 10 BP.P Bldg. Press. Prop. Gain 0 - 5 BLDGP_PG 0.5 BP.I Bldg. Press. Integ. Gain 0 - 2 BLDGP_IG 0.5 BP.D Bldg. Press. Deriv. Gain 0 - 5 BLDGP_DG 0.3

* Some configurations are model number dependent.

VFD Maximum Speed/Pos. (BP.MX) — For BP.CF = 1 and 2, this configuration is the maximum VFD speed during building pressure operation above which the VFD may not control.

Fan Track Learn Enable ( turn/exhaust control configuration selects whether the "fan tracking" algorithm will make corrections over time and add a "learned" offset to FT.ST. If this configuration is set to NO, the unit will try to control the delta cfm value between the suppy and return VFDs only based on FT.ST.

Fan Track Learn Rate ( turn/exhaust control configuration is a timer whereby corrections to the delta cfm operation are made. The smaller this value, the more often corrections may be made based on building pressure error. This configuration is only valid when FT.CF = Ye s .

Fan Track Initial DCFM ( turn/exhaust control configuration is the start point upon which corrections (offset) is made over time when FT.CF = Yes and is the constant control point for delta cfm control when FT.CF = No.

Fan Track Max Clamp ( turn/exhaust control configuration is the maximum positive delta cfm control value allowed unless outdoor air cfm control is available and then the delta cfm control value would be clamped to the outdoor air cfm value directly (see the Economizer section for a description of outdoor air cfm configuration).

Fan Track Max Correction ( return/exhaust control configuration is the max correction that is possible to be made every time a correction is made based on FT.TM. This configuration is only valid when FT.CF = Yes.

Fan Track Internal EEPROM ( this return/exhaust control internal EEPROM value is a learned correction that is stored in non-volatile RAM and adds to the offset when FT.CF = Yes. This value is stored once a day after the first correction. This configuration is only valid when FT.CF = Yes.

Fan Track Internal RAM ( return/exhaust control internal value is not a configuration but a run time correction that adds to the offset when FT.CF = Yes

Building Pressure Setp. –0.25 - 0.25 H20 BPSP 0.05

throughout the day. This value is only valid when FT.CF = Ye s .

FT.CF) — For BP.CF = 2, this re-

Fan Track Reset Internal ( time reset of the internal RAM and internal EEPROM stored

FT.RS) — This option is a one

offsets. If the system is not set up right and the offsets are incorrect, this "learned" value can be reset.

Supply Air CFM Configuration (

SCF.C) — This configuration is set at the factory depending on whether a high or low supply fan is installed. This information is then used by the

FT.TM) — For BP.CF = 2, this re-

control to determine the correct cfm tables to be used when measuring supply air cfm.

Return/Exhaust Air CFM Configuration ( configuration is set at the factory depending on whether a high or low return fan is installed. This information is then used by the control to determine the correct cfm tables to be used when

FT.ST) — For BP.CF = 2, this re-

measuring return or exhaust air cfm. Supply Air CFM Sensor (

SCF.S) — This configuration al-

lows the reading of supply air cfm when enabled.

FT.MX) — For BP.CF = 2, this re-

Return Air CFM Sensor ( lows the reading of return air cfm when enabled. This sensor and ECF.S share the same analog input so are mutually exclu-

RCF.S) — This configuration al-

sive. Exhaust Air CFM Sensor (

ECF.S) — This configuration allows the reading of exhaust air cfm when enabled. This sensor and RCF.S share the same analog input so are mutually exclu- sive.

FT.AD) — For BP.CF = 2, this

Building Pressure Run Rate ( 2, this configuration is the PID run time rate.

Building Pressure Proportional Gain (

BP.TM) — For BP.CF = 1 and

BP.P) — For BP.CF =

1 and 2, this configuration is the PID Proportional Gain.

FT.OF) — For BP.CF = 2,

Building Pressure Integral Gain (

BP.I) — For BP.CF = 1 and

2, this configuration is the PID Integral Gain. Building Pressure Derivative Gain (

BP.D) — For BP.CF = 1

and 2, this configuration is the PID Derivative Gain. BUILDING PRESSURE CONTROL BASED ON BP.CF

FT.RM) — For BP.CF = 5, this

VFD Controlling Exhaust Fan Motors ( controlling high capacity power exhaust consists of an exhaust fan VFD (Outputs exhaust relay (Outputs



FA NSE.VFD) enabled by one power



FA NSP. E . 1 ). If building pressure

BP.CF =1) — VFD

REF.C) — This

(Pressures



AIR.PBP) rises above the building pressure set

point (BP.SP) and the supply fan is on, then building pressure control is initialized. Thereafter, if the supply fan relay goes off or if the building pressure drops below the BP.SP minus the building pressure set point offset (BP.SO) for 5 continuous minutes, building pressure control will be stopped. The 5-minute timer will continue to re-initialize if the VFD is still commanded to a position > 0%. If the building pressure falls below the set point, the VFD will close automatically. Any time building pressure control becomes active, the exhaust fan relay turns on which energizes the exhaust fan VFD. Control is performed with a PID loop where:

Error = BP - BP.SP K = 1000 * BP.TM/60 (normalize the PID control for run rate) P = K * BP.P * (error) I = K * BP.I * (error) + "I" calculated last time through the PID D = K * BP.D * (error - error computed last time through the

PID) VFD output (clamped between BP.MN and BP.MX%) = P + I

+ D

If building pressure (BP) rises above the building pressure set point (BP.SP) and the supply fan is on, building pressure control is initialized. Thereafter if the supply fan relay goes off or if the building pressure drops below the BP.SP minus the building pressure set point offset (BP.SO) for 5 continuous minutes, building pressure control will be stopped. The 5-minute timer will continue to reload if the VFD is still commanded to a position > 0%. If the building pressure falls below the set point, the VFD will close automatically. Any time building pressure control becomes active, the exhaust fan relay turns on which energizes the exhaust fan VFD.

Return/Exhaust Control (

BP.CF =2) — The fan tracking algorithm controls the return fan VFD and the exhaust fan relay. Fan tracking is the method of control used on plenum return fan option. The ComfortLink control uses a flow station to measure both the flow of both the supply and the return fans. The control will measure the airflow of both the supply fan and the return fan. The speed of the return fan is controlled by maintaining a delta cfm (usually with supply airflow being greater of the two) between the two fans. The building pressure is controlled by maintaining this delta cfm between the two fans. The higher that supply airflow quantity increases above the return airflow, the higher the building pressure will be. Conversely, as the return airflow quantity increases above the supply airflow, the lower the building pressure will be. Whenever there is a request for the supply fan (or there is the presence of the IGC feedback on gas heat units), the return fan is started. The delta cfm is defined as S.CFM - R.CFM. The return fan VFD is controlled by a PID on the error of delta cfm actual from delta cfm set point. If the error is positive the drive will increase speed. If the error is negative the drive will decrease speed.

NOTE: These configurations are used only if Fan Tracking Learning is enabled. When Fan Tracking Learning is enabled, the control will adjust the delta cfm (FT.ST) between the sup- ply and return fan if the building pressure deviates from the Building Pressure Set Point (BP.SP). Periodically, at the rate set by the Fan Track Learn Rate (FT.TM), the delta cfm is adjusted upward or downward with a maximum adjustment at a given instance to be no greater than Fan Track Max Correction (FT.AD). The delta cfm can not ever be adjusted greater than or less than the Fan Track Initial Delta Cfm (FT.ST) than by the Fan Track Max Clamp (FT.MX).

Smoke Control Modes — There are four smoke con-

trol modes that can be used to control smoke within areas serviced by the unit: Pressurization mode, Evacuation mode, Smoke Purge mode, and Fire Shutdown. Evacuation, Pressurization and Smoke Purge modes require the controls expansion

board (CEM). The Fire Shutdown input is located on the main base board (MBB) on terminals TB201-1 and 2. The unit may also be equipped with a factory-installed return air smoke detector that is wired to TB201-1,2 and will shut the unit down if a smoke condition is determined. Field-monitoring wiring can be connected to terminal TB201-1 and 2 to monitor the smoke detector. Inputs on the CEM board can be used to put the unit in the Pressurization, Evacuation, and Smoke Purge modes. These switches or inputs are connected to TB202: Pressurization — TB202-18 and 19, Evacuation — TB202-16 and 17, and Smoke Purge — TB202-14 and 15. Refer to Major System Components section on page 127 for wiring diagrams.

Each mode must be energized individually on discrete inputs and the corresponding alarm is initiated when a mode is activated. The fire system provides a normally closed dry contact closure. Multiple smoke control inputs, sensed by the control will force the unit into a Fire Shutdown mode.

FIRE SMOKE INPUTS — These discrete inputs can be found on the local display under Inputs

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE

FIRE FIRE-SMOKE INPUTS FSD Fire Shutdown Input ALRM/NORM FSD forcible PRES Pressurization Input ALRM/NORM PRES forcible EVAC Evacuation Input ALRM/NORM EVAC forcible PURG Smoke Purge Input ALRM/NORM PURG forcible

Fire Shutdown Mode

— This mode will cause an immediate



FIRE.

CCN

POINT

WRITE

STATUS

and complete shutdown of the unit. Pressurization Mode

— This mode attempts to raise the pressure of a space to prevent smoke infiltration from an adjacent space. Opening the economizer (thereby closing the return air damper), shutting down power exhaust and turning the indoor fan on will increase pressure in the space.

Evacuation Mode

— This mode attempts to lower the pressure of the space to prevent infiltrating an adjacent space with its smoke. Closing the economizer (thereby opening the returnair damper), turning on the power exhaust and shutting down the indoor fan decrease pressure in the space.

Smoke Purge Mode

— This mode attempts to draw out smoke from the space after the emergency condition. Opening the economizer (thereby closing the return-air damper), turning on both the power exhaust and indoor fan will evacuate smoke and bring in fresh air.

AIRFLOW CONTROL DURING THE FIRE/SMOKE MODES — All non-smoke related control outputs will get shut down in the fire/smoke modes. Those related to airflow will be controlled as explained below. The following matrix specifies all actions the control shall undertake when each mode occurs (outputs are forced internally with CCN priority number 1 - “Fire”):

DEVICE PRESSURIZATION PURGE EVACUATION FIRE SD Economizer 100% 100% 0% 0% Indoor Fan —

VFD Power Exhaust

VFD Heat Interlock

Relay

*“FSO” refers to the supply and exhaust VFD fire speed override configurable speed.

ON/FSO* ON/FSO* OFF OFF

OFF ON/FSO* ON/FSO* OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

SMOKE CONTROL CONFIGURATION The economizer’s commanded output can be found in

Outputs



ECONECN.C.

The configurable fire speed override for supply fan VFD is in

Configuration

SP

SP.FS.

The supply fan relay’s commanded output can be found in

Outputs



FA NSS.FAN.

The supply fan VFD’s commanded speed can be found in

Outputs



FA NSS.VFD.

The configurable fire speed override for exhaust VFD/actuator is in Configuration

BP

B.V.ABP.FS.

The exhaust fan VFD’s commanded speed can be found in

Outputs



FA NSE.VFD.

Indoor Air Quality Control — The indoor air quality

(IAQ) function will admit fresh air into the space whenever space air quality sensors detect high levels of CO

When a space or return air CO

unit control, the unit’s IAQ routine allows a demand-based

sensor is connected to the

control for ventilation air quantity, by providing a modulating outside air damper position that is proportional to CO The ventilation damper position is varied between a minimum ventilation level (based on internal sources of contaminants and CO maximum design ventilation level (determined at maximum

levels other than from the effect of people) and the

populated status in the building). Demand controlled ventilation (DCV) is also available when the ComfortLink unit is connected to a CCN system using ComfortID™ terminal controls.

This function also provides alternative control methods for controlling the amount of ventilation air being admitted, including fixed outdoor air ventilation rates (measured as cfm), external discrete sensor switch input and externally generated proportional signal controls.

The IAQ function requires the installation of the factoryoption economizer system. The DCV sequences also require the connection of accessory (or field-supplied) space or return air CO installed outdoor air cfm option. External control of the

sensors. Fixed cfm rate control requires the factory-

ventilation position requires supplemental devices, including a 4 to 20 mA signal, a 10,000 ohm potentiometer, or a discrete switch input, depending on the method selected. Outside air CO

levels may also be monitored directly and high CO

economizer restriction applied when an outdoor air CO2 sensor is connected. (The outdoor CO2 sensor connection requires installation of the controls expansion module [CEM].)

The ComfortLink controls have the capability of DCV using an IAQ sensor. The indoor air quality (IAQ) is measured using a CO

sensor whose measurements are displayed in parts

per million (ppm). The IAQ sensor can be field-installed in the return duct. There is also an accessory space IAQ sensor that can be installed directly in the occupied space. The sensor must provide a 4 to 20 mA output signal. The sensor connects to TB201 terminals 7 and 8. Be sure to leave the 182-ohm resistor in place on terminals 7 and 8.

OPERATION — The unit’s indoor air quality algorithm modulates the position of the economizer dampers between two user configurations depending upon the relationship between the IAQ and the outdoor air quality (OAQ). Both of these values can be read at the Inputs



AIR.Q submenu. The lower of these two configurable positions is referred to as the IAQ Demand Vent Min Position (IAQ.M), while the higher is referred to as Economizer Minimum Position (EC.MN). The IAQ.M should be set to an economizer position that brings in enough fresh air to remove contaminants and CO es other than people. The EC.MN value should be set to an

economizer position that brings in enough fresh air to remove contaminants and CO ple. The EC.MN value is the design value for maximum occu-

generated by all sources including peo-

pancy.

The logic that is used to control the dampers in response to IAQ conditions is shown in Fig. 17. The ComfortLink controls will begin to open the damper from the IAQ.M position when the IAQ level begins to exceed the OAQ level by a configurable amount, which is referred to as Differential Air Quality Low Limit (DAQ.L).

If OAQ is not being measured, OAQ can be manually configured. It should be set at around 400 to 450 ppm or measured with a handheld sensor during the commissioning of the unit.

level.

generated by sourc-

The OAQ reference level can be set using the OAQ Reference Set Point (OAQ.U). When the differential between IAQ and OAQ reaches the configurable Diff. Air Quality Hi Limit (DAQ.H), then the economizer position will be EC.MN.

When the IAQ–OAQ differential is between DAQ.L and DAQ.H, the control will modulate the damper between IAQ.M and EC.MN as shown in Fig. 17. The relationship is a linear relationship but other non-linear options can be used. The damper position will never exceed the bounds specified by IAQ.M and EC.MN during IAQ control.

If the building is occupied and the indoor fan is running and the differential between IAQ and OAQ is less than DAQ.L, the economizer will remain at IAQ.M. The economizer will not close completely. The damper position will be 0 when the fan is not running or the building is unoccupied. The damper position may exceed EC.MN in order to provide free cooling.

The ComfortLink controls are configured for air quality sensors which provide 4 mA at 0 ppm and 20 mA at 2000 ppm. If a sensor has a different range, these bounds must be reconfigured. These pertinent configurations for ranging the air quality sensors are IQ.R.L, IQ.R.H, OQ.R.L and OQ.R.H. The bounds represent the PPM corresponding to 4 mA (low) and 20 mA (high) for IAQ and OAQ, respectively.

If OAQ exceeds the OAQ Lockout Value (OAQ.L), then the economizer will remain at IAQ.M. This is used to limit the use of outside air which outdoor air CO OAQ.L limit. Normally a linear control of the damper vs. the

levels are above the

IAQ control signal can be used, but the control also supports non-linear control. Different curves can be used based on the Diff.IAQ Responsiveness Variable (IAQ.R). See Fig. 18.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — The IAQ configuration op-

tions are under the Local Display Mode Configuration See Table 57.

IAQ Analog Sensor Config (

ConfigurationIAQ



IAQ.



AQ.CFIQ.A.C) — This is used to configure the type of IAQ position control. It has the following options:

• IQ.A.C = 0 (No analog input). If there is no other mini-

mum position control, the economizer minimum position

will be Configuration



IAQDCV.CEC.MN and

there will be no IAQ control.

• IQ.A.C = 1 (IAQ analog input). An indoor air (space or

return air) CO

sensor is also installed, or OAQ is broadcast on the CCN,

sensor is installed. If an outdoor air CO

or if a default OAQ value is used, then the unit can per-

form IAQ control.

• IQ.A.C = 2 (IAQ analog input with minimum position

override) — If the differential between IAQ and OAQ

is above Configuration



IAQAQ.SPDAQ.H, the

economizer minimum position will be the IAQ override

position (Configuration



IAQAQ.SPIQ.O.P).

• IQ.A.C = 3 (4 to 20 mA minimum position) — With a 4

to 20 mA signal connected to TB201 terminal 7 and 8,

the economizer minimum position will be scaled linearly

from 0% (4 mA) to EC.MN (20 mA).

• IQ.A.C = 4 (10K potentiometer minimum position) — With

a 10K linear potentiometer connected to TB201 terminal 7

and 8, the economizer minimum position will be scaled lin-

early from 0% (0 ohms) to EC.MN (10,000 ohms). IAQ Analog Fan Config (

ConfigurationIAQAQ.CF



IQ.A.F) — This configuration is used to configure the control of the indoor fan. If this option is used then the IAQ sensor must be in the space and not in the return duct. It has the following configurations:

• IQ.A.F = 0 (No Fan Start) — IAQ demand will never

override normal indoor fan operation during occupied or

unoccupied period and turn it on.

• IQ.A.F = 1 (Fan On If Occupied) — IAQ demand will

override normal indoor fan operation and turn it on (if

off) only during the occupied period (CV operation with

100 500

700

1000

INSIDE/OUTSIDE CO

DIFFERENTIAL

INSIDE CO

CONCENTRATION

AQ DIFFERENTIAL LOW (DAQ.L)

AQ DIFFERENTIAL HIGH (DAQ.H)

MINIMUM IAQ DAMPER POSITION

ECONOMIZER MINIMUM DAMPER POSITION

INCREASING VENTILATION

VENTILATION FOR PEOPLE

VENTILATION FOR SOURCES

Fig. 17 — IAQ Control

NOTE: Calculating the IAQ.M and EC.MN damper position based on differential IAQ measurement.

Based on the configuration parameter IAQREACT, the reaction to damper positioning based on differential air quality ppm can be adjusted.

IAQREACT = 1 to 5 (more responsive)

IAQREACT = 0 (linear)

IAQREACT = –1 to –5 (less responsive)

Fig. 18 — IAQ Response Curve

automatic fan).

• IQ.A.F = 2 (Fan On Occupied/Unoccupied) — IAQ demand will always override normal indoor fan operation and turn it on (if off) during both the occupied and unoccupied period. For IQ.A.F = 1 or 2, the fan will be turned on as described above when DAQ is above the DAQ Fan On Set Point (Configuration



IAQAQ.SPD.F.ON). The fan

will be turned off when DAQ is below the DAQ Fan Off Set Point (Configuration



IAQAQ.SPD.F.OF). The con-

trol can also be set up to respond to a discrete IAQ input. The discrete input is connected to TB202 terminal 12 and

13.

IAQ Discrete Input Config (



IQ.I.C) — This configuration is used to set the type of IAQ

ConfigurationIAQAQ.CF

sensor. The following are the options:

• IQ.I.C = 0 (No Discrete Input) — This is used to indicate that no discrete input will be used and the standard IAQ sensor input will be used.

• IQ.I.C = 1 (IAQ Discrete Input) — This will indicate that the IAQ level (high or low) will be indicated by the discrete input. When the IAQ level is low, the economizer minimum position will be Configuration IAQDCV.CIAQ.M.

• IQ.I.C = 2 (IAQ Discrete Input with Minimum Position Override. This will indicate that the IAQ level (high or low) will be indicated by the discrete input and the economizer minimum position will be the IAQ override position, IQ.P.O (when high). It is also necessary to configure how the fan operates when using the IAQ discrete input.

IAQ Discrete Fan Config (



IQ.I.F) — This is used to configure the operation of the

ConfigurationIAQAQ.CF

fan during an IAQ demand condition. It has the following configurations:

• IQ.I.F = 0 (No Fan Start) — IAQ demand will never override normal indoor fan operation during occupied or unoccupied period and turn it on.

• IQ.I.F = 1 (Fan On If Occupied) — IAQ demand will override normal indoor fan operation and turn it on (if off) only during the occupied period (CV operation with automatic fan).

• IQ.I.F = 2 (Fan On Occupied/Unoccupied) — IAQ demand will always override normal indoor fan operation and turn it on (if off) during both the occupied and unoccupied period.

Economizer Min Position (



EC.MN) — This is the fully occupied minimum economizer

ConfigurationIAQDCV.C

position. IAQ Demand Vent Min Pos. (

ConfigurationIAQ

DCV.CIAQ.M) — This configuration will be used to set the

minimum damper position in the occupied period when there is no IAQ demand.

IAQ Econo Override Pos (

ConfigurationIAQAQ.SP

IQ.O.P) — This configuration is the position that the econo-

mizer goes to when override is in effect. TOAQ 4-20 mA Sensor Config (

ConfigurationIAQ

AQ.CFOQ.A.C) — This is used to configure the type of

outdoor sensor that will be used for OAQ levels. It has the following configuration options:

• OQ.A.C = 0 (No Sensor) — No sensor will be used and the internal software reference setting will be used.

• OQ.A.C = 1 (OAQ Sensor with DAQ) — An outdoor CO

sensor will be used.

• OQ.A.C = 2 (4 to 20 mA Sensor without DAQ).

OAQ Lockout Value (

ConfigurationIAQAQ.SP

OAQ.L) — This is the maximum OAQ level above which de-

mand ventilation will be disabled. Diff. Air Quality Lo Limit (



DAQ.L) — This is the differential CO

ConfigurationIAQAQ.SP

level at which IAQ

control of the dampers will be initiated. Diff. Air Quality Hi Limit (



DAQ.H) — This is the differential CO

ConfigurationIAQAQ.SP

level at which IAQ

control of the dampers will be at maximum and the dampers will be at the Configuration

DAQ ppm Fan On Set Point (



IAQAQ.SPD.F.ON) — This is the CO

the indoor fan will be turned on. DAQ ppm Fan Off Set Point (



AQ.SPD.F.OF) — This is the CO

indoor fan will be turned off.



IAQDCV.CEC.MN.

Configuration

ConfigurationIAQ

level at which the



level at which

Table 57 — Indoor Air Quality Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

DCV.C DCV ECONOMIZER SETPOINTS EC.MN Economizer Min.Position 0 - 100 % ECONOMIN 5 IAQ.M IAQ Demand Vent Min.Pos. 0 - 100 % IAQMINP 0 O.C.MX Economizer Min.Flow 0 - 20000 CFM OACFMMAX 2000 O.C.MN IAQ Demand Vent Min.Flow 0 - 20000 CFM OACFMMIN 0 O.C.DB Econ.Min.Flow Deadband 200 - 1000 CFM OACFM_DB 400 AQ.CF AIR QUALITY CONFIGS IQ.A.C IAQ Analog Sensor Config 0 - 4 IAQANCFG 0 IQ.A.F IAQ 4-20 ma Fan Config 0 - 2 IAQANFAN 0 IQ.I.C IAQ Discrete Input Config 0 - 2 IAQINCFG 0 IQ.I.F IAQ Disc.In. Fan Config 0 - 2 IAQINFAN 0 OQ.A.C OAQ 4-20ma Sensor Config 0 - 2 OAQANCFG 0 AQ.SP AIR QUALITY SETPOINTS IQ.O.P IAQ Econo Override Pos. 0 - 100 % IAQOVPOS 100 IQ.O.C IAQ Override Flow 0 - 31000 CFM IAQOVCFM 10000 DAQ.L Diff.Air Quality LoLimit 0 - 1000 DAQ_LOW 100 DAQ.H Diff. Air Quality HiLimit 100 - 2000 DAQ_HIGH 700 D.F.OF DAQ PPM Fan Off Setpoint 0 - 2000 DAQFNOFF 200 D.F.ON DAQ PPM Fan On Setpoint 0 - 2000 DAQFNON 400 IAQ.R Diff. AQ Responsiveness -5 - 5 IAQREACT 0 OAQ.L OAQ Lockout Value 0 - 2000 OAQLOCK 0 OAQ.U User Determined OAQ 0 - 5000 OAQ_USER 400 AQ.S.R AIR QUALITY SENSOR RANGE IQ.R.L IAQ Low Reference 0 - 5000 IAQREFL 0 IQ.R.H IAQ High Reference 0 - 5000 IAQREFH 2000 OQ.R.L OAQ Low Reference 0 - 5000 OAQREFL 0 OQ.R.H OAQ High Reference 0 - 5000 OAQREFH 2000 IAQ.P IAQ PRE-OCCUPIED PURGE IQ.PG IAQ Purge Yes/No IAQPURGE No IQ.P.T IAQ Purge Duration 5 - 60 min IAQPTIME 15 IQ.P.L IAQ Purge LoTemp Min Pos 0 - 100 % IAQPLTMP 10 IQ.P.H IAQ Purge HiTemp Min Pos 0 - 100 % IAQPHTMP 35 IQ.L.O IAQ Purge OAT Lockout 35 - 70 dF IAQPNTLO 50

IAQ Low Reference (

ConfigurationIAQAQ.S.R



IQ.R.L) — This is the reference that will be used with a to non-Carrier IAQ sensor that may have a different characteristic curve. It represents the CO

IAQ High Reference (



IQ.R.H) — This is the reference that will be used with a

level at 4 mA.

ConfigurationIAQAQ.SR

non-Carrier IAQ sensor that may have a different characteristic curve. It represents the CO

OAQ Low Reference (



OQ.R.L) — This is the reference that will be used with a

level at 4 mA.

ConfigurationIAQAQ.S.R

non-Carrier OAQ sensor that may have a different characteristic curve. It represents the CO

OAQ High Reference (

level at 4 mA.

ConfigurationIAQAQ.S.R



OQ.R.H) — This is the reference that will be used with a nonCarrier OAQ sensor that may have a different characteristic curve. It represents the CO

Diff. IAQ Responsiveness (



IAQ.R) — This is the configuration that is used to select the

level at 4 mA.

ConfigurationIAQAQ.SP

IAQ response curves as shown in Fig. 18. PRE-OCCUPANCY PURGE — The control has the option

for a pre-occupancy purge to refresh the air in the space prior to occupancy.

This feature is enabled by setting Configuration



IAQ



IAQ.PIQ.PG to Yes.

The IAQ Purge will operate under the following conditions:

• IQ.PG is enabled

• the unit is in the unoccupied state

• Current Time is valid

• Next Occupied Time is valid

• time is within two hours of the next occupied period

• time is within the purge duration (Configuration



IAQIAQ.PIQ.P.T) If all of the above conditions are met, the following logic is

used:

If OAT  IQ.L.O and OAT  OCSP and economizer is

available then purge will be enabled and the economizer will be commanded to 100%.

Else, if OAT < IQ.L.O then the economizer will be posi-

tioned to the IAQ Purge LO Temp Min Pos (Configuration



IAQIAQ.PIQ.P.L)

If neither of the above are true then the dampers will be

positioned to the IAQ Purge HI Temp Min Pos (Configuration



IAQIAQ.PIQ.P.H)

If this mode is enabled the indoor fan and heat interlock

relay (VAV) will be energized. IAQ Purge (

ConfigurationIAQIAQ.PIQ.PG) — This

is used to enable IAQ pre-occupancy purge. IAQ Purge Duration (

ConfigurationIAQIAQ.P



IQ.P.T) — This is the maximum amount of time that a purge can occur.

IAQ Purge Lo Temp Min Pos (

ConfigurationIAQ



IAQ.PIQ.P.L) — This is used to configure a low limit for damper position to be used during the purge mode.

IAQ Purge Hi Temp Min Pos (

ConfigurationIAQ



IAQ.PIQ.P.H) — This is used to configure a maximum position for the dampers to be used during the purge cycle.

IAQ Purge OAT Lockout Temp (

ConfigurationIAQ



IAQ.PIQ.L.O) — Nighttime lockout temperature below which the purge cycle will be disabled.

OPTIONAL AIRFLOW STATION — The ComfortLink controls are capable of working with a factory-installed optional airflow station that measures the amount of outdoor air entering the economizer. This flow station is intended to measure ventilation airflows and has a limitation as to the maximum flow rate it can measure. The limits are 52,500 cfm for sizes 75-105 ton units. The limit is 60,000 cfm for 120-150 ton units.

All configurations for the outdoor airflow station can be

found in the Configuration



ECONCFM.C, sub-menu.

For this algorithm to function, the Outdoor Air Cfm Sensor Configuration (OCF.S.) must be enabled.

There are three set point configurations:

O.C.MN — Econ OACFM DCV Min Flow O.C.MX — Econ OACFM DCV Max Flow O.C.DB — Econ OACFM MinPos Deadbd

When the outdoor air cfm sensor is enabled, the Economizer Min.Position (Configuration the IAQ Demand Vent Min.Pos (ConfigurationIAQ DCV.CIAQ.M) will no longer be used. During vent periods, the control will modulate the damper to maintain the outdoor air intake quantity between O.C.MX and O.C.MN. The indoor air quality algorithm will vary the cfm between these two values depending on Configuration and the ConfigurationIAQAQ.SPDAQ.H set points and upon the relationship between the IAQ and the outdoor air quality (OAQ).

The economizer’s OA CFM Minimum Position Deadband (O.C.DB) is the deadband range around the outdoor cfm control point at where the damper control will stop, indicating the control point has been reached. See the Economizer section for more information.



IAQDCV.CEC.MN) and



IAQAQ.SPDAQ.L



Humidification — The N Series ComfortLink controls

can control a field-supplied and installed humidifier device. The ComfortLink controls provide two types of humidification control: A discrete stage control (via a relay contact) and a proportional control type (communicating to a LEN actuator). The discrete stage control is used to control a single-stage humidifier, (typically a spray pump). The proportional control type is typically used to control a proportional steam valve serving a steam grid humidifier.

The ComfortLink controls must be equipped with a controls expansion module and an accessory space or return air relative humidity sensor.

If a humidifier using a proportional steam valve is selected, the Carrier actuator (Carrier Part No. HF23BJ050) must be adapted to the humidifier manufacturer’s steam valve. Contact Belimo Aircontrols for information on actuator linkage adapter packages required to mount the actuator on the specific brand and type of steam valve mounted by the humidifier manufacturer.

The actuator address must be programmed into the Com- fortLink unit’s humidifier actuator serial number variables.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — These humidity configuration are located in the local displays under Configuration HUMD. See Table 58. Related points are shown in Table 59.

Humidifier Control Configuration ( fier control can be set to the following configurations:

• HM.CF = 0 — No humidity control.

• HM.CF = 1 — Discrete control based on space relative

humidity.

• HM.CF = 2 — Discrete control based on return air rela-

tive humidity.

• HM.CF = 3 — Analog control based on space relative

humidity.

• HM.CF = 4 — Analog control based on return air rela-

tive humidity. Humidity Control Set Point (

trol set point has a range of 0 to 100%. Humidifier PID Run Rate (

time rate. Humidifier Proportional Gain (

is the PID Proportional Gain.

HM.TM) — This is the PID run

HM.CF) — The humidi-

HM.SP) — The humidity con-

HM.P) — This configuration



Humidifier Integral Gain ( PID Integral Gain.

Humidifier Derivative Gain ( the PID Derivative Gain.

OPERATION — For operation, PID control will be utilized. The process will run at the rate defined by the Configuration



HUMDH.PIDHM.TM. The first part of humidity

control tests the humidity control configuration and will turn on corresponding configurations to read space or return air relative humidity. If the supply fan has been ON for 30 seconds and the space is occupied, then the humidification is started.

Actuator Control loop where:

Error = HM.SP – humidity sensor value (SP.RH or RA.RH, depending on configuration).

The PID terms are calculated as follows: P = K * HM.P * error I = K * HM.I * error + “I” last time through D = K * HM.D * (error – error last time through) Where K = HM.TM/60 to normalize the effect of changing the

run time rate Relay Output Control

greater than the humidity set point then the humidity relay (Outputs when the humidity is 2% less than the humidity set point.

CONFIGURING THE HUMIDIFIER ACTUATOR — Every actuator used in the N Series control system has its own unique serial number. The rooftop control uses this serial number to communicate with the actuator. The actuator serial number is located on a two-part sticker affixed to the side of the actuator housing. Remove one of the actuator’s serial number labels and paste it onto the actuator serial number records label located inside the left-hand access panel at the unit’s control panel. Four individual numbers make up this serial number. Program the serial number of the actuator in its Humidifier Actuator Configurations group, ACT.C (SN.1, SN.2, SN.3, SN.4).

NOTE: The serial numbers for all actuators can be found inside the control doors of the unit as well as on the actuator itself. If an actuator is replaced in the field, it is a good idea to remove the additional peel-off serial number sticker on the actuator and cover up the old one inside the control doors.

Control Angle Alarm C.A.LM) — The humidifier actuator learns what its end stops are through a calibration at the factory. Field-installed actuators may be calibrated in the Service Test mode. When an actuator learns its end stops through calibration, it determines its control angle. The actuator will resolve this control angle and express its operation in a percent (%) of this learned range.

angle during calibration, the actuator will be unable to control humidity. For this reason, the humidifier actuator has a configurable control angle alarm low limit (C.A.LM). If the control angle learned through calibration is less than C.A.LM, an alert will occur and the actuator will not function.

NOTE: This configuration does not typically need adjustment. It is configurable for the small number of jobs which may require a custom solution or workaround.



If the humidifier actuator has not learned a sufficient control

— Control is performed with a generic PID

GEN.OHUM.R) is closed. The relay will open

HM.I) — This configuration is the

HM.D) — This configuration is

— If the humidity sensor reading is

(ConfigurationHUMDACTC



Table 58 — Humidity Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

HUMD HUMIDITY CONFIGURATION HM.CF Humidifier Control Cfg. 0 - 4 HUMD_CFG 0 HM.SP Humidifier Setpoint 0 - 100 % HUSP 40 H.PID HUMIDIFIER PID CONFIGS HM.TM Humidifier PID Run Rate 10 - 120 sec HUMDRATE 30 HM.P Humidifier Prop. Gain 0 - 5 HUMID_PG 1 HM.I Humidifier Integral Gain 0 - 5 HUMID_IG 0.3 HM.D Humidifier Deriv. Gain 0 - 5 HUMID_DG 0.3 ACT.C HUMIDIFIER ACTUATOR CFGS SN.1 Humd Serial Number 1 0 - 9999 HUMD_SN1 0 SN.2 Humd Serial Number 2 0 - 6 HUMD_SN2 0 SN.3 Humd Serial Number 3 0 - 9999 HUMD_SN3 0 SN.4 Humd Serial Number 4 0 - 254 HUMD_SN4 0 C.A.LM Humd Ctrl Angle Lo Limit 0-90 HUMDCALM 85

Table 59 — Related Humidity Points

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS CCN POINT WRITE STATUS

ConfigUNITSENSSRH.S Space Air RH Sensor SPRHSENS ConfigUNITSENSRRH.S Return Air RH Sensor RARHSENS ConfigUNITSENSMRH.S Mixed Air RH Sensor MARHSENS InputsREL.HRA.RH Return Air Rel. Humidity % RARH forcible InputsREL.HSP.RH Space Relative Humidity % SPRH forcible InputsREL.HMA.RH Mixed Air Relative Humidity % MARH forcible OutputsACTUHMD.P Humidifier Act.Curr.Pos. % HUMDRPOS OutputsACTUHMD.C Humidifier Command Pos. % HUMDCPOS OutputsGEN.OHUM.R Humidifier Relay HUMIDRLY

Dehumidification and Reheat — The Dehumidifi-

cation function will override comfort condition set points based on dry bulb temperature and deliver cooler air to the space in order to satisfy a humidity set point at the space or return air humidity sensor. The Reheat function will energize a suitable heating system concurrent with dehumidification sequence should the dehumidification operation result in excessive cooling of the space condition.

The dehumidification sequence requires the installation of a space or return air humidity sensor or a discrete switch input. A CEM (option or accessory) is required to accommodate an RH (relative humidity) sensor connection. Reheat is also possible using a heat reclaim coil (field-supplied and installed) or a hot gas reheat coil (special order, factory-installed). Reheat is not possible with electric heat or gas heat.

Dehumidification and reheat control are allowed during Cooling and Vent modes in the occupied period.

On constant volume units using thermostat inputs (C.TYP =

3), the discrete switch input must be used as the dehumidification control input. The commercial Thermidistat device is the recommended accessory device.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — The settings for dehumidification can be found at the local display at Configura-

tion



IAQ DEHU.

Dehumidification Configuration ( fication configuration can be set for the following settings:

• D.SEL = 0 — No dehumidification and reheat.

• D.SEL = 1 — The control will perform both dehumidifi-

cation and reheat with modulating valve (hydronic).

• D.SEL = 2 — The control will perform dehumidification

and reheat with staged gas only.

• D.SEL = 3 — The control will perform both dehumidifi-

cation and reheat with third party heat via an alarm relay.

In the case of D.SEL=3, during dehumidification, the

alarm relay will close to convey the need for reheat. A

typical application might be to energize a 3-way valve to

perform hot gas reheat.

• D.SEL = 4 — The control will use the Humidi-MiZer

adaptive dehumidification system.

• D.SEL = 5 — The control will perform both dehumidifi-

cation and reheat with third party heat reclaim via the

heat reclaim output. The heat reclaim output (H.SEL)

must be configured before D.SEL.

D.SEL) — The dehumidi-

Dehumidification Sensor ( figured for the following settings:

• D.SEN = 1 — Initiated by return air relative humidity sensor.

• D.SEN = 2 — Initiated by space relative humidity sensor.

• D.SEN = 3 — Initiated by discrete input.

Economizer Disable in Dehum Mode ( configuration determines economizer operation during Dehumidification mode.

• D.EC.D = YES — Economizer disabled during dehumidification (default).

• D.EC.D = NO — Economizer not disabled during dehumidification.

Vent Reheat Set Point Select ( determines how the vent reheat set point is selected.

• D.V.CF = 0 — Reheat follows an offset subtracted from return air temperature (D.V.RA).

• D.V.CF = 1 — Reheat follows a dehumidification heat set point (D.V.HT).

Vent Reheat RAT Offset ( only during the vent mode. The air will be reheated to returnair temperature less this offset.

Vent Reheat Set Point ing the vent mode. The air will be reheated to this set point.

Dehumidify Cool Set Point ( midification cooling set point.

Dehumidity RH Set Point ( fication relative humidity trip point.

Heat Reclaim Configuration ( claim configuration.

• H.SEL = 0 (NONE) — Heat reclaim is not performed.

• H.SEL = 1 (RELAY) — The control will perform both dehumidification and reheat with third party heat via a heat reclaim relay on the SCB board. In the case of D.SEL=5, during dehumidification, the heat reclaim

relay will close to convey the need for "re-heat" need. A typical application might be to energize a 3-way valve to perform hot gas reheat.

• H.SEL = 2 (MODULATING) — The control will perform both dehumidification and reheat with modulating valve (hydronic).

D.SEN) — The sensor can be con-

D.EC.D) — This

D.V.CF) — This configuration

D.V.RA) — Set point offset used

(D.V.HT) — Set point used only dur-

D.C.SP) — This is the dehu-

D.RH.S) — This is the dehumidi-

H.SEL) — This is the heat re-

OPERATION — Dehumidification and reheat can only occur if the unit is equipped with either staged gas or hydronic heat. Dehumidification without reheat can be done on any unit but

Configuration



IAQDEHUD.SEL must be set to 2.

If the machine’s control type is a TSTAT type (Configura-

tion



UNITC.TYP=3) and the discrete input selection for

the sensor is not configured (D.SEN not equal to 3), dehumidification will be disabled.

If the machine’s control type is a TSTAT type (Configura-

tion



UNITC.TYP=3) and the economizer is able to pro-

vide cooling, a dehumidification mode may be called out, but the control will not request mechanical cooling.

NOTE: Configuring Configuration



IAQDEHU



D.SEN to 1, 2 or 3 will enable the CEM board along with the sensor selected for control.

NOTE: If Configuration



IAQDEHUD.SEL = 1 or 2,

then either staged gas or hot water valve control will be automatically enabled (Configuration



HEATHT.CF will be

set to either 3 or 4).

If a tempering, unoccupied or “mechanical cooling locked out” HVAC mode is present, dehumidification will be disabled. An HVAC: Off, Vent or Cool mode must be in effect to launch either a Reheat or Dehumidification mode.

If an associated sensor responsible for dehumidification fails, dehumidification will not be attempted (SPRH, RARH).

Initiating a Reheat or Dehumidification Mode

— To call out a Reheat mode in the Vent or the Off HVAC mode, or to call out a Dehumidification mode in a Cool HVAC mode, one of the following conditions must be true:

• The space is occupied and the humidity is greater than

the relative humidity trip point (D.RH.S).

• The space is occupied and the discrete humidity input is

closed.

Dehumidification and Reheat Control

— If a dehumidification mode is initiated, the rooftop will attempt to lower humidity as follows:

• Economizer Cooling — The economizer, if allowed to per-

form free cooling, will have its control point (

tusVIEWEC.C.P DEHUD.C.SP D.EC.D

is disabled, the economizer will always be dis-

) set to

. If

ConfigurationIAQ

ConfigurationIAQDEHU

Run Sta-

 

abled during dehumidification.

• Cooling — For all cooling control types: A High Cool

HVAC mode will be requested internally to the control to maintain diagnostics, although the end user will see a Dehumidification mode at the display. In addition, for multi-stage cooling units the cooling control point will be set to Configuration



IAQDEHUD.C.SP (no

SASP reset is applied).

• Reheat When Cooling Demand is Present — For reheat

control during dehumidification: If reheat follows an offset subtracted from return-air temperature (Configu-

ration



IAQDEHUD.SEL = 2), then no heating

will be initiated and the alarm relay will be energized. If

Table 60 — Dehumidification Configuration

Configuration figuration



IAQDEHUD.SEL = 1 and Con-



HEATHT.CF = staged gas or hot water

valve, then the selected heating control type will operate in the low heat/modulating mode.

• The heating control point will be whatever the actual cooling set point would have been (without any supply air reset applied).

• Reheat During Vent Mode — If configured (Configura-

tion



IAQDEHUD.V.CF = 0), the heating control

point will be equal to RAT - D.V.RA. If configured (Con-

figuration



IAQDEHUD.V.CF=1), the heating

control point will be equal to the D.V.HT set point.

Ending Dehumidification and Reheat Control

— When ei-

ther the humidity sensor fall 5% below the set point (Configu-

ration



IAQDEHUD.RH.S) or the discrete input reads

“LOW”, the Humidimizer mode will end.

Humidi-MiZer® Adaptive Dehumidification System —

option are capable of providing multiple modes of improved dehumidification as a variation of the normal cooling cycle. The design of the Humidi-MiZer system allows for two humidity control modes of operation of the rooftop unit, utilizing a common subcooling/reheat dehumidification coil located downstream of the standard evaporator coil. This allows the rooftop unit to operate in both a Dehumidification (Subcooling) mode and a hot gas Reheat Mode for maximum system flexibility. The Humidi-MiZer package is factory installed and will operate whenever there is a dehumidification requirement present. The Humidi-MiZer system is initiated based on input from a factory-installed return air humidity sensor to the large rooftop unit controller. Additionally, the unit controller may receive an input from a space humidity sensor, a discrete input from a mechanical humidistat, or third-party controller. Dehumidification and reheat control are allowed during Cooling and Vent modes in the occupied period.

SET UP THE SYSTEM — The settings for Humidi-MiZer system can be found at the local display at Configura-

tion



IAQDEHU. See Table 60.

Dehumidification Configuration ( fication configuration for Humidi-MiZer option is D.SEL = 4 (DH – HUMDZR).

Dehumidification Sensor ( figured for the following settings:

• D.SEN = 1 — Initiated by return air relative humidity sensor.

• D.SEN = 2— Initiated by space relative humidity sensor.

• D.SEN = 3 — Initiated by discrete input. The default sensor is the return air relative humidity sensor

(D.SEN = 1). Units ordered with the Humidi-MiZer option will have factory-installed return air relative humidity sensors.

Economizer Disable in Humidi-MiZer Mode ( When D.SEL = 4 (DH – HUMDZR), this configuration is automatically set to D.EC.D = YES (Economizer disabled during dehumidification).

Units with the factory-equipped Humidi-MiZer

D.SEL) — The dehumidi-

D.SEN) — The sensor can be con-

D.EC.D) —

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

DEHU DEHUMIDIFICATION CONFIG. D.SEL Dehumidification Config 0-5 DHSELECT 0 D.SEN Dehumidification Sensor 1-3 DHSENSOR 1 D.EC.D Econ disable in DH mode? Yes/No DHECDISA Yes D.V.CF Vent Reheat Setpt Select 0-1 DHVHTCFG 0 D.V.RA Vent Reheat RAT offset 0-8 deltaF DHVRAOFF 0 D.V.HT Vent Reheat Setpoint 55-75 dF DHVHT_SP 70 D.C.SP Dehumidify Cool Setpoint 40-55 dF DHCOOLSP 45 D.RH.S Dehumidify RH Setpoint 10-90 % DHRELHSP 55 H.SEL Heat Reclaim Config 0-2 RCLM_CFG 0 HZ.RT Humidi-Mizer Adjust Rate 5-120 HMZRRATE 30 HZ.PG Humidi-Mizer Prop. Gain 0-10 HMZR_PG 0.8

Vent Reheat Set Point Select (

D.V.CF) — This configuration determines how the vent reheat set point is selected. This set point becomes the supply air set point when the Humidi-MiZer function is initiated and the unit enters a Reheat Mode (relative humidity above set point with no cooling demand).

D.V.CF = 0 — Reheat follows an offset subtracted from re-

turn air temperature (D.V.RA).

D.V.CF = 1 — Reheat follows a dehumidification heat set

point (D.V.HT). Vent Reheat RAT Offset (

D.V.RA) — Set point offset used only when the Humidi-MiZer function is initiated and the unit enters a Reheat Mode. This occurs when the relative humidity is above set point with no cooling demand. The air will be reheated to return-air temperature less this offset.

Vent Reheat Set Point (

D.V.HT) — Set point used only when the Humidi-MiZer function is initiated and the unit enters a Reheat Mode. This occurs when the relative humidity is above set point with no cooling demand. When D.V.CF = 0, the supply air will be reheated to D.V.HT minus D.V.RA. When D.V.CF = 1, the supply air will be reheated to D.V.HT.

Dehumidify Cool Set Point (

D.C.SP) — This is the HumidiMiZer cooling set point used to determine the temperature the air will be cooled to prior to it being reheated to the desired supply-air temperature. This set point is used during the Humidi-MiZer dehumidification and reheat modes of operation.

Dehumidify RH Set Point (

D.RH.S) — This is the Humidi-

MiZer relative humidity trip point. Humidi-MiZer Adjust Rate (

HZ.RT) — This is the rate (seconds) at which corrections are made in the position of the modulating valves (C.EXV and B.EXV) to maintain supply air set point.

Humidi-MiZer Proportional Gain (

HZ.PG) — This is the proportional gain used in calculating the required valve position change for supply air temperature control. It is essentially the percentage of total reheat capacity adjustment that will be made per degree Fahrenheit of supply air temperature error.

OPERATION Mode Qualifications

— An HVAC: Off, Vent or Cool mode

must be in effect to launch a Humidi-MiZer mode. Sensor Failure

— If an associated sensor responsible for controlling Humidi-MiZer fails, dehumidification will not be attempted (SPRH, RARH).

Initiating a Humidi-MiZer Reheat or Dehumidification Mode — To call out a Reheat mode in the “Vent” or the “Off” HVAC mode, or to call out a Dehumidification mode in a “Cool” HVAC mode, one of the following must be true:

• The space is occupied and the humidity is greater than

the relative humidity trip point (D.RH.S).

• The space is occupied and the discrete humidity input is

closed.

Ending a Humidi-MiZer Reheat or Dehumidification Mode — When either the humidity sensor falls 5% below the set point (Configuration



DEHUD.RH.S) or the discrete input

reads “LOW”, the Humidi-MiZer mode will end. Relevant Outputs

— The Humidi-MiZer 3-way valve (reheat

valve) commanded output can be found in Out-

puts



COOLRHV.

The Humidi-MiZer Condenser Modulating Valve (Con-

denser EXV) position output can be found in Outputs



COOLC.EXV. The condenser position will be provided

as percent open. HUMIDI-MIZER MODES Dehumidification Mode (Subcooling)

— This mode will be engaged to satisfy part-load type conditions when there is a space call for cooling and dehumidification. Although the temperature may have dropped and decreased the sensible load in

the space, the outdoor and/or space humidity levels may have risen. A typical scenario might be when the outside air is 85 F and 70 to 80% relative humidity (RH). Desired SHR for equipment in this scenario is typically from 0.4 to 0.7. The HumidiMiZer unit will initiate Dehumidification mode when the space temperature and humidity are both above the temperature and humidity set points, and attempt to meet both set point requirements. Once the humidity requirement is met, the unit can continue to operate in normal cooling mode to meet any remaining sensible capacity load. Alternatively, if the sensible load is met and humidity levels remain high the unit can switch to Hot Gas Reheat mode to provide neutral, dehumidified air.

Reheat Mode

— This mode is used when dehumidification is required without a need for cooling, such as when the outside air is at a neutral temperature but high humidity exists. This situation requires the equipment to operate at a low SHR of 0.0 to

0.2. With no cooling requirement and a call for dehumidification, the N Series Humidi-MiZer adaptive dehumidification system will cycle on enough compressors to meet the latent load requirement, while simultaneously adjusting refrigerant flow to the Humidi-MiZer coil to reheat the air to the desired neutral air set point. The N Series Humid-MiZer system controls allow for the discharge air to be reheated to either the return air temperature minus a configurable offset or to a configurable Reheat set point (default 70 F). The hot gas reheat mode will be initiated when only the humidity is above the humidity set point, without a demand for cooling.

System Control

— The essential difference between the Dehumidification mode and the Reheat mode is in the supply air set point. In Dehumidification mode, the supply air set point is the temperature required to provide cooling to the space. This temperature is whatever the cooling control point would have been in a normal cooling mode. In Reheat mode, the supply air set point will be either an offset subtracted from return air temperature (D.V.RA) or the Vent Reheat Set Point (D.V.HT). Both values are configurable. For both Dehumidification mode and Reheat mode, the unit compressor staging will decrease the evaporator discharge temperature to the Dehumidify Cool Set Point (D.C.SP COOL) in order to meet the latent load and reheat the air to the required cooling or reheat set point. There is a thermistor array called Temperatures



AIR.TCCT connect-

ed to the RCB. This thermistor array serves as the evaporator discharge temperature (EDT). See Fig. 19.

The N-Series Humid-MiZer

system uses refrigerant flow modulation valves that provide accurate control of the leavingair temperature as the evaporator discharge temperature is decreased to meet the latent load. As the refrigerant leaves the compressor, the modulating valves vary the amount of refrigerant that enters and/or bypasses the condenser coil. As the bypassed and hot refrigerant liquid, gas or two-phase mixture passes through the Humidi-MiZer coil, it is exposed to the cold supply airflow coming from the evaporator coil. The refrigerant is subcooled in this coil to a temperature approaching the evaporator leaving air temperature. The liquid refrigerant then enters an electronic expansion valve (EXV) where the refrigerant pressure is decreased. The refrigerant enters the EXV and evaporator coil at a temperature lower than in standard cooling operation. This lower temperature increases the latent capacity of the evaporator. The refrigerant passes through the evaporator and is turned into a superheated vapor. The air passing over the evaporator coil will become colder than during normal operation. However, as this same air passes over the Humidi-MiZer reheat coil, it will be warmed to meet the supply air set point temperature requirement. See Fig. 20.

Temperature Compensated Start — This logic is

used when the unit is in the unoccupied state. The control will calculate early Start Bias time based on Space Temperature deviation from the occupied cooling and heating set points. This will allow the control to start the unit so that the space is at conditioned levels when the occupied period starts. This is

required for ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrig-

Evaporator Discharge Temperature

In Subcool or Reheat Mode, compressor staging and increased subcooling drives evaporato

discharge temperature down to meet higher latent loads

irflo

EVAPORATOR

HUMIDI-MIZER ADAPTIVE DEHUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM COIL

Supply Air Temperature Control

Innovative algorithm to control supply air temperature modulates flow bypass to meet desired supply air setpoint no overcooling or overheating of the space.

Subcooling Mode: Meet Cooling Mode Supply Air Setpoint Reheat Mode: Meet Return Air Offset or Reheat Setpoint (configurab le)

CCT

SAT

D.C.SP COOL

RAT-D.V.RA or D.V.HT

Fig. 19 — Humidi-MiZer® System Control

EXPANSION

INDOOR AIR

EVAPORATOR

REHEAT HX

EXPANSION DEVICE

CHECK VALVE

3- WAY VALV E

3a'

2a'

BYPASS MODULATING VALV E

CONDENSER

OUTDOOR AIR

CONDENSER MODULATING VALV E

COMPRESSOR

CONDENSER

OUTDOOR AIR

COMPRESSOR

CIRCUIT B

CIRCUIT a

Fig. 20 — Humidi-MiZer System Diagram

erating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers) 90.1 compliance. A space sensor is required for non-linkage applications.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM — The settings for temperature compensated start can be found in the local display under

Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT TCS.C Temp.Cmp.Strt.Cool Factr 0 - 60 min TCSTCOOL TCS.H Temp.Cmp.Strt.Heat Factr 0 - 60 min TCSTHEAT

TCST-Cool Factor (



UNIT.

TCS.C) — This is the factor for the start

time bias equation for cooling.

TCST-Heat Factor (

TCS.H) — This is the factor for the start

time bias equation for heating. NOTE: Temperature compensated start is disabled when these

factors are set to 0. TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED START LOGIC — The

following conditions must be met for the algorithm to run:

• Unit is in unoccupied state.

• Next occupied time is valid.

• Current time of day is valid.

• Valid space temperature reading is available (sensor or DAV-Linkage).

The algorithm will calculate a Start Bias time in minutes us-

ing the following equations:

If (space temperature > occupied cooling set point) Start Bias Time = (space temperature – occupied cooling set

point)* TCS.C

If (space temperature < occupied heating set point) Start Bias Time = (occupied heating set point – space

temperature)*TCS.H

When the Start Bias Time is greater than zero the algorithm will subtract it from the next occupied time to calculate the new start time. When the new start time is reached, the Temperature Compensated Start mode is set (Operating Modes T. C. S T), the fan is started and the unit controlled as in an occupied state. Once set, Temperature Compensated mode will stay on until the unit goes into the Occupied mode. The Start Bias Time will be written into the CCN Linkage Equipment Table if the unit is controlled in DAV mode. If the Unoccupied Economizer Free Cool mode is active (Operating Modes “UNOCC FREE COOL”) when temperature compensated start begins, the Unoccupied Free Cool mode will be stopped.



MODE



HVAC =

Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) — It is possible

to configure the ComfortLink controls to participate as an element of the Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) system directly from the local display. This section will deal with explaining the various programmable options which are found under the CCN sub-menu in the Configuration mode.

The major configurations for CCN programming are located in the local displays at Configuration Table 61.

CCN Address ( dress the rooftop is assigned.

CCN Bus Number ( bus the rooftop is assigned.

CCN Baud Rate ( baud rate.

CCN Time/Date Broadcast ( is set to ON, the control will periodically send the time and date out onto the CCN bus once a minute. If this device is on a CCN network then it will be important to make sure that only one device on the bus has this configuration set to ON. If more than one time broadcaster is present, problems with the time will occur.

NOTE: Only the time and date broadcaster can perform daylight savings time adjustments. Even if the rooftop is stand alone, the user may want to set this to ON to accomplish the daylight/savings function.

CCN OAT Broadcast ( to ON, the control will periodically broadcast its outside-air temperature at a rate of once every 30 minutes.

CCN OARH Broadcast ( set to ON, the control will periodically broadcast its outside air relative humidity at a rate of once every 30 minutes.

CCN OAQ Broadcast ( to ON, the control will periodically broadcast its outside air quality reading at a rate of once every 30 minutes.

Global Schedule Broadcast ( set to ON and the schedule number (SCH.N) is between 65 and 99, then the control will broadcast the internal time schedule once every 2 minutes.

CCN Broadcast Acknowledger ( ration is set to ON, then when any broadcasting is done on the bus, this device will respond to and acknowledge. Only one device per bus can be configured for this option.

Schedule Number ( what schedule the control may follow.

CCNA) — This configuration is the CCN ad-

CCNB) — This configuration is the CCN

BAUD) — This configuration is the CCN

TM.DT) — If this configuration

OAT.B) — If this configuration is set

ORH.B) — If this configuration is

OAQ.B) — If this configuration is set

G. S . B ) — If this configuration is

B.ACK) — If this configu-

SCH.N) — This configuration determines



IAQCCN. See

SCH.N = 0 The control is always occupied. SCH.N = 1 The control follows its internal time sched-

SCH.N = 65-99 The control is either set up to receive to a

Accept Global Holidays? ( casting the time on the bus, it is possible to accept the time yet not accept the global holiday from the broadcast message.

Override Time Limit ( the user to decide how long an override occurs when it is initiated. The override may be configured from 1 to 4 hours. If the time is set to 0, the override function will become disabled.

Timed Override Hours ( number of hours left in an override. It is possible to cancel an override in progress by writing “0” to this variable, thereby removing the override time left.

SPT Override Enabled? ( ent, then it is possible to override an unoccupied period by pushing the override button on the T55 or T56 sensor. This option allows the user to disable this function by setting this configuration to NO.

T58 Override Enabled? ( device that allows cooling/heating set points to be adjusted, space temperature to be written to the rooftop unit, and the ability to initiate a timed override. This option allows the user to disable the override initiated from the T58 sensor by setting this option to NO.

Global Schedule Override? ( to receive global schedules then it is also possible for the global schedule broadcaster to call out an override condition as well. This configuration allows the user to disable the global schedule broadcaster from overriding the control.

ules. The user may enter any number between 1 and 64 but it will be overwritten to “1” by the control as it only has one internal schedule.

broadcasted time schedule set to this number or the control is set up to broadcast its internal time schedule (G. S . B ) to the network and this is the global schedule number it is broadcasting. If this is the case, then the control still follows its internal time schedules.

HOL.T) — If a device is broad-

O.T.L) — This configuration allows

OV.EX) — This displays the current

SPT.O) — If a space sensor is pres-

T58.O) — The T58 sensor is a CCN

GL.OV) — If the control is set

Alert Limit Configuration — The ALLM submenu is

used to configure the alert limit set points. A list is shown in Table 62.

SPT Low Alert Limit/Occ ( ture is below the configurable occupied SPT Low Alert Limit (SP.L.O), then Alert 300 will be generated and the unit will be stopped. The alert will automatically reset.

SPT High Alert Limit/Occ ( ture is above the configurable occupied SPT High Alert Limit (SP.H.O), then Alert 301 will be generated and the unit will be stopped. The alert will automatically reset.

SPT Low Alert Limit/Unocc ( perature is below the configurable unoccupied SPT Low Alert Limit (SP.L.U), then Alert 300 will be generated and the unit will be stopped. The alert will automatically reset.

SPT High Alert Limit/Unocc ( perature is above the configurable unoccupied SPT High Alert Limit (SP.H.U), then Alert 301 will be generated and the unit will be stopped. The alert will automatically reset.

EDT Low Alert Limit/Occ ( ture is below the configurable occupied evaporator discharge temperature (EDT) Low Alert Limit (SA.L.O), then Alert 302 will be generated and cooling operation will be stopped but heating operation will continue. The alert will automatically reset.

SP.L.O) — If the space tempera-

SP.H.O) — If the space tempera-

SP.L.U) — If the space tem-

SP.H.U) — If the space tem-

SA.L.O) — If the space tempera-

EDT High Alert Limit/Occ (

SA.H.O) — If the space temperature is above the configurable occupied EDT High Alert Limit (SA.H.O), then Alert 303 will be generated and heating operation will be stopped but cooling operation will continue. The alert will automatically reset.

EDT Low Alert Limit/Unocc (

SA.L.U) — If the space temperature is below the configurable unoccupied EDT Low Alert Limit (SA.L.U), then Alert 302 will be generated and cooling operation will be stopped but heating operation will continue. The alert will automatically reset.

EDT High Alert Limit/Unocc (

SA.H.U) — If the space temperature is above the configurable unoccupied EDT High Alert Limit (SA.H.U), then Alert 303 will be generated and heating operation will be stopped but cooling operation will continue. The alert will automatically reset.

RAT Low Alert Limit/Occ (

RA.L.O) — If the return-air temperature is below the configurable occupied RAT Low Alert Limit (RA.L.O), then Alert 304 will be generated and internal routines will be modified. Unit operation will continue but VAV heating operation will be disabled. The alert will automatically reset.

RAT High Alert Limit/Occ (

RA.H.O) — If the return-air temperature is above the configurable occupied RAT High Alert Limit (RA.H.O), then Alert 305 will be generated and operation will continue. The alert will automatically reset.

RAT Low Alert Limit/Unocc (

RA.L.U) — If the return-air

temperature is below the configurable unoccupied RAT Low

Table 61 — CCN Configuration

Alert Limit (RA.L.U), then Alert 304 will be generated. Unit operation will continue but VAV heating operation will be disabled. The alert will automatically reset.

RAT High Alert Limit/Unocc (

RA.H.U) — If the return-air temperature is above the configurable unoccupied RAT High Alert Limit (RA.H.U), then Alert 305 will be generated. Operation will continue. The alert will automatically reset.

OAT Low Alert Limit (

OAT.L) — If the outside-air temperature measured by the OAT thermistor is below the configurable OAT Low Alert Limit (OAT.L) then Alert T316 will be generated.

OAT High Alert Limit (

OAT.H) — If the outside-air temperature measured by the OAT thermistor is above the configurable OAT High Alert Limit (OAT.H) then Alert T317 will be generated.

RARH Low Alert Limit (

R.RH.L) — If the unit is config-

ured to use a return air relative humidity sensor (Configura-

tion



UNITSENSRRH.S), and the measured level is

below the configurable RH Low Alert Limit (R.RH.L), then Alert 308 will occur. The unit will continue to run and the alert will automatically reset.

RARH High Alert Limit (

R.RH.H) — If the unit is config-

ured to use a return air relative humidity sensor (Configura-

tion



UNITSENSRRH.S), and the measured level is

above the configurable RARH High Alert Limit (R.RH.H), then Alert 309 will occur. The unit will continue to run and the alert will automatically reset.

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

CCN CCN CONFIGURATION CCNA CCN Address 1 - 239 CCNADD 1 CCNB CCN Bus Number 0 - 239 CCNBUS 0 BAUD CCN Baud Rate 1 - 5 CCNBAUDD 3

BROD CCN BROADCST DEFINITIONS TM.DT CCN Time/Date Broadcast ON/OFF CCNBC On OAT.B CCN OAT Broadcast ON/OFF OATBC Off ORH.B CCN OARH Broadcast ON/OFF OARHBC Off OAQ.B CCN OAQ Broadcast ON/OFF OAQBC Off G.S.B Global Schedule Broadcst ON/OFF GSBC Off B.ACK CCN Broadcast Ack'er ON/OFF CCNBCACK Off

SC.OV CCN SCHEDULES-OVERRIDES SCH.N Schedule Number 0 - 99 SCHEDNUM 1 HOL.T Accept Global Holidays? YES/NO HOLIDAYT No O.T.L. Override Time Limit 0 - 4 HRS OTL 1 OV.EX Timed Override Hours 0 - 4 HRS OVR_EXT 0 SPT.O SPT Override Enabled ? YES/NO SPT_OVER Yes T58.O T58 Override Enabled ? YES/NO T58_OVER Yes GL.OV Global Sched. Override ? YES/NO GLBLOVER No

Table 62 — Alert Limit Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

SP.L.O SPT lo alert limit/occ -10-245 dF SPLO 60 SP.H.O SPT hi alert limit/occ -10-245 dF SPHO 85 SP.L.U SPT lo alert limit/unocc -10-245 dF SPLU 45 SP.H.U SPT hi alert limit/unocc -10-245 dF SPHU 100 SA.L.O EDT lo alert limit/occ -40-245 dF SALO 40 SA.H.O EDT hi alert limit/occ -40-245 dF SAHO 100 SA.L.U EDT lo alert limit/unocc -40-245 dF SALU 40 SA.H.U EDT hi alert limit/unocc -40-245 dF SAHU 100 RA.L.O RAT lo alert limit/occ -40-245 dF RALO 60 RA.H.O RAT hi alert limit/occ -40-245 dF RAHO 90 RA.L.U RAT lo aler t limit/unocc -40-245 dF RALU 40 RA.H.U RAT hi alert limit/unocc -40-245 dF RAHU 100 OAT.L OAT lo alert limit -40-245 dF OATL -40 OAT.H OAT hi alert limit -40-245 dF OATH 150 R.RH.L RARH low alert limit 0-100 % RRHL 0 R.RH.H RARH high alert limit 0-100 % RRHH 100 O.RH .L OARH low alert limit 0-100 % ORHL 0 O.RH .H OARH high alert limit 0-100 % ORHH 100 SP.L SP low alert limit 0-5 "H2O SPL 0 SP.H SP high alert limit 0-5 "H2O SPH 2 BP.L BP lo alert limit -0.25-0.25 "H2O BPL -0.25 BP.H BP high alert limit -0.25-0.25 "H2O BPH 0.25 IAQ.H IAQ high alert limit 0-5000 IAQH 1200

OARH Low Alert Limit (

O.RH.L) — If the unit is config-

ured to use an outdoor air relative humidity sensor (Configura-

tion



ECONORH.S) and the measured level is below the

configurable OARH Low Alert Limit (O.RH.L), then economizer operation will be disabled. The unit will continue to run and the alert will automatically reset.

OARH High Alert Limit (

O.RH.H) — If the unit is config-

ured to use a return air relative humidity sensor (Configura-

tion



ECONORH.S) and the measured level is above the

configurable OARH High Alert Limit (O.RH.H), then economizer operation will be disabled. The unit will continue to run and the alert will automatically reset.

Supply Duct Pressure Low Alert Limit (

SP.L) — If the unit is a VAV unit with a supply duct pressure sensor and the measured supply duct static pressure is below the configurable SP Low Alert Limit (DP.L), then Alert 310 will occur. The unit will continue to run and the alert will automatically reset.

Supply Duct Pressure High Alert Limit (

SP.H) — If the unit is a VAV unit with a supply duct pressure sensor and the measured supply duct static pressure is above the configurable SP High Alert Limit (SP.H), then Alert 311 will occur. The unit will continue to run and the alert will automatically reset.

Building Pressure Low Alert Limit (

BP.L) — If the unit is configured to use modulating power exhaust then a building static pressure limit can be configured using the BP Low Alert Limit (BP.L). If the measured pressure is below the limit then Alert 312 will occur.

Building Pressure High Alert Limit (

BP.H) — If the unit is configured to use modulating power exhaust then a building static pressure limit can be configured using the BP Hi Alert Limit (BP.H). If the measured pressure is above the limit, then Alert 313 will occur.

Indoor Air Quality High Alert Limit ( is configured to use a CO

sensor and the level is above the

IAQ.H) — If the unit

configurable IAQ High Alert Limit (IAQ.H) then the alert will occur. The unit will continue to run and the alert will automatically reset.

Sensor Trim Configuration — The TRIM submenu

is used to calibrate the sensor trim settings. The trim settings are used when the actual measured reading does not match the sensor output. The sensor can be adjusted to match the actual measured reading with the trim function. A list is shown in Table 63.

IMPORTANT: Sensor trim must not be used to extend unit operation past the allowable operating range. Doing so may impair or negatively affect the Carrier product warranty.

Air Temperature Leaving Supply Fan Sensor ( variable is used to adjust the supply fan temperature sensor reading. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 10° F to match the actual measured temperature.

Return Air Temperature Sensor Trim ( able is used to adjust the return air temperature sensor reading. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 10° F to match the actual measured temperature.

Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Trim ( able is used to adjust the outdoor air temperature sensor reading. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 10° F to match the actual measured temperature.

Space Temperature Sensor Trim (

SPT.T) — This variable is used to adjust the space temperature sensor reading. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 10° F to match the actual measured temperature.

Limit Switch Trim (

L.SW.T) — This variable is used to adjust the limit switch temperature sensor reading. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 10° F to match the actual measured temperature.

SAT.T) — This

RAT.T) — This vari-

OAT.T) — This vari-

Air Temperature Leaving Evaporator Trim (

CCT.T) —This variable is used to adjust the leaving evaporator temperature sensor reading. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 10° F to match the actual measured temperature.

A1 Discharge Temperature (

DTA.1) — This variable is used to adjust the A1 compressor discharge temperature sensor reading. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 10° F to match the actual measured temperature.

NOTE: Due to the resolution of the control board analog input, temperature readings less than 50 F will become increasingly inaccurate as the temperature decreases.

Suction Pressure Circuit A Trim (

SP.A.T) — This variable is used to adjust the suction pressure sensor reading for circuit A. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 50 psig to match the actual measured pressure.

Suction Pressure Circuit B Trim (

SP.B.T) — This variable is used to adjust the suction pressure sensor reading for circuit B. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 50 psig to match the actual measured pressure.

Discharge Pressure Circuit A Trim (

DP.A.T) — This variable is used to adjust the discharge pressure sensor reading for circuit A. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 50 psig to match the actual measured pressure.

Discharge Pressure Circuit B Trim (

DP.B.T) — This variable is used to adjust the discharge pressure sensor reading for circuit B. The sensor reading can be adjusted ±50 psig to match the actual measured pressure.

Liquid Pressure Circuit A Trim (

LP.A.T) — This variable is used to adjust the liquid pressure sensor reading for circuit A. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 50 psig to match the actual measured pressure.

Liquid Pressure Circuit B Trim (

LP.B.T) — This variable is used to adjust the liquid pressure sensor reading for circuit B. The sensor reading can be adjusted ± 50 psig to match the actual measured pressure.

4 to 20 mA Inputs

— There are a number of 4 to 20 mA in-

puts which may be calibrated. These inputs are located in

Inputs



4-20. They are:

• SP.M.T — static pressure milliamp trim

• BP.M.T — building pressure milliamp trim

• OA.M.T — outside air cfm milliamp trim

• RA.M.T — return air cfm milliamp trim

• SA.M.T — supply air cfm milliamp trim

Discrete Switch Logic Configuration — The SW.LG

submenu is used to configure the normally open/normally closed settings of switches and inputs. This is used when field-supplied switches or input devices are used instead of Carrier devices. The normally open or normally closed setting may be different on a field-supplied device. These points are used to match the control logic to the field-supplied device.

The defaults for this switch logic section will not normally need changing. However, if a field-installed switch is used that is different from the Carrier switch, these settings may need adjustment.

IMPORTANT: Many of the switch inputs to the control can be configured to operate as normally open or normally closed.

Settings for switch logic are found at the local displays under the Configuration Table 64.

Filter Status Input — Clean ( put for clean filters is set for normally open. If a field-supplied filter status switch is used that is normally closed for a clean filter, change this variable to closed.



IAQSW.LG submenu. See

FTS.L) — The filter status in-

Table 63 — Sensor Trim Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

TRIM SENSOR TRIM CONFIG. SAT.T Air Temp Lvg SF Trim -10 - 10 ^F SAT_TRIM 0 RAT.T RAT Trim -10 - 10 ^F RAT_TRIM 0 OAT.T OAT Trim -10 - 10 ^F OAT_TRIM 0 SPT.T SPT Trim -10 - 10 ^F SPT_TRIM 0 L.SW.T Limit Switch Trim -10 - 10 ^F LSW_TRIM 0 CCT.T Air Temp Lvg Evap Trim -10 - 10 ^F CCT_TRIM 0 DTA.1 A1 Discharge Temp Trim -10 - 10 ^F DTA1TRIM 0 SP.A.T Suct.Press.Circ.A Trim -50 - 50 ^F SPA_TRIM 0 SP.B.T Suct.Press.Circ.B Trim -50 - 50 ^F SPB_TRIM 0 DP.A.T Dis.Press.Circ.A Trim -50 - 50 ^F DPA_TRIM 0 DP.B.T Dis.Press.Circ.B Trim -50 - 50 ^F DPB_TRIM 0 LP.A.T Lqd.Press.Circ.A Trim -50 - 50 ^F LPA_TRIM 0 LP.B.T Lqd.Press.Circ.B Trim -50 - 50 ^F LPB_TRIM 0

Table 64 — Switch Logic Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE CCN POINT DEFAULT

SW.LG SWITCH LOGIC: NO / NC PWS.L Power Fault Input - Good Open/Close PWRFLOGC Close MFT.L Filter Status Input - Clean Open/Close FLTSLOGC Open PFT.L Post Filter Stat. In-Clean Open/Close PFLTSLGC Open IGC.L IGC Feedback - Off Open/Close GASFANLG Open RMI.L RemSw Off-Unoc-Strt-NoOv Open/Close RMTINLOG Open ENT.L Enthalpy Input - Low Open/Close ENTHLOGC Close SFS.L Fan Status Sw. - Off Open/Close SFSLOGIC Open DL1.L Dmd.Lmt.Sw.1 - Off Open/Close DMD_SW1L Open DL2.L Dmd.Lmt.Sw.2 - Off Open/Close DMD_SW2L Open IAQ.L IAQ Disc.Input - Low Open/Close IAQINLOG Open FSD.L Fire Shutdown - Off Open/Close FSDLOGIC Open PRS.L Pressurization Sw. - Off Open/Close PRESLOGC Open EVC.L Evacuation Sw. - Off Open/Close EVACLOGC Open PRG.L Smoke Purge Sw. - Off Open/Close PURGLOGC Open DH.LG Dehumidify Sw. - Off Open/Close DHDISCLG Open SFB.L SF Bypass Sw. - Off Open/Close SFBYLOGC Open PEB.L PE Bypass Sw. - Off Open/Close PEBYLOGC Open

Post Filter Status Input - Clean (

PFT.L) — The filter status input for clean filters is set for normally open. If a field-supplied filter status switch is used that is normally closed for a clean filter, change this variable to closed.

IGC Feedback — Off (

IGC.L) — The input for IGC feedback is set for normally open for off. If a field-supplied IGC feedback switch is used that is normally closed for feedback off, change this variable to closed.

Remote Switch — Off (

RMI.L) — The remote switch is set for normally open when off. If a field-supplied control switch is used that is normally closed for an off signal, change this variable to closed.

Enthaply Input — Low (

ENT.L) — The enthalpy input is set for normally closed when low. If a field-supplied enthalpy switch is used that is normally open when low, change this variable to open.

Fan Status Switch — Off (

SFS.L) — The fan status switch input is set for normally open for off. If a field-supplied fan status switch is used that is normally closed, change this variable to closed.

Demand Limit Switch 1 — Off (

DL1.L) — The demand limit switch no. 1 input is set for normally open for off. If a field-supplied demand limit switch is used that is normally closed, change this variable to closed.

Demand Limit Switch 2 — Off (

DL2.L) — The demand limit switch no. 2 input is set for normally open for off. If a field-supplied demand limit switch is used that is normally closed, change this variable to closed.

IAQ Discrete Input — Low (

IAQ.L) — The IAQ discrete input is set for normally open when low. If a field-supplied IAQ discrete input is used that is normally closed, change this variable to closed.

Fire Shutdown — Off (

FSD.L) — The fire shutdown input is

set for normally open when off. If a field-supplied fire

shutdown input is used that is normally closed, change this variable to closed.

Pressurization Switch — Off (

PRS.L) — The pressurization input is set for normally open when off. If a field-supplied pressurization input is used that is normally closed, change this variable to closed.

Evacuation Switch — Off (

EVC.L) — The evacuation input is set for normally open when off. If a field-supplied evacuation input is used that is normally closed, change this variable to closed.

Smoke Purge — Off (

PRG.L) — The smoke purge input is set for normally open when off. If a field-supplied smoke purge input is used that is normally closed, change this variable to closed.

Dehumidify Switch — Off (

DH.LG) — The dehumidify input is set for normally open when off. If a field-supplied dehumidify input is used that is normally closed, change this variable to closed.

SF Bypass Switch — Off (

SFB.L) — The Supply Fan bypass switch is normally open when off. It allows operation of the supply fan through a bypass of the supply fan VFD.

PE Bypass Switch — Off (

PEB.L) — The Power Exhaust bypass switch is normally open when off. It allows for operation of the exhaust fan through a bypass of the exhaust fan VFD.

Display Configuration — The DISP submenu is used

to configure the local display settings. A list is shown in Table 65.

Test Display LEDs ( tion of the ComfortLink display.

Metric Display ( the display from English units to Metric units.

Language Selection (

TEST) — This is used to test the opera-

METR) — This variable is used to change

LANG) — This variable is used to

change the language of the ComfortLink display. At this time, only English is available.

Password Enable (

PAS.E) — This variable enables or disables the use of a password. The password is used to restrict use of the control to change configurations.

Service Password (

PASS) — This variable is the 4-digit nu-

meric password that is required if enabled.

VFD Configurations — There are two sub-menus under

the Configuration menu, Configuration Configuration



IAQE.VFD. These configurations are for

the supply fan or optional exhaust fan variable frequency drives (VFDs). These sub-menus contain the configurations required for the Supply Fan and Exhaust Fan VFDs. This section defines the configurations in these sub-menus. See Table 66 and 67. Further information on VFD configurations can be found in Appendix D.

SUPPLY FAN VFD CONFIGURATION — The sub-menu that contains these configurations is located at the local display under Configuration

VFD1 Nominal Motor Volts (



IAQS.VFD.

N.VLT) — This configuration

defines the nominal motor voltage. This value must equal the value on the motor rating plate. This value sets the maximum drive output voltage supplied to the motor.

NOTE: The VFD cannot supply the motor with a greater voltage than the voltage supplied to the input of the VFD. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD1 Nominal Motor Amps (

N.AMP) — This configuration defines the nominal motor current. This value must equal the value defined in the Supply Fan Motor Limitations Table 21. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD1 Nominal Motor Freq (

N.FRQ) — This configuration defines the nominal motor frequency. This value must equal the value on the motor rating plate. This value sets the frequency at which the output voltage equals the Nominal Motor Volts (N.VLT). Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD1 Nominal Motor RPM (

N.RPM) — This configuration defines the nominal motor speed. This value must equal the value on the motor rating plate. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.



IAQS.VFD and

Table 65 — Display Configuration

VFD1 Nominal Motor HPwr (

N.PWR) — This configuration defines the nominal motor power. This value must equal the value on the motor rating plate. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD1 Motor Direction (

M.DIR) — This configuration sets the direction of motor rotation. Motor direction change occurs immediately upon a change to this configuration. Power to the VFD need NOT be cycled for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD1 Acceleration Time (

ACCL) — This configuration sets the acceleration time from zero to maximum output frequency. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD1 Deceleration Time (

DECL) — This configuration sets the deceleration time from maximum output frequency to zero. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD1 Switching Frequency (

SW.FQ) — This configuration sets the switching frequency for the drive. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

EXHAUST FAN VFD CONFIGURATION — The submenu that contains these configurations is located at the local display under Configuration

VFD2 Nominal Motor Volts (



IAQE.VFD.

N.VLT) — This configuration

defines the nominal motor voltage. This value must equal the value on the motor rating plate. This value sets the maximum drive output voltage supplied to the motor.

VFD2 Nominal Motor Amps (

N.AMP) — This configuration defines the nominal motor current. This value must equal the value defined in:

• the High-Capacity Power Exhaust Systems Motor Limi-

tations table (Table 22) if BP.CF=4

• the Supply Fan Motor Limitations table (Table 21) if

BP.CF=5

• the Optional VFD Power Exhaust Motor Limitations

table (Table 68) if BP.CF=3

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

TEST Test Display LEDs ON/OFF TEST Off METR Metric Display ON/OFF DISPUNIT Off LANG Language Selection 0-1(multi-text strings) LANGUAGE 0 PA S. E Password Enable ENABLE/DISABLE PASS_EBL Enable PA SS Service Password 0000-9999 PASSWORD 1111

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULT

S.VFD SUPPLY FAN VFD CONFIG N.VLT VFD1 Nominal Motor Volts 0 to 999 Volts VFD1NVLT 460* N.AMP VFD1 Nominal Motor Amps 0 to 999 Amps VFD1NAMP 55.0* N.FRQ VFD1 Nominal Motor Freq 10 to 500 Hz VFD1NFRQ 60 N.RPM VFD1 Nominal Motor RPM 50 to 30000 RPM VFD1NRPM 1750 N.PWR VFD1 Nominal Motor HPwr 0 to 500 HP VFD1NPWR 40* M.DIR VFD1 Motor Direction 0=FWD, 1=REV VFD1MDIR 0 ACCL VFD1 Acceleration Time 0 to 1800 sec VFD1ACCL 30 DECL VFD1 Deceleration Time 0 to 1800 sec VFD1DECL 30 SW.FQ VFD1 Switching Frequency 0=1kHz, 1=4kHz, 2=8kHz, 3=12kHz VFD1SWFQ 2

*This default is model number dependent.

Table 66 — Supply Fan VFD Configuration

Table 67 — Exhaust Fan VFD Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT DEFAULTS

E.VFD EXHAUST FAN VFD CONFIG N.VLT VFD2 Nominal Motor Volts 0 to 999 Volts VFD2NVLT 460* N.AMP VFD2 Nominal Motor Amps 0 to 999 Amps VFD2NAMP 28.7* N.FRQ VFD2 Nominal Motor Freq 10 to 500 Hz VFD2NFRQ 60 N.RPM VFD2 Nominal Motor RPM 50 to 30000 RPM VFD2NRPM 1750 N.PWR VFD2 Nominal Motor HPwr 0 to 500 H.P. VFD2NPWR 20* M.DIR VFD2 Motor Direction 0=FWD, 1=REV VFD2MDIR 0 ACCL VFD2 Acceleration Time 0 to 1800 sec VFD2ACCL 30 DECL VFD2 Deceleration Time 0 to 1800 sec VFD2DECL 30 SW.FQ VFD2 Switching Frequency 0=1kHz, 1=4kHz, 2=8kHz, 3=12kHz VFD2SWFQ 2

*This default is model number dependent.

Table 68 — Optional VFD Power Exhaust (PE)

Motor Limitations (FLA)

Power

Exhaust

High Efficiency PE

6 7.6 10.0 20.4 9.6 10 10.2 18.2 30.6 12.8 15 15.6 24.4 44.8 19.4 20 20.6 32.4 58.6 26.8

Premium Eficiency PE

6 — — 16.0 8.0 10 — — 29.4 13.6 15 — — 43.0 19.4 20 — — 56.0 25.2

208/230 380 460 575

UNIT VOLTAGE

Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to

this configuration to take effect. VFD2 Nominal Motor Freq (

VFD2 Nominal Motor RPM (

VFD2 Nominal Motor HPwr (

VFD2 Motor Direction (

VFD2 Acceleration Time (

ACCL) — This configuration sets the acceleration time from zero to maximum output frequency. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD2 Deceleration Time (

DECL) — This configuration sets the deceleration time from maximum output frequency to zero. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD2 Switching Frequency (

SW.FQ) — This configuration sets the switching frequency for the drive. Power to the VFD must be cycled in order for a change to this configuration to take effect.

VFD2 Type (

TYPE) — This configuration sets the type of VFD communication. This configuration should not be changed without first consulting a Carrier service engineering representative.

Remote Control Switch Input — The remote switch

input is located on the RXB board and connected to TB201 terminals 3 and 4. The switch can be used for several remote control functions. See Table 69.

Remote Input State the actual real time state of the remote input.

Table 69 — Remote Switch Configuration

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS

REMT Remote

RM.CF Remote Switch

RMI.L RemSw

Input State

Config

Off-Unoc-Strt-NoOv

Remote Switch Config — This is the configuration that allows the user to assign different types of functionality to the remote discrete input.

• 0 — NO REMOTE SW — The remote switch will not be

used.

• 1 — OCC-UNOCC SW — The remote switch input will

control the occupancy state. When the remote switch input is ON, the unit will forced into the occupied mode. When the remote switch is OFF, the unit will be forced into the unoccupied mode.

• 2 — STRT/STOP — The remote switch input will start

and stop the unit. When the unit is commanded to stop, any timeguards in place on compressors will be honored first. When the remote switch is ON, the unit will be commanded to stop. When the remote switch is OFF the unit will be enabled to operate.

• 3 — OVERRIDE SW — The remote switch can be used

to override any internal or external time schedule being used by the control and force the unit into an occupied mode when the remote input state is ON. When the remote switch is ON, the unit will be forced into an occupied state. When the remote switch is OFF, the unit will use its internal or external time schedules.

Remote Switch Logic Configuration SW.LGRMI.L) — The control allows for the configuration of a normally open/closed status of the remote input switch via RMI.L. If this variable is configured OPEN, then when the switch is open, the remote input switch perceives the logic state as OFF. Correspondingly, if RMI.L is set to CLOSED, the remote input switch will perceive a closed switch as meaning

(InputsGEN.IREMT) — This is

ON/OFF RMTIN

0 - 3 RMTINCFG

Open/Close RMTINLOG

(ConfigurationUNIT RM.CF)

(Configuration

OFF. See Table 70.

CCN

POINT



Table 70 — Remote Switch Logic Configuration

REMOTE

SWITCH LOGIC

CONFIGURATION

(RMI.L)

OPEN

CLOSED

SWITCH STATUS

OPEN OFF (0) xxxxx Unoccupied Start No Override

CLOSED ON (1) xxxxx Occupied Stop Override

OPEN ON (0) xxxxx Occupied Stop Override

CLOSED OFF (1) xxxxx Unoccupied Start No Override

REMOTE INPUT STATE

(REMT)

Hot Gas Bypass — The ComfortLink control system

supports the use of an optional minimum load hot gas bypass valve (MLV) that is directly controlled by the ComfortLink control system. This provides an additional stage of capacity as well as low load coil freeze protection. Hot gas bypass is an active part of the N-Series ComfortLink capacity staging and minimum evaporator load protection functions. It is controlled though the Minimum Load Valve function. The hot gas bypass option consists of a solenoid valve with a fixed orifice sized to provide a nominal 3-ton evaporator load bypass. A hot gas refrigerant line routes the bypassed hot gas from the discharge line of circuit A to the suction line of circuit A. An additional thermistor in the suction line allows the unit control to monitor suction superheat. When the unit control calls for hot gas bypass, the hot gas bypasses the evaporator and adds refrigeration load to the compressor circuit to reduce the cooling effect from Circuit A.

The hot gas bypass system is a factory-installed option in-

stalled on Circuit A only. This function is enabled at Configu-

ration



COOLMLV. When this function is enabled, an ad-

ditional stage of cooling capacity is provided by the unit control staging sequences (see Appendix C).

Space Temperature Offset — Space Temperature Off-

set corresponds to a slider on a T56 sensor that allows the occupant to adjust the space temperature by a configured range during an occupied period. This sensor is only applicable to units that are configured as Multi-Stage SPT control (Configu-

ration



UNITC.TYP = 4).

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS

SP.O.S Space Temp

SP.O.R Space Temp

SPTO Space Temperature

Offset Sensor

Offset Range

Offset

Space Temperature Offset Sensor



SENSSP.O.S) — This configuration disables the reading

Enable/ Disable

1 - 10 SPTO_RNG

+- SP. O . R ^F SPTO

(ConfigurationUNIT

CCN

POINT

SPTOSENS

of the offset slider. Space Temperature Offset Range



UNITSENSSP.O.R) — This configuration establishes

(Configuration

the range, in degrees F, that the T56 slider can affect SPTO when adjusting the slider from the far left (-SP.O.R) to the far right (+SP.O.R). The default is 5° F.

Space Temperature Offset Value



SPTO) — The Space Temperature Offset Value is the read-

(TemperaturesAIR.T

ing of the slider potentiometer in the T56 that is resolved to delta degrees based on SP.O.R.

TIME CLOCK CONFIGURATION

This section describes each Time Clock menu item. Not every point will need to be configured for every unit. Refer to the Controls Quick Start section for more information on what set points need to be configured for different applications. The

REMOTE SWITCH CONFIGURATION (RM.CF)

0123

No Remote Switch Occ-Unocc Switch Start/Stop Override

Time Clock menu items are discussed in the same order that they are displayed in the Time Clock table. The Time Clock menu is shown in Table 71.

Hour and Minute (HH.MM) — The hour and minute

of the time clock are displayed in 24-hour, military time. Time can be adjusted manually by the user.

When connected to the CCN, the unit can be configured to transmit time over the network or receive time from a network device. All devices on the CCN should use the same time. Only one device on the CCN should broadcast time or problems will occur.

Month of Year (MNTH) — This variable is the current

month of the calendar year.

Day of Month (DOM) — This variable is the current

day (1 to 31) of the month.

Day of Week (DAY) — This variable is the current day

of the week (Monday through Sunday).

Year (YEAR) — This variable is the current year (for ex-

ample, 2013).

Local Time Schedule (SCH.L) — This submenu is

used to program the time schedules. There are 8 periods (PER.1 through PER.8). Each time period can be used to set up a local schedule for the unit. Refer to the Programming Operating Schedules section on page 29 for more information.

MONDAY IN PERIOD (PER.X able is used to include or remove Monday from the schedule. Each period is assigned an occupied on and off time. If this variable is set to YES, then Monday will be included in that period’s occupied time schedule. If this variable is set to NO, then the period’s occupied time schedule will not be used on Monday. This variable can be set for Periods 1 through 8.

TUESDAY IN PERIOD (PER.X able is used to include or remove Tuesday from the schedule. Each period is assigned an occupied on and off time. If this variable is set to YES, then Tuesday will be included in that period’s occupied time schedule. If this variable is set to NO, then the period’s occupied time schedule will not be used on Tuesday. This variable can be set for Periods 1 through 8.

WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD (PER.X This variable is used to include or remove Wednesday from the schedule. Each period is assigned an occupied on and off time. If this variable is set to YES, then Wednesday will be included in that period’s occupied time schedule. If this variable is set to NO, then the period’s occupied time schedule will not be used on Wednesday. This variable can be set for Periods 1 through 8.

THURSDAY IN PERIOD (PER.X variable is used to include or remove Thursday from the schedule. Each period is assigned an occupied on and off time. If this variable is set to YES, then Thursday will be included in that period’s occupied time schedule. If this variable is set to NO, then the period’s occupied time schedule will not be used on Thursday. This variable can be set for Periods 1 through 8.



DAYSMON) — This vari-



DAYSTUE) — This vari-



DAYSWED) —



DAYSTHU) — This

Table 71 — Time Clock Menu

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE CCN POINT DEFAULT

TIME TIME OF DAY

HH.MM Hour and Minute 00:00 TIME

DATE MONTH,DATE,DAY AND YEAR

MNTH Month of Year multi-text strings MOY DOM Day of Month 0-31 DOM DAY Day of Week multi-text strings DOWDISP YEAR Year e.g. 2003 YOCDISP

SCH.L LOCAL TIME SCHEDULE

PER.1 PERIOD 1 PER.1DAYS DAY FLAGS FOR PERIOD 1 Period 1 only PER.1DAYSMON Monday in Period YES/NO PER1MON Yes PER.1DAYSTUE Tuesday in Period YES/NO PER1TUE Yes PER.1DAYSWED Wednesday in Period YES/NO PER1WED Yes PER.1DAYSTHU Thursday in Period YES/NO PER1THU Yes PER.1DAYSFRI Friday in Period YES/NO PER1FRI Yes PER.1DAYSSAT Saturday in Period YES/NO PER1SAT Yes PER.1DAYSSUN Sunday in Period YES/NO PER1SUN Yes PER.1DAYSHOL Holiday in Period YES/NO PER1HOL Yes PER.1OCC Occupied from 00:00 PER1_OCC 00:00 PER.1UNC Occupied to 00:00 PER1_UNC 24:00 Repeat for periods 2-8

HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES

HD.01 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 01 HD.01MON Holiday Start Month 0-12 HOL_MON1 HD.01DAY Star t Day 0-31 HOL_DAY1 HD.01LEN Duration (Days) 0-99 HOL_LEN1 Repeat for holidays 2-30

DAY.S DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

DS.ST DAYLIGHT SAVINGS START DS.STST.MN Month 1 - 12 STARTM 4 DS.ST DS.STST.DY Day 1 - 7 STARTD 7 DS.STMIN.A Minutes to Add 0 - 90 MINADD 60

DS.SP DAYLIGHTS SAVINGS STOP

DS.SPSP.MN Month 1 - 12 STOPM 10 DS.SPSP.WK Week 1 - 5 STOPW 5 DS.SPSP.DY Day 1 - 7 STOPD 7 DS.SPMIN.S Minutes to Subtract 0 - 90 MINSUB 60

ST.WK Week 1 - 5 STARTW 1



FRIDAY IN PERIOD (PER.X

DAYSFRI) — This vari-

able is used to include or remove Friday from the schedule. Each period is assigned an occupied on and off time. If this variable is set to YES, then Friday will be included in that period’s occupied time schedule. If this variable is set to NO, then the period’s occupied time schedule will not be used on Friday. This variable can be set for Periods 1 through 8.

SATURDAY IN PERIOD (PER.X



DAYSSAT) — This

variable is used to include or remove Saturday from the schedule. Each period is assigned an occupied on and off time. If this variable is set to YES, then Saturday will be included in that period’s occupied time schedule. If this variable is set to NO, then the period’s occupied time schedule will not be used on Saturday. This variable can be set for Periods 1 through 8.

SUNDAY IN PERIOD (PER.X



DAYSSUN) — This vari-

able is used to include or remove Sunday from the schedule. Each period is assigned an occupied on and off time. If this variable is set to YES, then Sunday will be included in that period’s occupied time schedule. If this variable is set to NO, then the period’s occupied time schedule will not be used on Sunday. This variable can be set for Periods 1 through 8.

HOLIDAY IN PERIOD (PER.X



DAYSHOL) — This

variable is used to include or remove a Holiday from the schedule. Each period is assigned an occupied on and off time. If this variable is set to YES, then holidays will be included in that period’s occupied time schedule. If this variable is set to NO, then the period’s occupied time schedule will not be used on holidays. This variable can be set for Periods 1 through 8.

OCCUPIED FROM (PER.X



OCC) — This variable is used to configure the start time of the Occupied period. All days in the same period set to YES will enter into Occupied mode at this time.

OCCUPIED TO (PER.X



UNC) — This variable is used to configure the end time of the Occupied period. All days in the same period set to YES will exit Occupied mode at this time.

Local Holiday Schedules (HOL.L) — This submenu

is used to program the local holiday schedules. Up to 30 holidays can be configured. When a holiday occurs, the unit will follow the occupied schedules that have the HOLIDAY IN PERIOD point set to YES.

Holiday Start Month (

HD.01 to HD.30MON) — This is the start month for the holiday. The numbers 1 to 12 correspond to the months of the year (e.g., January = 1).

Holiday Start Day (

HD.01 to HD.30DAY) — This is the start day of the month for the holiday. The day can be set from 1 to 31.

Holdiay Duration (

HD.01 to HD.30LEN) — This is the length in days of the holiday. The holiday can last up to 99 days.

Daylight Savings Time (DAY.S) — The daylight sav-

ings time function is used in applications where daylight savings time occurs. The function will automatically correct the clock on the days configured for daylight savings time.

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS START (DS.ST) — This submenu configures the start date and time for daylight savings.

Daylight Savings Start Month ( the start month for daylight savings time. The numbers 1 to 12 correspond to the months of the year (e.g., January = 1).

Daylight Savings Start Week ( the start week of the month for daylight savings. The week can be set from 1 to 5.

Daylight Savings Start Day ( start day of the week for daylight savings. The day can be set from 1 to 7 (Sunday=1, Monday=2, etc.).

Daylight Savings Minutes To Add ( is the amount of time that will be added to the time clock for daylight savings.

DS.STST.MN) — This is

DS.STST.WK) — This is

DS.STST.DY) — This is the

DS.STMIN.A) — This

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS STOP (DS.SP) — This submenu configures the end date and time for daylight savings.

Daylight Savings Stop Month ( the stop month for daylight savings time. The numbers 1 to 12 correspond to the months of the year (e.g., January = 1).

Daylight Savings Stop Week ( the stop week of the month for daylight savings. The week can be set from 1 to 5.

Daylight Savings Stop Day ( stop day of the week for daylight savings. The day can be set from 1 to 7 (Sunday=1, Monday=2, etc.).

Daylight Savings Minutes To Subtract ( This is the amount of time that will be removed from the time clock after daylight savings ends.

DS.SPSP.MN) — This is

DS.SPSP.WK) — This is

DS.SPSP.DY) — This is the

DS.SPMIN.S) —

TROUBLESHOOTING

The Navigator™ display shows the actual operating conditions of the unit while it is running. If there are alarms or there have been alarms, they will be displayed in either the current alarm list or the history alarm list. The Service Test mode allows operation of the compressors, fans, and other components to be checked while the unit is not operating.

Complete Unit Stoppage — There are several condi-

tions that can cause the unit to not provide heating or cooling. If an alarm is active which causes the unit to shut down, diagnose the problem using the information provided in the Alarms and Alerts section on page 115, but also check for the following:

• Cooling and heating loads are satisfied.

• Programmed schedule.

• General power failure.

• Tripped control circuit transformers circuit breakers.

• Tripped compressor circuit breakers.

• Unit is turned off through the CCN network.

Single Circuit Stoppage — If a single circuit stops in-

correctly, there are several possible causes. The problem should be investigated using information from the alarm and alert list.

Service Analysis — Detailed service analysis can be

found in Tables 72-75 and Fig. 21.

Restart Procedure — Before attempting to restart the

machine, check the alarm list to determine the cause of the shutdown. If a shutdown alarm for a particular circuit has occurred, determine and correct the cause before allowing the unit to run under its own control again. When there is problem, the unit should be diagnosed in Service Test mode. The alarms

must be reset before the circuit can operate in either Normal mode or Service Test mode.

Humidi-MiZer® Troubleshooting — Use the unit

Navigator or a CCN device to view the status display and the diagnostic display for information concerning cooling operation with the Humidi-MiZer system. Check the Current Alarms and Alarm History for for any unresolved alarm codes and correct. Verify Humidi-MiZer configuration settings are correct for the site requirements. If alarm conditions are corrected and cleared, then operation of the compressors, fans, and HumidiMiZer valves may be verified by using the Service Test mode. See page 29. In addition to the Cooling Service Analysis (Table 72), see the Humidi-MiZer Service Analysis (Table 73) for more information.

Thermistor Troubleshooting — Th e O AT, SAT,

RAT, CCT, T55, T56, and T58 temperature sensors use 10K thermistors. Resistances at various temperatures are listed in Table 76 and 77. The DTT, LT-A and LT-B use an 86K thermistor. See Table 78. The ST-A1, ST-A2, ST-B1, ST-B2 and RGTA use a 5K thermistor. See Table 79 and 80.

THERMISTOR/TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK — A high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this check.

1. With the unit powered down, remove the terminal strip of the thermistor being diagnosed from the appropriate control board (MBB-J8 or RCB-J6). Connect the digital ohmmeter across the appropriate thermistor terminals in the terminal strip.

2. Using the resistance reading obtained, read the sensor temperature from the appropriate sensor table.

3. To check thermistor accuracy, measure the temperature at the thermistor location with an accurate thermocoupletype temperature measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading. The temperature measured by the thermocouple and the temperature determined from the thermistor resistance reading should be within 5° F (3° C) if care was taken in applying thermocouple and taking readings.

If a more accurate check is required, unit must be powered down and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature (freezing point or boiling point of water) by measuring the resistance of the thermistor with the terminal strip removed from the control board. With the terminal strip plugged back into the control board and the unit powered up, compare the temperature determined from the resistance measurement with the value displayed by the control in the Temperatures menu using the Navigator display.

Table 72 — Cooling Service Analysis

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Compressor and Fan Will Not Start.

Compressor Cycles (Other Than Normally Satisfying Thermostat).

Compressors Operates Continuously.

Excessive Head Pressures. Loose condenser thermistors. Tighten thermistors.

Condenser Fans Not Operating. No Power to contactors. Fuse blown or plug at motor loose. Excessive Suction Pressure. High heat load. Check for sources and eliminate

Suction Pressure Too Low. Dirty air filters. Replace air filters.

LEGEND

EXV — Expansion Valve Control Board ST — Suction Temperature

Power failure. Check power source. Call power company. Fuse blown or circuit breaker tripped. Check fuses

and circuit breakers in power and control panels. Disconnect off. Power disconnect. Compressor time guard to prevent short cycling. Check using ComfortLink Navigator display. Thermostat or occupancy schedule set point not call-

ing for Cooling. Outdoor temperature too low. Check Compressor Lockout Temperature (MC.LO)

Active alarm. Check active alarms using ComfortLink Navigator

Insufficient line voltage. Determine cause and correct. Active alarm. Check active alarms using ComfortLink Navigator

Unit undersized for load. Decrease load or increase of size of unit. Thermostat or occupancy schedule set point too low. Reset thermostat or schedule set point. Dirty air filters. Replace filters. Low refrigerant charge. Check pressure, locate leak, repair evacuate, and

Condenser coil dirty or restricted. Clean coil or remove restriction.

Dirty condenser coil. Clean coil. Refrigerant overcharge. Recover excess refrigerant. Faulty EXV. 1. Check ST thermistor mounting and secure

EXV boad malfunction. Check alarm history for A169 (expansion valve con-

Condenser air restricted or air short cycling. Determine cause and correct. Restriction in liquid tube. Remove restriction.

Faulty EXV. 1. Check ST thermistor mounting and secure

EXV board malfunction. Check alarm history for A169 (expansion valve con-

Refrigerant overcharged. Recover excess refrigerant.

Low refrigerant charge. Check for leaks, repair, and recharge. Faulty EXV. 1. Check ST thermistor mounting and secure

EXV board malfunction. Check alarm history for A169 (expansion valve con-

Insufficient evaporator airflow. Check belt tension. Check for other restrictions. Temperature too low in conditioned area (low return-

air temperature).

Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker.

Check using ComfortLink Navigator display.

using ComfortLink Navigator display.

display.

recharge.

tightly to suction line and insulate.

2. Replace EXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed.

3. Run EXV auto-component test.

trol board comm. failure)

tightly to suction line and insulate.

2. Replace EXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed.

3. Run EXV auto-component test.

trol board comm. failure)

tightly to suction line and insulate.

2. Replace EXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed.

3. Run EXV auto-component test.

trol board comm. failure)

Reset thermostat or occupancy schedule.

100

Carrier WeatherExpert N3, WeatherExpert N8, WeatherExpert N6, WeatherExpert N7, WeatherExpert N9 Controls, Start-up, Operation, Service And Troubleshooting Instructions

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual